You are on page 1of 388

Welcome!

New Products and Services for 2005


The exciting advances in our technology promise to continue in 2005, and Motorola's Technical
Information Products and Services is excited about partnering with you to ensure that the
professionals who work on your Motorola wireless network are ready for these exciting advances. In
our 2005 catalog, you will find a comprehensive range of products and services to compliment the
high quality and value of our traditional classroom and laboratory training courses.

The 2005 catalog is a guide to training courses available through Technical Information Products
and Services. It lists the recommended learning paths to properly operate and maintain Motorola's
cellular Infrastructure equipment. Also, the catalog provides a brief description of each course, the
course objectives, expected attendees, course prerequisites, and a listing of key lesson objectives
associated with each course.

We are excited about the success that our new TECHKNOWMOTO offering can bring to your
organization. TECHKNOWMOTO is designed specifically for rapid transfer of skills and knowledge
to your wireless network associates. Our focus is to provide the right skills to the right audience at
the right time. TECHKNOWMOTO is a proven four-step process that ensures the training solutions
identified are appropriate for your network personnel.

The first step of TECHKNOWMOTO is a Training Needs Analysis. The results of this analysis drive
the second phase of TECHKNOWMOTO, the Focused Training Solution. The Focused Training
Solution is a detailed curriculum designed specifically for your network implementation. Ensure the
success of the training by engaging in a Technical Competency Assessment. The Technical
Competency Assessment will also provide your network personnel with detailed individual
development plans. Validate the development of your personnel with Motorolas Professional
Certification program. The TECHKNOWMOTO offering is designed to help reduce your
infrastructure operating expenses, increase the efficiency of your network, and help to increase the
return on your network investment.

We also continue to expand our electronic offerings of information products as we move more
information from hard copy print to more flexible electronic formats of the operation information you
need to support your Motorola wireless network. Also, we have completely redesigned the
navigation and search capabilities of our extranet to assist you in finding quickly the specific
information you need.

To learn more about these exciting new products and services, visit our Web site at
http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com

In a constantly evolving cellular industry, engineering experience and expertise provides Wireless
Operators with a significant competitive edge. Motorolas comprehensive training portfolio offers you
the opportunity to develop a novice into an expert in the shortest possible lead time.

Knowledge
Motorola is committed to a philosophy of knowledge transfer, enabling Wireless Operators to get the
most out of Motorolas leading edge technology and advanced software applications.

It is essential that a Wireless Operator ensures engineers are trained to the optimum level, in the
correct disciplines, to facilitate a right-first-time approach, minimizing human error and reducing cost
of network ownership. This is achieved by providing a comprehensive training curriculum supported
by an extensive training schedule and complete Customer support documentation.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 1


Welcome!

Catalog
This catalog comprises a description of the training curriculum for each jobset stream with respect to
CDMA, GSM, GPRS and 3G networks, followed by an outline of each course in the curriculum.
General information is also available which will help you to make arrangements for your course.

The catalog is divided into the following sections:


Regional Training Centers provides a complete list of Motorola technical training facilities
worldwide.
Student Information and Services provides information needed to register and enroll in
classes at the various training facilities worldwide. This portion of the catalog features a list of
local hotel accommodations, driving directions and maps to our facilities.
Motorola Technical Training Direct provides information needed about Motorolas Learning
Management System (LMS), which allows students the opportunity to participate in technical
courses anywhere, anytime. The LMS enables students and training administrators to enroll in
eLearning as well as our traditional instructor-led courses, allowing them to track their progress
and to manage a larger number of students.
Training Advice and Job Functions provide a logical representation of curriculum paths and
prerequisites. The Motorola Training Curriculum is designed around a number of jobset
descriptions researched through Cellular Operators. These jobset functions are essentially
generic and cannot be guaranteed to exactly match the individual organization of each Cellular
Operator. With this in mind, a certain amount of interpretation may be necessary to adapt the
jobset streams for specific operational requirements.
Customer Certification process enables an engineer to have their skills and knowledge
assessed as well as providing a career path to enhance their capabilities. Our certification
programs are designed to efficiently train technicians and engineers to function within 2G, 2.5G,
and 3G wireless environments. The certification program also provides the competencies
(knowledge and skills by job functions) needed to successfully complete certification exams
provided at the end of each module.
Course Descriptions: provides a complete list of all courses offered by Motorola. Motorola offers
traditional instructor-led courses as well as web- and cd-rom-based e-learning courses. Courses
in this catalog are listed alphabetically within their applicable technology area (General Courses,
CDMA Courses, GSM Courses, GPRS Courses, UMTS Courses, TDMA Courses, and On
Demand Courses).

Course prerequisites
Prerequisites have been identified for most courses presented by Technical Information Products
and Services. Satisfying course prerequisites ensures that students receive the maximum benefit
from training. Please verify prospective students have met entry requirements.

If a student does not meet the prerequisites or have prerequisite knowledge at the time of
enrollment, Technical Information Products and Services will be happy to enroll the student in a pre-
requisite class which would be more beneficial to their learning progress. Technical Information
Products and Services retains the right to remove a student from the class without refund should
that student impede the progress of the course as a whole.

2 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Welcome!

My Network Support
The Technical Information Products and Services course catalog, schedule, bulletins and other
helpful information are available online. All customers and Motorolans can view this information by
accessing the following web site: http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com

Motorola secures entry for the protection of our customers through the use of a password. Obtain a
Motorola membership account by selecting the establish membership link and completing the
Online Account Application. After receiving your login name and password, you will be able to use
all of our site resources.
a. When you have your login name and password, access Technical Information Products and
Services online at: http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com
b. Use your Motorola User ID and Password to log into the site.
c. Choose the appropriate Technical Training and Documentation link from the left side of the
screen.
d. Select the course schedule, interactive catalog or other features by clicking with your mouse.

Changes/additions to courses
The courses described in this catalog are subject to change based on options and modifications to
Motorola products. Courses and classes are added and updated throughout the year, as needed.
Additional information will be made available on the My Network Support web page. Also, you may
call Motorola Training at any time to inquire about additions.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 3


Welcome! ................................................................................................................................................................ 1

Regional Training Centers ........................................................................................................................ 13

Student Information and Services ......................................................................................................... 15


All Motorola Training Facilities .............................................................................................................................. 16
Schaumburg, Illinois .............................................................................................................................................. 18
Jaguarina, Brazil ................................................................................................................................................. 25
Swindon, United Kingdom ..................................................................................................................................... 27
Hyderabad, India ................................................................................................................................................... 31
Beijing, China ........................................................................................................................................................ 33
Johannesburg, South Africa .................................................................................................................................. 35
Product Modular Buyout Training ......................................................................................................................... 37

Motorola Technical Training Direct....................................................................................................... 39


Cisco and Networking Courses ............................................................................................................................. 40

Training Advice .............................................................................................................................................. 41


Certification Levels ................................................................................................................................................ 42

GSM Certification Path ............................................................................................................................... 43


Certification path for GSM non-technical staff / managers ................................................................................... 44
Certification path for GSM Technical Managers ................................................................................................... 45
Certification path for BSS (GSM) Installation Engineer ........................................................................................ 46
Certification path for BSS (GSM) Technicians ...................................................................................................... 47
Certification path for BSS (GSM) OMC-R Operator Engineer .............................................................................. 48
Certification path for BSS (GSM) Planner ............................................................................................................. 49
Certification path for BSS (GSM) Engineer ........................................................................................................... 50
Certification path for BSS (GSM) Configuration/Optimization Engineer ............................................................... 51
Certification Path for OMC (GSM) System Administrator ..................................................................................... 52

GPRS Certification Path............................................................................................................................. 53


Certification path for GPRS non-technical staff / managers ................................................................................. 54
Certification path for GPRS technical managers .................................................................................................. 55
Certification path for BSS (GPRS) Engineer ......................................................................................................... 56
Certification path for BSS (GPRS) OMC-R Operator Engineer ............................................................................ 57
Certification path for BSS (GPRS) Planner ........................................................................................................... 58
Certification for BSS (GPRS) Configuration / Optimization Engineer ................................................................... 59

CDMA Certification Path ............................................................................................................................ 61


Certification Path for CDMA Non-technical Staff / Managers ............................................................................... 62
Certification Path for CDMA Technical Managers ................................................................................................ 63
CDMA Wireless Core Certification ........................................................................................................................ 64
CDMA IP Core Certification .................................................................................................................................. 65
Certification Path for CDMA BTS Technician ....................................................................................................... 66
Certification Path for CDMA BTS Engineer .......................................................................................................... 67
Certification Path for CDMA Circuit Switch Engineer ............................................................................................ 68
Certification Path for CDMA Packet Switch Engineer ........................................................................................... 69

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 5


Certification path for CDMA IP RAN Engineer ...................................................................................................... 70
Certification Path for CDMA Intelligent Network Engineer .................................................................................... 71
Certification Path for CDMA Performance Engineer ............................................................................................. 72
Certification Path for CDMA RF Planner ............................................................................................................... 73
Certification Path for CDMA RAN Network Operator ............................................................................................ 75
Certification Path for CDMA RAN Administrator ................................................................................................... 76
Certification Path for CDMA CBSC Engineer ........................................................................................................ 77

Customer Support Documentation ....................................................................................................... 80


CDMA Documentation .......................................................................................................................................... 81
GSM/GPRS Documentation .................................................................................................................................. 83

Motorola Technical Training Tiering Model ................................................................................... 86


Tiering ................................................................................................................................................................... 87

General Courses ............................................................................................................................................ 98


GEN-ENG745: Understanding ATM ...................................................................................................................... 99
GEN-ENG746: Understanding Advanced ATM ................................................................................................... 100
GEN-ENG934: Understanding the Basics of Communications Networks ........................................................... 101
GEN-ENG936: Understanding SS7 for IN, Wireless, and VoIP .......................................................................... 102
GEN-ENG937 : Understanding Wireless Internet Access .................................................................................. 103
GEN-ENG942: Understanding 3G Wireless Mobile Communications ................................................................ 104
GEN-ENG943: Understanding Emerging Wireless Technologies ....................................................................... 105
GEN-ENG945: Understanding TCP/IP ............................................................................................................... 106
GEN-ENG947: Understanding Voice over IP ...................................................................................................... 107
GEN-ENG948: Understanding Frame Relay ...................................................................................................... 108
GEN-ENG949: Understanding Quality of Service, IP, ATM and MPLS ............................................................... 109
GEN-GNL010: UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network ........................................................................110
GEN-GNL167: Understanding Radio Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 111
GEN-GNL168: Understanding Transmission in Telecommunications Network .................................................. 112
GEN-GNL169: Understanding the Basics of Wireless Communications .............................................................113
GEN-GNL179: Understanding Data Networking ..................................................................................................114
GEN-GNL186: Understanding Digital Subscriber Lines .......................................................................................115
GEN-GNL187: Understanding the Basics of SONET ..........................................................................................116
GEN-GNL188: Understanding ISDN ....................................................................................................................117
GEN-GNL189: Understanding Optical Networking ..............................................................................................118
GEN-GNL191: WAP 2.0 M-Services ....................................................................................................................119
GEN-GNL192: Overview of Wireless LAN .......................................................................................................... 120
GEN-GNL193: IP Quality of Service ................................................................................................................... 121
GEN-GNL194: Sessions Initiation Protocol ......................................................................................................... 122
GEN-GNL195: Overview of MPLS ...................................................................................................................... 123
GEN-GNL240: Evolution from GSM to UMTS .................................................................................................... 124
GEN-GNL241: Overview of CDMA2000 Networks ............................................................................................. 125
GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1 ................................................................................................................................. 126
GEN-NET101: UNIX Part 2 ................................................................................................................................. 127
GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1 ....................................................................................................................... 128

6 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-NET201: Sun Solaris Part 2 ........................................................................................................................129
GEN-TEL1054: Understanding the Basic of Data Communications ....................................................................130
GEN-TEL1218: Understanding the Principles of LANs and WANs .....................................................................131
GEN-WAP101: WAP Overview ...........................................................................................................................132
GEN-WAP201: Writing Static WML Pages ..........................................................................................................133
GEN-WAP202: Writing WMLScript Applications .................................................................................................134
GEN-WAP301: Dynamic WAP Application Development Using Perl ..................................................................135

CDMA Courses..............................................................................................................................................136
CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview ................................................................................138
CDMA-AGN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE ............................................................................139
CDMA-BTS480: SC 480 CDMA BTS ...............................................................................................................140
CDMA-BTS610: SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked) ....................................................141
CDMA-BTS710: SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked) ......................................................142
CDMA-BTS780: SC 4812 Series BTS Packet Backhaul Upgrade ...................................................................143
CDMA-BTS910: SC 4812T-MC BTS ...............................................................................................................144
CDMA-GNL035: 1X EV-DO Overview .................................................................................................................145
CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA ...............................................................................................................146
CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) eLearning .................................................................147
CDMA-GNL120: Basic IP Fundamentals .............................................................................................................148
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based) .....................................................................................................149
CDMA-GNL138: R16.5 Overview ........................................................................................................................151
CDMA-MLS100NE: MLS Network Element Overview .........................................................................................152
CDMA-MLS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MLS ....................................................................................153
CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview ............................................................................................154
CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM .......................................................................................155
CDMA-MM117NE: MM II Network Element Overview .........................................................................................157
CDMA-MMG101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola Media Gateway ..................................................159
CDMA-MSS100: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Overview ...............................................................................160
CDMA-MSS100A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Administration and Provisioning ..........................................161
CDMA-MSS100MI: MSS Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................162
CDMA-MSS100W: MSS-C Delta Workshop ........................................................................................................163
CDMA-MSS200A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Translations ........................................................................164
CDMA-MSSC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA .......................................165
CDMA-NET400A: 1X Network Administration (Unix) ..........................................................................................166
CDMA-NET500A: SC Cisco Network Administration ..........................................................................................167
CDMA-NETRA104NE: Netra 20 Network Element Overview ..............................................................................168
CDMA-NETRA440NE: Netra 440 Network Element Overview ............................................................................169
CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview ................................................................................170
CDMA-OMCP104NE: OMC-IP with Netra 20 Network Element Overview ..........................................................171
CDMA-OMCP100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMC-IP ..........................................................................172
CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview ................................................................................173
CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration .................................................................................174
CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR .............................................................................175
CDMA-OMCR104NE: OMCR with Netra 20 Network Element Overview ...........................................................176
CDMA-OMCR110A: SDU-OMCR Database Administration ................................................................................177

March 2005 Visit our web site a http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 7


CDMA-OMCR120A: pBTS-OMCR Database Administration .............................................................................. 178
CDMA-OMCR140A: VPU-OMCR Database Administration ............................................................................... 179
CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals ................................................................................... 180
CDMA-pBTS101OM: Operations and Maintenance: pBTS ................................................................................ 181
CDMA-PDSN100NE: PDSN Cisco Network Element Overview ......................................................................... 182
CDMA-PDSN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: Cisco PDSN .................................................................... 183
CDMA-PDSN101NE: PDSN 3Com Network Element Overview ........................................................................ 184
CDMA-PDSN200OM: Operations and Maintenance: 3Com PDSN .................................................................... 185
CDMA-PER040: IMS: IP Multimedia Subsystem Overview ................................................................................ 186
CDMA-PER220: Message Register (MR) ........................................................................................................... 188
CDMA-PER235: SMS Gateway Server .............................................................................................................. 189
CDMA-PER240: OMC-IP SYSLOG Analysis ...................................................................................................... 190
CDMA-PER250: System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP) .................................................................. 191
CDMA-PER450: UNO Element Manager ............................................................................................................ 192
CDMA-PER460: UNO Market Manager .............................................................................................................. 193
CDMA-PER500: Access Network Tools .............................................................................................................. 194
CDMA-PoC100: Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC) Overview .............................................................................. 195
CDMA-PoC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Push To Talk ...................................................................... 196
CDMA-REL164: R16.4/R16.4.1 Delta Workshop ................................................................................................ 197
CDMA-REL165: R16.5 Delta Workshop ............................................................................................................. 198
CDMA-S2K320: 3G CDMA 2000 Implementation and Operational Issues ......................................................... 199
CDMA-S2K400: WCDMA for UMTS: Guided Tour of the Physical Layer ........................................................... 200
CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview ........................................................................................ 201
CDMA-SDU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: SDU ................................................................................... 202
CDMA-SWT060: Nortel MTX Overview (Web-based) ........................................................................................ 203
CDMA-SWT070: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals ............................................................................................ 204
CDMA-SWT080: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals Advanced ........................................................................... 205
CDMA-SYSEV001: 1XEV-DO Operations .......................................................................................................... 206
CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM Overview ................................................................ 207
CDMA-SYS110A: 1X System Administration (Unix) ........................................................................................... 208
CDMA-SYS150: Alarm Handling and System Documentation ........................................................................... 209
CDMA-SYS230: CDMA RF Planning Course ..................................................................................................... 210
CDMA-SYS250: Optimization using SMAP ........................................................................................................ 211
CDMA-SYS300: CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link ............................................................................. 212
CDMA-SYS330MI: Advanced Troubleshooting Workshop ................................................................................. 213
CDMA-SYS340MI: OMCR-BTS Troubleshooting Workshop .............................................................................. 214
CDMA-SYS360: RAN Equipment Planning ........................................................................................................ 215
CDMA-SYS370: CDMA RAN IP Planning ........................................................................................................... 216
CDMA-SYS401: Performance Fundamentals ..................................................................................................... 217
CDMA-SYS500: CDMA2000 Call Flow ............................................................................................................... 218
CDMA-VPU100NE: VPU Network Element Overview ........................................................................................ 219
CDMA-VPU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: VPU .................................................................................... 220
CDMA-XC100NE: XC Network Element Overview ............................................................................................. 221
CDMA-XC100OM: Operations and Maintenance: XC ........................................................................................ 222

8 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GSM Courses .................................................................................................................................................223
GSM-BSS07: Advanced BSS Field Support ........................................................................................................224
GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory ...............................................................................................................225
GSM-BSS12: BSS Operations and Maintenance ................................................................................................226
GSM-BSS15: BSS Installer .................................................................................................................................227
GSM-ENG941: Understanding GSM ...................................................................................................................228
GSM-GSR7: (1760 Load) Delta Course ..............................................................................................................229
GSM-H11WKS Horizon II Macro Workshop .....................................................................................................230
GSM-HLS/EIS101: Operation and Maintenance ...............................................................................................231
GSM-MSS-G100 Motorola Soft Switch GSM ...................................................................................................232
GSM-MSS-G100A: Motorola SoftSwitch for GSM Administration and Provisioning ...........................................233
GSM-MSS-G101OM: Motorola SoftSwitch for GSM Operation and Maintenance ..............................................234
GSM-MSS-G200A: Motorola SoftSwitch Translations .........................................................................................235
GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations .........................................................................................................236
GSM-NET02: OMC-R Advanced Network Operations ........................................................................................237
GSM-NET03: Network Performance ...................................................................................................................238
GSM-NET04: Cell Optimization Product (COP) ..................................................................................................239
GSM-NET05: Network Health Analyst .................................................................................................................240
GSM-NET06: Datagen Operations ......................................................................................................................241
GSM-OMC03: OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform) ........................................................................242
GSM-OMC04: OMC-R System Administration Workshop (Sun Fire 4800, Sun Netra 20, Sun Blade 150) ........243
GSM-SYS01: GSM Interfaces and Protocols ......................................................................................................244
GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database .......................................................................................................245
GSM-SYS03: Advanced BSS Database ..............................................................................................................246
GSM-SYS04: Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning ..........................................................................247
GSM-SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems .......................................................248
GSM-WKS01: 3G/2G handover, 2G/3G cell reselection feature workshop Circuit switched .............................249
GSM-WKS03: HDPC Workshop ..........................................................................................................................250
GSM-WKS04: HDPC2 Workshop ........................................................................................................................251

GPRS Courses...............................................................................................................................................252
GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory ...........................................................................................................253
GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS ....................................................................................................................254
GPRS-CP07A: GPRS Overview (Non -Technical) ...............................................................................................255
GPRS-GNL140: Overview of GPRS ....................................................................................................................256
GPRS-GNL141: GPRS Air interface ....................................................................................................................257
GPRS-GNL142: GPRS Mobility ...........................................................................................................................258
GPRS-GNL143: GPRS Packet Data Operations .................................................................................................259
GPRS-GSN103: Gateway GPRS Support Node .................................................................................................260
GPRS-GSN203: Gateway GPRS Support Node - Advanced ..............................................................................261
GPRS-PoC100: Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC) Overview ...............................................................................262
GPRS-PoC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Push To Talk .......................................................................263
GPRS-SYS101: GPRS Interfaces and Protocols R99 .........................................................................................264
GPRS-SYS102: BSS (GPRS) Database .............................................................................................................265
GPRS-SYS104: BSS (GPRS) Planning ..............................................................................................................266
GPRS-SYS105: Introduction to EGPRS ..............................................................................................................267

March 2005 Visit our web site a http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 9


UMTS Courses .............................................................................................................................................. 269
UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS .................................................................................................................... 270
UMTS-GNL144: Overview of UMTS ................................................................................................................... 271
UMTS-GNL145: UMTS/W-CDMA Air Interface Fundamentals ........................................................................... 272
UMTS-GSN207: Sun Enterprise Cluster 3 Administration .................................................................................. 273
UMTS-GSN208: Sun StorEdge Volume Manager Administration ....................................................................... 274
UMTS-GSN209: Charging Gateway ................................................................................................................... 275
UMTS-GSN212: C-SGSN Hardware System and Installation ............................................................................ 276
UMTS-v2.0 HLR01: Motorola v2.0 HLR Hardware Structure and System Overview .......................................... 277
UMTS-v2.0 HLR02: Motorola v2.0 HLR Provisioning ......................................................................................... 278
UMTS-v2.0 HLR03: Motorola v2.0 HLR Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 279
UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure ............................................................................................ 280
UMTS-MTS-U02: Motorola MTS-U Operations and Maintenance ...................................................................... 281
UMTS-MTS-U03: MTS-U Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 282
UMTS-MTS-U MGW 01: MTS-U MGW Hardware and Structure and System Overview ................................... 283
UMTS-MTS-U MGW 02: MTS-U MGW Provisioning .......................................................................................... 284
UMTS-MTS-U MGW 03: Motorola MTS-U MGW Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 285
UMTS-NET201: OMCu Network Operations ...................................................................................................... 286
UMTS-NET203: UTRAN Network Performance ................................................................................................. 287
UMTS-NET211: OMC-T Network Operations ..................................................................................................... 288
UMTS-OMCu-S 01: Motorola OMCu-S Network Operations .............................................................................. 289
UMTS-RNS01: RNS Operational Overview ........................................................................................................ 290
UMTS-RNS02: RNS Operations and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 291
UMTS-SYS201 M1: UTRAN Air-Interface Protocols ........................................................................................... 292
UMTS-SYS201 M2: UTRAN Terrestrial Protocols .............................................................................................. 294
UMTS-SYS202 Module 1: UTRAN RNS Basic Database Parameters ............................................................... 296
UMTS-SYS202 Module 2: UTRAN RNS Database Radio Resource Management Parameters ........................ 297
UMTS-SYS204: UMTS Radio Planning .............................................................................................................. 298
UMTS-SYS205: HSDPA System Engineering and Protocols ............................................................................. 300
UMTS-SYS206: UMTS Rel. 4, 5 and 6 Core Network Architecture & Signaling - BICC, VoIP, PoC, IMS & SIP 302
UMTS-SYS212: C-SGSN Data Interface Configuration ...................................................................................... 303
UMTS-SYS213: C-SGSN Context Interfaces Configuration ............................................................................... 304
UMTS-TEL1226: Understanding UMTS .............................................................................................................. 305

TDMA Courses.............................................................................................................................................. 307


TDMA-ENG932: Understanding TDMA .............................................................................................................. 308

On Demand Courses.................................................................................................................................. 309


GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling ...........................................................................................................311
GEN-CP04: UNIX for OMC Users ....................................................................................................................... 312
GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles ....................................................................................................................... 313
GEN-CP06: Asynchronous Transfer Mode ......................................................................................................... 314
GEN-CP08: Frame Relay .................................................................................................................................... 315
GEN-CP09: TCP/IP ............................................................................................................................................. 316
GEN-CP10: Voice Over IP .................................................................................................................................. 317
GEN-CP11: WAP Overview ................................................................................................................................ 318

10 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-OMC-G103: Windows NT4.0 Core Technologies .......................................................................................319
CDMA-BTS720: SC 4812T Lite Base Transceiver Station ..............................................................................320
CDMA-BTS930: SC 300 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) ...........................................................................321
CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) ..................................................................................322
CDMA-GNL090: CNEOMI Fundamentals ...........................................................................................................323
CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling .......................................................................................324
CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview .............................................................................................................................325
CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................326
CDMA-GNL134: R16.3 Overview ........................................................................................................................327
CDMA-GNL135: 1X Non-Technical Overview .....................................................................................................328
CDMA-GNL136: R16.4/R16.4.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................329
CDMA-GNL800: IS-95 CDMA Technology ..........................................................................................................330
CDMA-GNL810: CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT ................................................................................................................331
CDMA-GNL820: IS-95 & CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT ...................................................................................................332
CDMA-OMCR101: SUN OMC-R (CDMA) ........................................................................................................333
CDMA-PER200: K-Series Fundamentals ............................................................................................................334
CDMA-PER210: IS-41 Operation ........................................................................................................................335
CDMA-PER270: Compaq HLR41/AC ..................................................................................................................336
CDMA-PER290: CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance ...........................................................337
CDMA-PER350: NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA .........................................................................................338
CDMA-PER360: NetPlan CDMA RF System Design ..........................................................................................339
CDMA-PER390: Multimedia Message Service Center ........................................................................................340
CDMA-PER470: UNO Software Installation ........................................................................................................341
CDMA-PER640: S-Series Fundamentals ............................................................................................................342
CDMA-REL163: 16.3 Delta Workshop ................................................................................................................343
CDMA-SAO110: IOS ...........................................................................................................................................344
CDMA-SAO190: Performance Management .......................................................................................................346
CDMA-SON101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Sonus Gateway ..................................................................347
CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1) .............................................................................348
CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2) .............................................................................349
CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) .............................................................................350
CDMA-SWT150: EMX Advanced ......................................................................................................................351
CDMA-SWT160: DMX .........................................................................................................................................352
CDMA-SWT180: Managing Switch Performance and Growth ............................................................................353
CDMA-SWT240: EMX Translations (International) ...........................................................................................354
CDMA-SWT260: CCS/SS7 Implementation ........................................................................................................355
CDMA-SWT270: CCS/C7 Implementation ..........................................................................................................356
CDMA-SWT280: Split Mode Operation and Maintenance ...................................................................................357
CDMA-SWT340: EMX Overview .......................................................................................................................358
CDMA-SWT281: SLIC II Operations ...................................................................................................................359
CDMA-SWT370: EMX-V Provisioning ..............................................................................................................360
CDMA-SWT440: EMX-V Translations ..............................................................................................................361
CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance .........................................................................................362
CDMA-SYS102: NOCC Monitoring .....................................................................................................................363
CDMA-SYS200: CBSC/RFDS Operations ..........................................................................................................364
GSM-BSS05: BTS Theory and Equipment Operation .........................................................................................365

March 2005 Visit our web site a http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 11


GSM-BSS11A: BSS Overview (Non-Technical) ................................................................................................. 366
GSM-BSS14: BSS Technical Overview .............................................................................................................. 367
GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular ........................................................................................................... 368
GSM-CP02A: GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical) ...................................................................................... 369
GSM-CP15: Principles of RF Planning ............................................................................................................... 370
GSM-GSR6: Delta Course .................................................................................................................................. 371
GSM-HLR01: Hardware System Structure ......................................................................................................... 372
GSM-HLR02: SPU Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................................. 373
GSM-HLR03: SMU Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................................ 374
GSM-MTSG01: Hardware System Structure ...................................................................................................... 375
GSM-MTSG02: Operation and Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 376
GSM-MTSG03: Motorola MTSG Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 377
GSM-OMC01: OMC-R Overview ........................................................................................................................ 378
GSM-OMC01A: OMC-R Overview (Non-Technical) ........................................................................................... 379
GSM-OMCS/T 01: Motorola OMC-S/T System Structure ................................................................................... 380
GSM-OMCS/T 02: Motorola OMC-S/T Introduction to Operation System and Database ................................ 381
GSM-OMCS/T 03: Motorola OMC-S/T Operation and Maintenance ............................................................... 382
GSM-PER300: NetPlan ....................................................................................................................................... 383
GPRS-BSS102: PCU Installation and Maintenance ........................................................................................... 384
GPRS-GSN101: Cisco ICND .............................................................................................................................. 385
GPRS-NET103: BSS (GPRS) Network Performance ......................................................................................... 386
GPRS-SYS116: SF Database and SGSN Signaling Interfaces .......................................................................... 387
UMTS-CP13A: UMTS Overview (Non-Technical) ............................................................................................... 388
UMTS-PER560: NetPlan UMTS Static Simulator ............................................................................................... 389
UMTS-PER570: NetPlan Fundamentals Plus UMTS .......................................................................................... 390

12 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Regional Training Centers

Motorola maintains training centers throughout the world to better serve our customers.

Brazil
Location: Jaguarina, Brazil
Telephone number: +55 19 3847 7155
Email: technicaltraining.LAC@motorola.com
Technology: CDMA, Switching, Networking, Analog, GSM
Language(s): Portuguese, Spanish, English

China
Location: Beijing, China
Telephone number: +86 10 684 37222 Extension 2120
Technology: CDMA, Switching, Networking, GSM, GPRS, UMTS
Language(s): Mandarin, English

France
Location: Paris-Saclay, France
Telephone number: +33 (0) 1 69 35 78 23
Email: Email: technicaltraining.FR@motorola.com
Technology: GSM, GPRS
Language(s): French

India
Location: Hyderabad, India
Telephone number: +91 80 2535219 ext. 7123
Email: training.in@motorola.com
Technology: GSM, GPRS, CDMA
Language(s): English

Japan
Location: Tokyo, Japan
Telephone number: +81-3- 6408 5280
Technology: JCDMA
Language(s): Japanese

Spain
Location: Madrid, Spain
Telephone number: +34 91 400 2000
Technology: GSM, GPRS
Language(s): Spanish, English

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 13


Regional Training Centers

South Africa
Location: Midrand
Telephone number: +27 11 254 5460
Email: saz001@motorola.com
Technology: GSM, GPRS, UMTS
Language(s): English

United Kingdom
Location: Swindon, UK
Telephone number: +44 0 1793 568777
Email: technicaltraining.UK@motorola.com
Technology: GSM, GPRS, UMTS, Packet Core, MSS, POC
Language(s): English

United States of America


Location: Schaumburg, IL
Telephone number: +1 847 435 5700
Email: technicaltraining.US@motorola.com
Technology: CDMA, Switching, Intelligent Network Devices,
Analog (on demand only), GSM
Language(s): English

Telephone number: +1 847 576 2008


Technology: iDEN
Language(s): English, Spanish

14 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Student Information and Services

All Motorola Training Facilities............................................................................................................................... 16


Schaumburg, Illinois............................................................................................................................................... 18
Jaguarina, Brazil .................................................................................................................................................. 25
Swindon, United Kingdom...................................................................................................................................... 27
Hyderabad, India.................................................................................................................................................... 31
Beijing, China......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Johannesburg, South Africa................................................................................................................................... 35
Product Modular Buyout Training .......................................................................................................................... 37

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 15


All Motorola Training Facilities

Course Prerequisite Policy


To gain the most benefit from Motorolas technical courses, students should have the prerequisite
knowledge and experience noted in the course descriptions. By meeting the course prerequisites,
the student plays an important role in ensuring a successful educational experience for both
themselves and their colleagues. All course bookings are made on the understanding that the
prerequisite courses have been completed. Motorola suggests that the students supervisor or
Training Coordinator review the course prerequisites with the student before registering for the
course. Note that it is not the policy of Motorola to cover prerequisite material during the course.

If a student does not meet the prerequisites or have prerequisite knowledge, Motorola has the
option to remove the student from the class without refund should that student impede the progress
of the course as a whole.

Buyout Scheduling
Although we try to schedule our courses at times and locations that will meet customer
requirements, we realize that there may be occasions when customers will require courses to meet
specific time schedules. Additional courses to the published schedule can be arranged on request.
These courses can be conducted in a Motorola recognized training facility or other premises by
arrangement.

A number of our courses have practical content and therefore require specific hardware and
software. If the course is to be conducted at premises other than a Motorola recognized training
facility then the customer must provide the necessary equipment.

It is strongly recommended that live equipment not be used for training purposes. A Release of
Liability Letter will be required to be signed if live equipment must be used.

See the Product Modular Buyout Training section, or contact your regional Motorola Training
Centre.

Scheduled Classes
All scheduled classes are run subject to minimum number of students being enrolled.

Cancellation of Course Buyouts


In the event that you cancel the signed contract for training 30 calendar days or more before the
scheduled start date, there is no cancellation fee.

In the event that you cancel the signed contract for training 14 to 29 calendar days before the
scheduled start date, you agree to pay a cancellation fee equal to 50 percent of the applicable
training charges, plus any non-refundable travel expenses already incurred.

In the event that you cancel the signed contract for training less than 14 calendar days before the
scheduled start date, you agree to pay a cancellation fee equal to 100 percent of the applicable
training charges, plus any non-refundable travel expenses already incurred.

16 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


All Motorola Training Facilities

On Demand Classes
The courses in this catalog that are designated On Demand are not regularly scheduled classes.
Please contact your local training specialist for details. Students will be placed on a Waiting List until
a sufficient number of enrollments have been received. Students will be notified of an offered class
by the Training Specialist and will be given the opportunity to attend on the scheduled date.

Audio/Visual Equipment
Cameras are not allowed inside Motorola premises. Additionally, audio/visual recording of courses
is not permitted.

Fire and General Safety


With students safety in mind, information regarding action to be taken in the event of a fire will be
advised on the first morning of every course.

Smoking
Motorola is a non-smoking environment. A smoking area is provided for students.

Class Dress
Students are expected to maintain professional conduct and dress at all times. Class dress is casual
but smart. For safety and security reasons, we cannot permit shorts, thong-sandals, or tank-tops in
the building.

Documentation
All course material and documentation supplied at Motorola training courses is copyrighted and may
not be reproduced without prior permission. Carriage or shipping of course documentation is the
responsibility of each student.

Stationery
Students will be supplied with all necessary stationery for their course. Calculators are not provided,
except on appropriate planning courses.

Local Information
Information regarding local places of interest, restaurants and leisure facilities can be supplied to
students attending any Motorola Training course.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 17


Schaumburg, Illinois

Course Enrollment
Enroll on line at the My Network Support Web Site (http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com). Motorola
Technical Training Direct

Technical Information Products and Services


Motorola Inc. - Galvin Center
1295 E. Algonquin Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60196
Email: technicaltraining.US@motorola.com

Payment, or equivalent authorization, should accompany enrollment. Refer to Payment section


below.

All travel and accommodation costs are the students responsibility.

Confirmation
Confirmation of enrollment is subject to payment or credit verification. Once confirmed, an enrolled
student will receive a letter of confirmation via email. For information on regarding hotels, directions,
or maps please refer to the My Network Support web site. If you do not receive this confirmation, please
call Technical Information Products and Services at: +1-800-872-8225 (North America only) or +1-
847-435-5700.

Payment
Payment, in U.S. currency, must be received in the form of either a purchase order or wire transfer
needs to be confirmed 10 business days after registering for classes.

If enrollment takes place within two weeks of the class, payment must be received within 24 hours.
When enrolling in classes, please be sure you are authorized to take on financial responsibility for
your organization.

Rescheduling and Cancellations


Course fees for regularly scheduled classes are fully refundable if Technical Information Products
and Services Training Specialist is notified at least 10 working days prior to the course scheduled
start date. However, if notification is NOT received at least 10 working days prior to the course start
date, you will be billed for the entire cost of the course.

If Motorola must cancel or reschedule a class, any payment made for that class will be refunded or
applied to a rescheduled class, whichever the student chooses. Motorola assumes no liability
beyond the refund of tuition and fees previously paid.

Student Substitutions
Student substitutions are accepted up to the first day of the class; however, the substitute must meet
the course prerequisites. Please notify the Technical Information Products and Services Training
Specialist immediately of any substitutions.

18 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Schaumburg, Illinois

Course Hours
The hours for courses at the Schaumburg, Illinois facilities are as follows:
First Shift 8:00 a.m. 4:00 p.m.
Second Shift 4:00 p.m. 12:00 a.m.
Third Shift 12:00 a.m. 8:00 a.m.

The third-shift classes will begin at midnight on the previously scheduled day and run through 8:00
a.m. (i.e., If the class is scheduled for a Monday, it will begin at midnight Sunday). Class hours are
subject to change.

Attendance Policy
Your training session will begin at the time noted in your confirmation letter (see also Course Hours
above). Please plan to arrive 30 minutes before the beginning of each class day.

When making travel arrangements to attend our training sessions, we suggest that you plan to:
arrive on the evening before the scheduled class
schedule homebound transportation for a time following the end time of the final day of class
(see also Course Hours above).

If, for any reason, you are going to be late to, or absent from a class, please call as indicated below
to get a message to your instructor: +1-800-872-8225 or +1-847-435-5700

Please note that the course completion certificate may be withheld if a student is absent for more
than 25% of the scheduled class period.

Courses for Non-English-speaking Customers


Arrangements can be made for a native language instructor or interpreter and for the use of
available translated documents. Please contact your Program Manager or the Technical Information
Products and Services Centre if you desire to have a course conducted in a language other than
English.

Restrictions
All students registering for courses listed in this catalog must be Motorola employees or Motorola
customers who have a signed contract or who have an active nondisclosure agreement with
Motorola.

Messages
You can receive messages at the educational facilities by calling Technical Information Products
and Services at: +1-800-872-8225 or +1-847-435-5700

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 19


Schaumburg, Illinois

Mail
If you wish to receive mail while attending a course, it should be addressed to:

Motorola Technical Information Products and Services


(Your Name), student
Motorola Inc. - Galvin Center
1295 E. Algonquin Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60196

Educational Facilities
Located on the Motorola campus in Schaumburg, Illinois, our state-of-the-art facility is equipped with
numerous classrooms, an auditorium, and an expansive laboratory area incorporating the latest in
cellular infrastructure technology. The training centre is also close to Woodfield Mall, the largest
shopping area outside of the Chicago city limits. Numerous stores, restaurants, theatres, and other
entertainment venues are also within a short drive.

20 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Schaumburg, Illinois

Driving Directions
The Motorola campus is located on the SW corner of Algonquin and Meacham Roads in
Schaumburg, Illinois, which is a suburb of Chicago.

Please enter the campus through Visitor Entrance A, shown on the map, and follow the signs to the
Galvin Center, building 1295, and enter through Door 60.

From OHARE AIRPORTs Rental Car Areas


The distance from O'Hare is approximately 20 miles, and driving time approximately 40 minutes depending
on the time of day. Between the hours of 7:00 am to 9:00 and 4:00pm to 6:00pm, the driving times will be
longer.
1 Exit the rental car lot and proceed to BESSIE COLEMAN DRIVE (stop sign)
2 Turn right to the flashing stoplight. Go right to the first stoplight, MANNHEIM ROAD. Turn right and
take the I-190 EAST ramp towards CHICAGO LOOP. Merge onto I-190 EAST from the right lane.
3 Take the I-294 (Tri-State toll way) NORTH exit and merge staying in the right lane. Stay to the right
taking the I-90 WEST ramp toward ROCKFORD.
4 Merge on to NW TOLLWAY/I-90 WEST. Approximately 1 mile after entering I-90 WEST, there is a 40-
cent toll. If you do not have exact change or need a receipt, stay in the right lanes at the toll plaza.
5 Stay on I-90 WEST for approximately 8 miles. Exit ROUTE 53 NORTH (Rolling Meadows).
6 Proceed approximately .5 miles and exit on ALGONQUIN ROAD (Route 62). Turn right at the
stoplight at the end of the off-ramp.
7 Proceed west for approximately 1.5 miles. You will see the Motorola campus on the southwest (to
your left) corner of ALGONQUIN and MEACHAM ROADS. Cross MEACHAM and continue to the
stoplight at WEST DRIVE (visitor's entrance A).
8 Turn left into the Motorola campus and proceed to the security gate furthest left. Advise the officer that
you will be attending a training class at the Galvin Center. He will direct you to proceed straight to the
second stop sign and turn right. Turn at the first left into the parking lot and park. Enter through Door
60 and check the monitors for your room number.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 21


Schaumburg, Illinois

From Wisconsin via Tri-State Tollway South to I-294


1 If driving south on the Tri-State Tollway I-294, exit WEST to the NORTHWEST TOLLWAY I-90. Exit
ROUTE 53 NORTH (Rolling Meadows).
2 Merge on to NW TOLLWAY/I-90 WEST. Approximately 1 mile after entering I-90 WEST, there is a 40-
cent toll. If you do not have exact change or need a receipt, stay in the right lanes at the toll plaza.
3 Stay on I-90 WEST for approximately 8 miles. Exit ROUTE 53 NORTH (Rolling Meadows).
4 Proceed approximately .5 miles and exit on ALGONQUIN ROAD (Route 62). Turn right at the
stoplight at the end of the off-ramp.
5 Proceed west for approximately 1.5 miles. You will see the Motorola campus on the southwest (to
your left) corner of ALGONQUIN and MEACHAM ROADS. Cross MEACHAM and continue to the
stoplight at WEST DRIVE (visitor's entrance A).
6 Turn left into the Motorola campus and proceed to the security gate furthest left. Advise the officer that
you will be attending a training class at the Galvin Center. He will direct you to proceed straight to the
second stop sign and turn right. Turn at the first left into the parking lot and park. Enter through Door
60 and check the monitors for your room number.
7 Merge on to NW TOLLWAY/I-90 WEST. Approximately 1 mile after entering I-90 WEST, there is a 40-
cent toll. If you do not have exact change or need a receipt, stay in the right lanes at the toll plaza.
8 Stay on I-90 WEST for approximately 8 miles. Exit ROUTE 53 NORTH (Rolling Meadows).

From Indiana via Tri-State Tollway South to I-294


1 If driving north on the Tri-State Toll way I-294, exit WEST to the NORTHWEST TOLLWAY I-90. Exit
ROUTE 53 NORTH (Rolling Meadows).
2 Merge on to NW TOLLWAY/I-90 WEST. Approximately 1 mile after entering I-90 WEST, there is a 40-
cent toll. If you do not have exact change or need a receipt, stay in the right lanes at the toll plaza.
3 Stay on I-90 WEST for approximately 8 miles. Exit ROUTE 53 NORTH (Rolling Meadows).
4 Proceed approximately .5 miles and exit on ALGONQUIN ROAD (Route 62). Turn right at the
stoplight at the end of the off-ramp.
5 Proceed west for approximately 1.5 miles. You will see the Motorola campus on the southwest (to
your left) corner of ALGONQUIN and MEACHAM ROADS. Cross MEACHAM and continue to the
stoplight at WEST DRIVE (visitor's entrance A).
6 Turn left into the Motorola campus and proceed to the security gate furthest left. Advise the officer that
you will be attending a training class at the Galvin Center. He will direct you to proceed straight to the
second stop sign and turn right. Turn at the first left into the parking lot and park. Enter through Door
60 and check the monitors for your room number.
7 Merge on to NW TOLLWAY/I-90 WEST. Approximately 1 mile after entering I-90 WEST, there is a 40-
cent toll. If you do not have exact change or need a receipt, stay in the right lanes at the toll plaza.
8 Stay on I-90 WEST for approximately 8 miles. Exit ROUTE 53 NORTH (Rolling Meadows).

22 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Schaumburg, Illinois

From CHICAGO via the Eisenhower Expressway (I-290)


1 Take the EISENHOWER EXPRESSWAY I-290 WEST, following the signs to ROCKFORD.
Stay to the right when the road splits between I-290 and I-294.
Stay to the left a few miles later when the road again splits between I-290 and I-294.
2 Remain on I-290 toward ROCKFORD and continue past the point where it merges and becomes
ROUTE 53 NORTH. Exit ROUTE 53 NORTH (Rolling Meadows).
3 Proceed approximately 6 miles and exit on ALGONQUIN ROAD (Route 62). Turn right at the stoplight
at the end of the off-ramp.
4 Proceed west for approximately 1.5 miles. You will see the Motorola campus on the southwest (to
your left) corner of ALGONQUIN and MEACHAM ROADS. Cross MEACHAM and continue to the
stoplight at WEST DRIVE (visitor's entrance A).
5 Turn left into the Motorola campus and proceed to the security gate furthest left. Advise the officer that
you will be attending a training class at the Galvin Center. He will direct you to proceed straight to the
second stop sign and turn right. Turn at the first left into the parking lot and park. Enter through Door
60 and check the monitors for your room number.
6 Merge on to NW TOLLWAY/I-90 WEST. Approximately 1 mile after entering I-90 WEST, there is a 40-
cent toll. If you do not have exact change or need a receipt, stay in the right lanes at the toll plaza.
7 Stay on I-90 WEST for approximately 8 miles. Exit ROUTE 53 NORTH (Rolling Meadows).

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 23


Schaumburg, Illinois

Hotel Accommodations
Please note that students are responsible for their own travel and hotel arrangements. When
making reservations, inform the hotel that you are attending a Motorola Cellular Training class,
since some of the hotels offer special packages and rates for students. *Rates are subject to
change without notice. Some rates may vary due to availability and length of stay. Please present
registration letter or proof of employment to receive Motorola rate.

A list of hotels convenient (less than 2 miles) to our Schaumburg training center follows.
Hotel Address Telephone Code
1 Amerisuites 1851 McConnor Parkway +847-330-1060 B,C, E,
Schaumburg IL 60173 +847-330-1001 (FAX) F, G, H,
Across from Ikea - behind I, J
Hyatt
2 Candlewood Suites 1200 E. Bank Drive +847-517-7644 D, F, H,
Schaumburg IL 60173 +847-517-7648 (FAX) I, K
3 Embassy Suites 1939 N. Meacham +847-397-1313 B, D, E,
Schaumburg IL 60173 +847-397-9007 (FAX) F, G, H,
I
4 Homestead Chicago 51 E State Parkway +847-517-7644 H,G
Schaumburg, IL 60173
5 Hyatt Regency 1800 E. Golf Rd. +847-605-1234 D, E, F,
Schaumburg IL 60173 +847-605-0328 (FAX) G, H
6 La Quinta Inn 1730 E Higgins Rd +847-517-8484 C,H,G
Schaumburg, IL 60173-5114
7 Residence Inn 1610 McConnor Parkway +847-517-6200 B,C,H,
Schaumburg, IL 60173 G
8 Wyndham Garden 800 National Parkway +847-605-9222 B,H,G
Hotel Schaumburg Schaumburg Il 60173

Code Description Code Description


A Complimentary airport shuttle G Complimentary Parking
B Complimentary local shuttle H Complimentary Local Calls
C Complimentary continental breakfast I Coffee/Refrig in Room
D Restaurant/Store J Business Center
E Pool K Free Movies
F Complimentary Exercise Facility

24 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Jaguarina, Brazil

Course Enrollment
To enroll in any of our courses, you can enroll on line at the Technical Information Products and
Services Website http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com

Or you can contact the Training Specialist at:

Telephone:+55 19 3847 7155


FAX: +55 19 3847 7198
Email: technicaltraining.LAC@motorola.com

Motorola Industrial
Rodovia SP 340 km 128,7
Jaguariuna - SP - Brazil
13.820-000

All travel and accommodation costs are the students responsibility.

Confirmation
Confirmation of enrollment is subject to payment or credit verification. Once confirmed, an enrolled
student will receive a letter of confirmation. For information on regarding hotels, directions, or maps
please refer to the Motorola My Network Support web site. If you do not receive this confirmation,
please call Motorola at: +55-19-3847-7155.

Payment
Payment, in U.S. currency, must be received in the form of a purchase order. Payment or credit
verification must be confirmed 10 business days prior to the first day of class, or enrollment will be
cancelled.

If enrollment takes place within two weeks of the class, payment must be received within 24 hours.
When enrolling in classes, please be sure you are authorized to take on financial responsibility for
your organization.

Rescheduling and Cancellations


Course fees for regularly scheduled classes are fully refundable if Motorola Training Specialist is
notified at least 10 working days prior to the course scheduled start date. However, if notification is
NOT received at least 10 working days prior to the course start date, you will be billed for the entire
cost of the course.

If Motorola must cancel or reschedule a class, any payment made for that class will be refunded or
applied to a rescheduled class, whichever the student chooses. Motorola assumes no liability
beyond the refund of tuition and fees previously paid.

Student substitutions
Student substitutions are accepted up to the first day of the class; however, the substitute must
meet the course prerequisites. Please notify the Motorola Training Specialist immediately of any
substitutions.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 25


Jaguarina, Brazil

Course Hours
Course hours can be adjusted to fit customer requirements.

Attendance Policy
Your training session will begin at the time noted in your confirmation letter (see also Course Hours
above). Please plan to arrive 30 minutes before the beginning of each class day.

When making travel arrangements to attend our training sessions, we suggest that you plan to:
arrive on the evening before the scheduled class
schedule homebound transportation for a time following the end time of the final day of class
(see also Course Hours above).

If, for any reason, you are going to be late to, or absent from a class, please call as indicated below
to get a message to your instructor: +55 19 3847 7155

Please note that the course completion certificate may be withheld if a student is absent for more
than 25% of the scheduled class period.

Restrictions
All students registering for courses listed in this catalog must be Motorola employees or Motorola
customers who have a signed contract or who have an active nondisclosure agreement with
Motorola.

Messages
You can receive messages at the educational facilities by calling Motorola at:
+55 19 3847 7155

26 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Swindon, United Kingdom

Course Enrollment
To view availability of courses visit http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com.

To enroll in any of our courses please contact the Training Specialist at:

Telephone: +44 (0) 1793 568777


Fax: +44 (0) 1793 566984
Email: technicaltraining.UK@motorola.com

Motorola Technical Training Centre


Thamesdown Drive, Groundwell
Swindon, Wiltshire, SN25 4XY

Confirmation
Confirmation of enrollment is subject to receipt of Purchase Order or equivalent authorization. Once
confirmed, an enrolled student will receive an email of confirmation.

Payment
Payment, or equivalent authorization should accompany enrollment, and must be confirmed 10
business days prior to the first day of class, or enrollment will be cancelled.

When enrolling in classes, please be sure you are authorized to take on financial responsibility for
your organization.

All travel and accommodation costs are the students responsibility.

Rescheduling and Cancellations


No charge is made for cancellations made 11 or more working days prior to commencement of
course. 100% of the course fee will be charged for cancellations 10 working days or less prior to
commencement of course.

If a registered student fails to attend the course or fails to complete the course, full course fees will
be charged.

If Motorola must cancel or reschedule a class, any payment made for that class will be refunded or
applied to a rescheduled class, whichever the student chooses. Motorola assumes no liability
beyond the refund of tuition and fees previously paid.

Student Substitutions
Student substitutions are accepted up to the first day of the class; however, the substitute must meet
the course prerequisites. Please notify the training administrator immediately of any substitutions.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 27


Swindon, United Kingdom

28 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Swindon, United Kingdom

Motorola Location
Most courses are held in Swindon, UK, however there may be exceptions and you should refer to
your enrolment confirmation.

From M4
Exit the M4 at junction 15 (signed Swindon, A419) and join the A419 towards Swindon.
Leave the A419 at Blunsdon (Turnpike Roundabout).
Get into the right-hand lane, at the traffic lights join the B4553, Thamesdown Drive (Swindon North
Circular Road.)
Visitors take the next turning right into Motorola.
Drivers making deliveries/collections take second turning right in to Saltzgitter Drive and report to
Gatehouse on next mini roundabout.
From Cirencester/Gloucester
Join the A419 (signed Swindon & M4).
Leave the A419 at Blunsdon (Turnpike Roundabout).
Get into the right-hand lane, at the traffic lights join the B4553, Thamesdown Drive (Swindon North
Circular Road.)
Visitors take the next turning right into Motorola.
Drivers making deliveries/collections take second turning right in to Saltzgitter Drive and report to
Gatehouse on next mini roundabout.
By Train
The nearest train station is Swindon, which receives regular service from London paddington and
Bristol.
We are a short taxi ride from the station.
For further information on the train times and fares please call the national rail enquiry line on 08457
48 49 50.

Course Hours
Courses will commence at 09:00 and finish at 16:30. students should arrive between 09:00 and
09:15 on the first day only for a 09:30 start. This will enable course registration to be completed.

There will be breaks in the morning and afternoon at the instructor's discretion and a lunch break of
one hour.

On Arrival
On arrival students must report to reception where they will be issued with a temporary pass, which
is to be worn at all times. This badge will give access to the training department.

Telephone
Telephones are available for delegates to use during break times. Our policy discourages class
interruptions for incoming calls except in emergencies.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 29


Swindon, United Kingdom

Hotel Accommodations
Please see table below for hotel details. You or your local BTI office should make bookings.
Students are advised that they are responsible for settling their own accounts before leaving the
hotel.
Map Key Hotel Address Telephone Code
1 Blunsdon House Hotel Blunsdon House Hotel +44 (0)1793 721701 C,D,E,F,G,
House Hotel H,I,J,L
Swindon SN26 7AF
2 De Vere De Vere +44 (0)1793 878785 C,D,E,F,G,
Swindon SN5 7DW H,I,J,K,L
3 Forte Posthouse Forte Post House +44 (0)870 4009079 C,D,E,F,G,
Marlborough Road H,I,J,K,L
Swindon SN3 6AQ
4 Hilton Hilton +44 (0)1793 881777 C,D,E,F,G,
Great Western Way H,I,J,K,L
Swindon SN5 8UZ
5 Marriott Swindon Marriott +44 (0)1793 512121 C,D,E,F,G,
Pipers Way H,I,J,L
Swindon SN3 1SH
6 Express by Holiday Inn Express by Holiday Inn +44 (0)1793 818800 C,E,H,I,L
Frankland Road
Swindon SN5 8UD
7 Travel Inn Swindon Travel Inn +44 (0)1793 881490 C,E,H
Lydiard Beefeater
Great Western Way
Swindon SN5 8UY

Code Description Code Description


Please check availability of shuttle bus at G Room service
the hotel
B Complimentary breakfast H Laptop points available
C Restaurant I Laundry facilities
D Pool J Refrigerator
E Lounge K Shop
F Exercise room/Health Club L Video rental/in-house movies

30 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Hyderabad, India

Course Enrollment
All course bookings and enquiries should be made through the Training Administrator:
Telephone: +91 80 2534 5219 ext 7123 or 7127
Fax: +91 80 2601 7170
Email: training.in@motorola.com
Motorola India Pvt. Ltd-GTSS
66/1, Plot No. 5
CV Raman Nager Post,
Bangalore - 560093 India

To guarantee your place in a course, please return the completed purchase order within 10 working
days of provisional booking acceptance. If the purchase order is not received within this time, your
place may be allocated to another customer. All travel and accommodation costs are the students
responsibility.

The cancellation and prerequisite policies are the same as those outlined for the Swindon
Training Centre.

Motorola Location
The Motorola GTSS training center is located in the Indian Institute for Information Technology
(IIIT) campus along with other multi national companies such as IBM & Oracle. IIIT has about 700
students, going through graduation and under-graduation programs, related to the field of
Information Technology, or it's applications. Housed within the same campus are learning schools of
other big names such as IBM, Satyam, Metamor, and Oracle, who are our neighbours. The various
institutions are also responsible for enriching the curriculum of the IIIT students and providing
support in their projects.

Hotel Accommodation
Motorola has negotiated special rates for students at local hotels in Hyderabad. Block bookings can
be arranged through the Training Administrator. Students are advised that they are responsible for
settling their own accounts before leaving the hotel.

Course Hours
Courses will commence at 09:00 and finish at 16:30. students should arrive between 09:00 and
09:15 on the first day only for a 09:30 start. This will enable course registration to be completed.
There will be breaks in the morning and afternoon at the instructor's discretion and a lunch break of
one hour.

On Arrival
Visitors car parking spaces are available in the Motorola car park. Parking on the road is not
allowed. On arrival at Motorola Training Centre, students must report to Security at the Reception
where they will be issued with a student pass.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 31


Hyderabad, India

Refreshments
Lunch and refreshments are provided inclusive of the course fee.

32 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Beijing, China

Course Enrollment
All course bookings and enquiries should be made through the Training Administrator.
Telephone: +86 10 68437222 ext. 2120
Fax: +86 10 68438232
Email: a13147@email.mot.com
Motorola Engineering Institute, China
No 39A Zi Zhu Yuan Road
Beijing 100089, China

To guarantee your place on a course, please return the completed purchase order within 10 working
days of provisional booking acceptance.

If the purchase order is not received within this time, your place may be allocated to another
customer.

All travel and accommodation costs are the students responsibility.

The cancellation and prerequisite policies are the same as those outlined for the Swindon
Training Centre.

Motorola Location
Motorola TCSG China Training Centre is located at No. 39A Zi Zhu Yuan Road in Beijing. Access
is via air, rail or road. The international/domestic airport is a fifty minute drive from the training
centre.

BTA Training Centre Location


Beijing Telecom Education & Training Centre Motorola GSM Training School is located at No.2
Linxiao Nanli Road in Beijing. The international/domestic airport is one and a half hours drive from
the training centre. To go to the BTA Training Centre, you can take a shuttle bus from Motorola
Training Centre.

Hotel Accommodation
Some hotels offer special rates for Motorola in Beijing. The Training Administrator can provide
details.

Course Hours
Courses will commence at 09:00 and finish at 16:30. students should arrive between 09:00 and
09:15 on the first day for a 09:30 start. This will enable course registration to be completed.

There will be breaks in the morning and afternoon at the instructor's discretion and a lunch break of
one hour.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 33


Beijing, China

On Arrival
Visitors' car parking spaces are available in the Motorola car park. Parking on the road is not
allowed.

On arrival at the Motorola Training Centre, students must report to security at the reception where
they will be issued with a student pass.

Refreshments
Lunch and refreshments are provided inclusive of the course fee.

Telephone
Incoming messages will be posted on a bulletin board. Our policy discourages class interruptions for
incoming calls except in emergencies.

34 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Johannesburg, South Africa

Course Enrollment
All course bookings and enquiries should be made through the Training Administrator.

Telephone: +27 11 254 5460


Fax: +27 11 254 5472
E-mail: saz001@motorola.com
Building Number 7
Thornhill Office Park
94 Bekker Street
Midrand
1685
Republic of South Africa

Motorola Location
The Motorola Cellular Training Institute is located on the outskirts of Johannesburg, in the Midrand
Region. Midrand is one of the fastest growing commercial and residential areas in the Republic. It is
within easy reach of the main shopping centres and tourist sites in Johannesburg and Pretoria. The
International Airport is a 45 minute drive from the Training institute

Hotel Accommodation
The Training Administrator can be contacted regarding information on local hotel accommodation.
All travel and accommodation costs are the students responsibility.

Course Hours
Courses will commence at 09:00 and finish at 16:30. students should arrive between 09:00 and
09:15 on the first day only for a 09:30 start. This will enable course registration to be completed.

There will be breaks in the morning and afternoon at the instructor's discretion and a lunch break of
one hour.

On Arrival
Visitors car parking spaces are available in the Motorola car park. Parking on the road is not
allowed.

On arrival at Motorola Cellular Training Institute, students must report to Reception on the second
floor where registration will take place.

Refreshments
Lunch and refreshments are provided inclusive of the course fee.

Telephone
Incoming messages will be posted on a bulletin board. Our policy discourages class interruptions for
incoming calls except in emergencies.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 35


Johannesburg, South Africa

Confirmation
Confirmation of enrolment is subject to receipt of Purchase Order or equivalent authorization. Once
confirmed, an enrolled student will receive an email of confirmation.

Rescheduling and Cancellations


No charge is made for cancellations made 6 (six) or more working days prior to commencement of
course. 100% of the course fee will be charged for cancellations 5 (five) working days or less prior to
commencement of course.

If a registered student fails to attend the course or fails to complete the course, full course fees will
be charged.

If Motorola must cancel or reschedule a class, any payment made for that class will be refunded or
applied to a rescheduled class, whichever the student chooses. Motorola assumes no liability
beyond the refund of tuition and fees previously paid.

36 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Product Modular Buyout Training

To optimize customer training schedules, modular training can be requested on a product type basis
using Motorola Training Service's modular buyout scheme. A buyout is a requested closed
enrollment course delivered to a specific customer, usually at their own facility. As delegates being
trained are from just one customer or department, it allows a degree of flexibility in the delivered
material. The instructor delivering the buyout will only deliver training on the modules requested; this
will make for fast, targeted training with a minimum of engineer downtime. Prior to the course,
Training Services will request a list of products for which the customer requires training.

Local offices should request all modular buyout training through:

Swindon, UK
technicaltraining.UK@motorola.com
Tel: +44 (0)1793 568777
Fax: +44 (0)1793 566984

Jaguarina, Brazil
technicaltraining.LAC@motorola.com
Tel: +55 19 3847 7155
Fax: +55 19 3847 7198

Schaumburg, Illinois, U.S.


technicaltraining.US@motorola.com
Tel: +1 800 872 8225 (North America only) or +1 847 435 5700
Fax: +1 847 4355703

Both theory and practical training modules are available as modular buyout options. Please contact
the training administrator for further details.

If practical training is to be delivered at the customer facility, then the customer must ensure that
relevant equipment is made available. Training at the customer site will not be performed on live
equipment.

The training administrator or specialist will issue equipment lists and prerequisite course information
at the time of booking.

If significant content customization is required by the customer, there may be a charge for the
development effort.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 37


Motorola Technical Training Direct

LMS Guidelines
It is important that you familiarize yourself with the business rules that apply to the LMS. Please
contact your Training Coordinator if you have any questions regarding the training policies that
apply to the LMS.

When registering for training, you should continue to adhere to the training policies and budgets
your organization has established. It is also important that you contact your manager prior to
registering for a course to ensure that you have the necessary approval to purchase the training and
that you are granted time away from your job to complete it.

LMS Support Information


Customers with questions regarding use of the LMS should first check the reference links provided
on the left menu bar of the website.

The LMS provides the following features:


Search: Enables you to search the system for specific courses
Reports: Gives you an opportunity to review class schedules and personal account transactions
Frequently Asked Questions: Presents frequently asked questions about the LMS
Contact Us: Allows you to send a question to technical support

If you still need further assistance, please direct your questions in this order to the following:
Your personal Training Coordinator
LMS Support phone numbers:

Schaumburg, Illinois, United States


Phone: 1-800-872-8225 (USA) or 847-435-5700 (International)
Fax:847-435-5703
Email: technicaltraining.US@motorola.com

Swindon, United Kingdom


Phone: +44 (0) 1793 568777
Fax: +44 (0) 1793 566984
Email technicaltraining.UK@motorola.com

Jaguarina, Brazil
Phone: +55-19-3847-7155
Fax: +55-19-3847-7198
Email: technicaltraining.LAC@motorola.com

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 39


Cisco and Networking Courses

Technical Information Products and Services have chosen training company Global Knowledge to
provide a converged Wireless Networking range of course for employees and customers.

Global Knowledge offers a wide range of telecommunications courses including the following:

Cisco Certified Training

Global Knowledge is Cisco Systems' largest world-wide Learning Solutions


Partner. Global Knowledge is able to offer a choice of training solutions for
the Cisco marketplace.

Networking, Internetworking, WAN & Telecoms

Including Network Management, Network Security, Voice & Data Convergence,


Advanced Routing, WAN, 2G Mobile Networking, 3G Mobile Networking,
Wireless Networking courses.

In addition to instructor led courses, Global Knowledge offers their courses as Self-Paced e-
Learning and Virtual Classroom e-Learning.

For further details on all of Global Knowledge's suite of courses visit: www.globalknowledge.co.uk

Booking your end to end solution through Technical Information Products and Services for Global
Knowledge training requirements, will result in greater savings overall for Motorola and our
customers and should be the supplier of your choice.

For all discount enquired and to book on any Global Knowledge's courses please email Technical
Information Products and Services at technicaltraining.UK@motorola.com or
telephone +44 (0) 1793 568777

40 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Training Advice

Motorola has developed robust curriculum paths to help provide you with a detailed roadmap for
your skill development. To validate your skill development, Motorola has also developed the
Motorola Professional Certification in Wireless Engineering.
The Motorola Professional Certification in Wireless Engineering process enables an engineer to
have their skills and knowledge assessed as well as providing a career path to enhance their
capabilities. Our certification programs are designed to efficiently train technicians and engineers to
function within 2G, 2.5G, and 3G wireless environments. The certification program also provides the
competencies (knowledge and skills by job functions) needed to successfully complete certification
exams provided at the end of each module.
Click on the links below to learn more about the specific curriculum paths or Motorola Professional
Certification in Wireless Engineering.
Certification Levels................................................................................................................................................. 42
GSM Certification Path .......................................................................................................................................... 43
GPRS Certification Path ........................................................................................................................................ 53
CDMA Certification Path........................................................................................................................................ 61

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 41


Certification Levels

Level 1 - Knowledge / Foundation


Courses available in Instructor-Led, and may be available in virtual classroom or e-learning
format.
6-12 months cellular experience required before becoming Level 1 certified
Theoretical exam

Level 2 Skills Intermediate


Courses available in Instructor-Led, and may be available in virtual classroom or e-learning
format.
Level 1 Certification is mandatory.
6 -12 months cellular experience required before becoming Level 2 certified
Theoretical and Practical Exam

Level 2 Skills Advanced


Courses available in Instructor-Led, and may be available in virtual classroom or e-learning
format.
Level 2 Intermediate Certification is mandatory.
12 - 18 months cellular experience required before becoming Level 2 certified
Theoretical and Practical Exam

Level 3 Competency / Master


Level 2 Advanced Certification is mandatory.
18 - 24 months cellular experience required before becoming Level 3 certified
Work Project

Testing
Theoretical tests done over the web or on-site at customers offices.
Multiple choice questions
Practical tests done at a TIPS training center

Certification Requirements
Successful theoretical exam + Work Experience = Level 1 Certification
Successful theoretical exam + Practical Exam + Work Experience = Level 2 Certification
Successful Practical Exam + Work Project + Experience = Level 3 Certification

42 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


GSM Certification Path

Certification path for GSM non-technical staff / managers .................................................................................... 44


Certification path for GSM Technical Managers .................................................................................................... 45
Certification path for BSS (GSM) Installation Engineer ......................................................................................... 46
Certification path for BSS (GSM) Technicians....................................................................................................... 47
Certification path for BSS (GSM) OMC-R Operator Engineer ............................................................................... 48
Certification path for BSS (GSM) Planner.............................................................................................................. 49
Certification path for BSS (GSM) Engineer............................................................................................................ 50
Certification path for BSS (GSM) Configuration/Optimization Engineer ................................................................ 51
Certification Path for OMC (GSM) System Administrator ...................................................................................... 52

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 43


Certification path for GSM non-technical staff / managers

Jobset Description
The GSM non-technical overview path is suitable for non-technical staff and managers to gain an
appreciation of GSM cellular technology and Motorolas GSM BSS products

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02A: GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical)
2. GSM-BSS11A: BSS Overview (Non-Technical)
3. GSM-OMC01A: OMC-R Overview (Non-Technical)

44 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification path for GSM Technical Managers

Jobset Description
The GSM technical overview path is suitable for engineering managers to gain a fundamental
technical understanding of GSM cellular technology and Motorolas GSM BSS products.

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS14: BSS Technical Overview
3. GSM-OMC01: OMC-R Overview

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 45


Certification path for BSS (GSM) Installation Engineer

Jobset Description
The BSS (GSM) Installation Engineer will beresponsible for the following tasks
Installing BSS equipment
Correct grounding and earthing requirements.
Optionally may include commissioning

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-BSS15: BSS Installer

46 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification path for BSS (GSM) Technicians

Jobset Description
The BSS (GSM) Technician will be responsible for the following tasks:
Performing routine maintenance tasks
Changing field replaceable units within the BSS
By completing this curriculum these technicians also qualify in BSS GSM level 1 certification in BSS
(GSM) engineer job set.

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 47


Certification path for BSS (GSM) OMC-R Operator
Engineer
Jobset Description
The BSS (GSM) OMC-R Operator Engineer will be based at the OMC-R and is responsible for a
number of operational tasks:
Using the OMC-R to monitor and maintain BSS network health.
Using the OMC-R as a tool for troubleshooting faulty BSS devices.
Using the OMC-R to download new software and databases to the BSS network.
Using the OMC-R to upload BSS databases.
Using the OMC-R for creating and scheduling statistical reports.
Using the OMC-R to add new BSS Network Elements.
Packet Switch configuration.
Using the OMC-R to equip all BSS network devices, functions and algorithms.
Using the OMC-R to bring new BTS sites into the network including daisy chain and closed loop
configurations.
Using the OMC-R to carry out major online network reconfigurations such as general small-scale
frequency changes, changing of BCCH carrier frequency and re-parenting sites.
Using various OMC-R utilities to manipulate the Management Information Base (MIB).
Creating complete databases using all methods
Identifying and solving difficult network problems

Curriculum Path

Level 1
1. GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory

Level 2 Intermediate
3. GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations
4. GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database

Level 2 Advanced
5. GSM-NET02: OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
And then 2 from the following:
6. GSM-SYS03: Advanced BSS Database
7. GSM-NET03: Network Performance
8. GSM-NET04: Cell Optimization Product (COP)
9. GSM-NET05: Network Health Analyst
10.GSM-NET06: Datagen Operations

48 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification path for BSS (GSM) Planner

Jobset Description
The BSS (GSM) Planner will be responsible for:
Planning site hardware configurations to meet traffic capacity requirements
Calculating the number of necessary processors
Planning and re-planning cell size and location to meet traffic capacity
Producing a viable frequency reuse plan, allowing for future expansion
Calculating the number of signalling links required at each interface
Planning link capacity in relation to network topology and connectivity
Determining specific system Database parameters

Curriculum Path

Level 1
1. GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory

Level 2 Intermediate
3. GSM-CP15: Principles of RF Planning
4. GSM-SYS04: Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
5. GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
6. GSM-NET03: Network Performance

Level 2 Advanced
7. GSM-PER300: NetPlan
8. GSM-SYS03: Advanced BSS Database
9. GSM-SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 49


Certification path for BSS (GSM) Engineer

Jobset Description
The BSS (GSM) Engineer will be responsible for tasks including:
Planning site hardware configurations to meet traffic capacity requirements
Effective use of the EMON tools to gather information pertaining to system problems
Gathering the correct information concerning possible software errors to be fed back to the
Customer Network Resolution Centre and Motorola software engineers
Filtering and interpreting inter-process messages
Making database enhancements as a result of the data gathered and subsequent diagnosis
Install & commission: BSC.
Install & commission: RXCDR.
Install & commission: Motorola BTS products
Carry out fault finding to board level.
Fault finding and troubleshooting on BSS equipment using MMI and OMC-R

Curriculum Path

Level 1
1. GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory

Level 2 Intermediate
3. GSM-BSS12: BSS Operations and Maintenance
4. GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
5. GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations

Level 2 Advanced
6. GSM-SYS01: GSM Interfaces and Protocols
7. GSM-SYS03: Advanced BSS Database
8. GSM-BSS07: Advanced BSS Field Support

50 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification path for BSS (GSM) Configuration/
Optimization Engineer
Jobset Description
The BSS (GSM) Configuration/ Optimization Engineer will be responsible for tasks including:
Building BSS Databases based on Network design
Testing BSS databases for validity and sanity
Compiling database objects
Troubleshooting database problems
Operation of DataGen to produce and convert BSS databases
Implementing database modifications to enhance and optimize network functionality.
Implementation of planned network enhancements
Troubleshooting BSS related network problems
Propose enhancements to support improved network functionality
Meaningful interpretation of BSS performance data
Air interface optimization
BSS database optimization
Investigation and diagnosis of complex network problems
A - interface optimization

Curriculum Path

Level 1
1. GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2. GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory

Level 2 Intermediate
3. GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
4. GSM-SYS03: Advanced BSS Database
5. GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations

Level 2 Advanced
6. GSM-NET03: Network Performance
7. GSM-SYS01: GSM Interfaces and Protocols
8. GSM-SYS04: Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
9. GSM-SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems
Choose 1 of the following depending on Database/ Optimization path
10.GSM-NET04: Cell Optimization Product (COP)
11. GSM-NET05: Network Health Analyst
12.GSM-NET06: Datagen Operations (For Database Engineer)

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 51


Certification Path for OMC (GSM) System Administrator

Jobset Description
The OMC (GSM) System administrator will be responsible for tasks including:
Backup and restoration of file systems
Backup and restoration of databases
Administering user accounts
Configuration of cron jobs
Viewing log files
The OMC-R system administrator should certify in SUN Solaris system administration Parts 1, 2 and
Informix DBA courses before attempting Level 2 advanced certification. These courses are available
from SUN Microsystems or IBM-Informix as open courses. Buy out courses can also be arranged
through Motorola, please contact us for further information

Curriculum Path

Level 1
1. GEN-CP04: UNIX for OMC Users
2. GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
3. GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory

Level 2 Intermediate
4. GSM-OMC03: OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform)
5. GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations

Level 2 Advanced
6. 846 System Administration IDS (Informix Dynamic Server)
7. SA238 Solaris OE System Administration 1 certification
8. SA288 Solaris OE System Administration 2 certification

52 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


GPRS Certification Path

Certification path for GPRS non-technical staff / managers .................................................................................. 54


Certification path for GPRS technical managers ................................................................................................... 55
Certification path for BSS (GPRS) Engineer.......................................................................................................... 56
Certification path for BSS (GPRS) OMC-R Operator Engineer ............................................................................. 57
Certification path for BSS (GPRS) Planner............................................................................................................ 58
Certification for BSS (GPRS) Configuration / Optimization Engineer .................................................................... 59

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 53


Certification path for GPRS non-technical staff / managers

Jobset Description
The GSM non-technical overview path is suitable for non-technical staff and managers to gain an
The GPRS non technical overview path is suitable for engineering managers to gain an appreciation
of GSM /GPRS cellular technology.

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02A: GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical)
2. GPRS-CP07A: GPRS Overview (Non -Technical)

54 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification path for GPRS technical managers

Jobset Description
The GPRS technical overview path is suitable for engineers to gain a fundamental technical
understanding of GSM/GPRS cellular technology.

Curriculum Path
1. GSM-CP02A: GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical)
2. GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 55


Certification path for BSS (GPRS) Engineer

Jobset description
The BSS (GPRS) Engineer path reflects the additional tasks that a BSS (GSM) Engineer is required
to carry out due to the addition of GPRS.
The BSS (GPRS) Commissioning and Maintenance Engineer will be responsible for tasks including:
Installing and commissioning PCU elements
Perform routine maintenance tasks
Diagnosing equipment problems to a board or cable level
Gathering the correct information concerning possible software errors to be fed back to the
Customer Network Resolution Centre and Motorola software engineers
Filtering and interpreting inter-process messages
Making database enhancements as a result of the data gathered and subsequent diagnosis
Install & commission: BSS
Fault finding and troubleshooting on BSS equipment

Curriculum Path

Level 1
1. Level 1 Certification path for BSS (GSM) Engineer

Level 2 Intermediate
2. Level 2 Intermediate Certification path for BSS (GSM) Engineer
3. GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
4. GEN-CP08: Frame Relay
5. GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory
6. GPRS-BSS102: PCU Installation and Maintenance

Level 2 Advanced
7. Level 2 Advanced Certification path for BSS (GSM) Engineer
8. GPRS-SYS102: BSS (GPRS) Database
9. GPRS-SYS101: GPRS Interfaces and Protocols R99

56 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification path for BSS (GPRS) OMC-R Operator
Engineer
Jobset Description
The BSS (GPRS) OMC-R Operator Engineer path reflects the additional tasks that a BSS (GSM)
OMC-R Operator Engineer is required to carry out due to the addition of the GPRS PCU network
element.
The BSS (GPRS) OMC-R Operator Engineer will be responsible for tasks including:
Using the OMC-R to monitor the BSS (GPRS) network health
Using the OMC-R as a tool for troubleshooting the faulty BSS (GPRS) devices
Using the OMC-R to download new software and databases to the BSS (GPRS) devices
Using the OMC-R to upload BSS (GPRS) databases
Using the OMC-R for creating and scheduling statistical reports
Using the OMC-R to add new BSS (GPRS) elements
Using the OMC-R to equip and configure all BSS (GPRS) network devices, functions and
algorithms
Creating complete databases from source
Analyzing statistics to identify problem areas and suggesting solutions

Curriculum Path

Level 1
1. Level 1 Certification path for BSS (GSM) OMC-R Operator Engineer

Level 2 Intermediate
2. Level 2 Intermediate Certification path for BSS (GSM) OMC-R Operator Engineer
3. GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
4. GEN-CP08: Frame Relay
5. GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory
6. Level 2 Advanced Certification path for BSS (GSM) OMC-R Operator Engineer

Level 2 Advanced
7. GPRS-SYS102: BSS (GPRS) Database
8. GPRS-NET103: BSS (GPRS) Network Performance

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 57


Certification path for BSS (GPRS) Planner

Jobset Description
The BSS (GPRS) Planner path reflects the additional tasks that a BSS (GSM) Planner is required to
carry out due to the addition of GPRS.
GPRS Cell Planning
Equipment dimensioning for GPRS
GPRS link planning
Calculating effect on GSM CS due to GPRS
Analyzing statistics to enable correct planning

Curriculum Path

Level 1
1. Level 1 Certification path for BSS (GSM) Planner

Level 2 Intermediate
2. Level 2 Intermediate Certification path for BSS (GSM) Planner
3. GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
4. GEN-CP08: Frame Relay
5. GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory
6. GPRS-SYS104: BSS (GPRS) Planning

Level 2 Advanced
7. Level 2 Advanced Certification path for BSS (GSM) Planner
8. GPRS-SYS102: BSS (GPRS) Database
9. GPRS-NET103: BSS (GPRS) Network Performance

58 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification for BSS (GPRS) Configuration / Optimization
Engineer
Jobset Description

The BSS (GPRS) Configuration / Optimization Engineer path reflects the additional tasks that a BSS
(GSM) Configuration / Optimization Engineer is required to carry out due to the addition of GPRS.
The BSS (GPRS) Configuration Engineer is responsible for tasks including:
Constructing BSS (GPRS) databases
Implementing and testing BSS (GPRS) databases
Building BSS (GPRS) Databases based on Network design
Testing BSS (GPRS) databases for validity and sanity
Compiling database objects
Troubleshooting BSS (GPRS) database/ network problems
Operation of DataGen to produce and convert BSS (GPRS) databases
Implementing database modifications to enhance and optimize network functionality.
Implementation of planned network enhancements
Propose enhancements to support improved network functionality
Meaningful interpretation of BSS (GPRS) performance data
Air interface optimization
PCU database optimization
Investigation and diagnosis of complex network problems
Gb - interface optimization

Curriculum Path

Level 1
1. Level 1 Certification path for BSS (GSM) Configuration/Optimization Engineer

Level 2 Intermediate
2. Level 2 Intermediate Certification path for BSS (GSM) Configuration/Optimization Engineer
3. GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
4. GEN-CP08: Frame Relay
5. GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory
6. GPRS-SYS102: BSS (GPRS) Database
7. GPRS-SYS104: BSS (GPRS) Planning

Level 2 Advanced
8. Level 2 Advanced Certification path for BSS (GSM) Configuration/Optimization Engineer
9. GPRS-SYS101: GPRS Interfaces and Protocols R99
10.GPRS-NET103: BSS (GPRS) Network Performance

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 59


60 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005
CDMA Certification Path

Certification Path for CDMA Non-technical Staff / Managers ................................................................................ 62


Certification Path for CDMA Technical Managers ................................................................................................. 63
CDMA Wireless Core Certification......................................................................................................................... 64
CDMA IP Core Certification ................................................................................................................................... 65
Certification Path for CDMA BTS Technician ........................................................................................................ 66
Certification Path for CDMA BTS Engineer ........................................................................................................... 67
Certification Path for CDMA Circuit Switch Engineer............................................................................................. 68
Certification Path for CDMA Circuit Switch Engineer............................................................................................. 68
Certification path for CDMA IP RAN Engineer....................................................................................................... 70
Certification Path for CDMA Intelligent Network Engineer..................................................................................... 71
Certification Path for CDMA Performance Engineer.............................................................................................. 72
Certification Path for CDMA RF Planner................................................................................................................ 73
Certification Path for CDMA RAN Network Operator............................................................................................. 75
Certification Path for CDMA RAN Administrator .................................................................................................... 76
Certification Path for CDMA CBSC Engineer ........................................................................................................ 77

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 61


Certification Path for CDMA Non-technical Staff / Managers

Jobset Description
The CDMA non-technical staff/manager certification path is suitable for non-technical staff and
managers to gain an appreciation of CDMA cellular technology and Motorola's CBSC/RAN
products.

Level 1: Fundamental - Non-technical staff/manager certification is recommended for


personnel with 6-12 months of CDMA experience.
1. CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2. CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)or
3. CDMA-GNL135: 1X Non-Technical Overview

62 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification Path for CDMA Technical Managers

Jobset Description
The CDMA technical overview path is suitable for Technical managers to gain a fundamental
technical understanding of CDMA cellular technology and Motorola's CDMA products including
OMC-R.

Level 1: Fundamental - Non-technical staff/manager certification is recommended for


personnel with 6-12 months of CDMA experience.
1. CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2. CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) or
3. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
4. CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 63


CDMA Wireless Core Certification

Jobset Description
Wireless Core Certification is recommended for technicians/engineers with less than 6 months of
CDMA experience.

Level 1: Fundamental
1. CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2. CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) or
3. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
4. CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview
5. GEN-ENG942: Understanding 3G Wireless Mobile Communications
6. GEN-ENG934: Understanding the Basics of Communications Networks

64 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


CDMA IP Core Certification

Jobset Description
IP Core Certification is recommended for technicians/engineers with less than 6 months of
CDMA experience.

Level 1: Fundamental
1. GEN-ENG945: Understanding TCP/IP
2. GEN-ENG948: Understanding Frame Relay
3. GEN-ENG947: Understanding Voice over IP
4. GEN-GNL179: Understanding Data Networking
5. GEN-GNL241: Overview of CDMA2000 Networks
6. GEN-TEL1218: Understanding the Principles of LANs and WANs

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 65


Certification Path for CDMA BTS Technician

Jobset Description
The CDMA BTS Technician will be responsible for a number of tasks:
Performing routine maintenance tasks
Changing field replaceable units within the BTS

Level 1: Fundamental - BTS Technician Core Certification is recommended for personnel with
6-12 months of BTS experience.
1. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
2. CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview
3. CDMA-BTS610: SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
or
4. CDMA-BTS710: SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
or
5. CDMA-BTS930: SC 300 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)

66 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification Path for CDMA BTS Engineer

Jobset Description
This certification path is designed for Engineers involved with the maintenance of the SC(tm) 4812T
Series BTS. It describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC(tm) 4812T Base
Transceiver Station (BTS).

Level 1: Fundamental - BTS Engineer Core Certification is recommended for personnel with
6-12 months of BTS experience.
1. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
2. CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview
3. CDMA-GNL090: CNEOMI Fundamentals
4. CDMA-BTS610: SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
or
CDMA-BTS710: SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)
or
CDMA-BTS930: SC 300 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)

Level 2: Intermediate - BTS Engineer Core Certification is recommended for personnel with
12-18 months of BTS experience.
1. CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals
2. CDMA-pBTS101OM: Operations and Maintenance: pBTS
3. CDMA-OMCR120A: pBTS-OMCR Database Administration

Level 2: Advanced
1. CDMA-BTS780: SC 4812 Series BTS Packet Backhaul Upgrade
2. CDMA-SYS340MI: OMCR-BTS Troubleshooting Workshop

Level 3: Master - BTS Engineer Core Certification is recommended for personnel with 18-24
months of BTS experience.
1. Pre project report including aims and objectives of the project
2. Project Report
3. Presentation of the project results

*BTS Practical Skills from Level 1 BTS610, BTS710, and BTS930 courseware, will be tested
during the Level 2 certification testing cycle. Please review the skills inventory for details.

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 67


Certification Path for CDMA Circuit Switch Engineer

Jobset Description
This certification is intended for Engineers who require an overall description of the EMX(r)/Nortel
switch as well as the subsystem component functions, capabilities and capacities of the EMX(r)/
Nortel switch.

Level 1: Fundamental - Switch Engineer Certification is recommended for personnel with 6-12
months of Switch experience.
1. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
2. CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
3. CDMA-SWT060: Nortel MTX Overview (Web-based)
or
CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)

Level 2: Intermediate - Switch Engineer Certification is recommended for personnel with 12-
18 months of Switch experience.
1. GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
or
GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
2. CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)
and
CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
3. CDMA-SWT280: Split Mode Operation and Maintenance
4. CDMA-SWT281: SLIC II Operations
5. CDMA-SWT160: DMX
6. CDMA-SWT260: CCS/SS7 Implementation or CDMA-SWT270: CCS/C7 Implementation (LAC only)
7. CDMA-SWT070: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals
8. CDMA-SWT080: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals Advanced

Level 2: Advanced
1. CDMA-SWT150: EMX Advanced
2. CDMA-SWT440: EMX-V Translations or CDMA-SWT240: EMX Translations (International)
3. CDMA-PER290: CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance
4. CDMA-SWT180: Managing Switch Performance and Growth

Level 3: Master
1. Pre project report including aims and objectives of the project
2. Project Report
3. Presentation of the project results

68 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification Path for CDMA Packet Switch Engineer

Jobset Description
This certification is intended for Engineers who require an overall description of the packet switch as
well as the subsystem component functions, capabilities and capacities of the packet switch.

Level 1: Fundamental - Switch Engineer Certification is recommended for personnel with 6-12
months of Switch experience.
4. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
5. GEN-ENG936: Understanding SS7 for IN, Wireless, and VoIP
6. CDMA-MSS100: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Overview
7. CDMA-PoC100: Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC) Overview

Level 2: Intermediate - Switch Engineer Certification is recommended for personnel with 12-
18 months of Switch experience.
1. GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
Or
GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
2. CDMA-MSSC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA
3. CDMA-PoC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Push To Talk (Generic)
CDMA-PoC102OM: Operations and Maintenance: PoC (Sprint)
CDMA-PoC103OM: Operations and Maintenance: PoC (Verizon)
4. CDMA-MSS100A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Administration and Provisioning
5. CDMA-MMG101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola Media Gateway

Level 2: Advanced
1. CDMA-MSS200A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Translations
2. CDMA-MSS100MI: MSS Troubleshooting
3. TBD: CDMA-PoC100M: PoC Troubleshooting

Level 3: Master
1. Pre project report including aims and objectives of the project
2. Project Report
3. Presentation of the project results

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 69


Certification path for CDMA IP RAN Engineer

Jobset Description
The CDMA IP RAN Engineer will be responsible for a number of tasks:
Planning the IP addresses and routing configuration in the 1X CDMA Cellular Network.
Planning the IP addressing schemes to use, during deployment of the packet based Transport
network, in the 1X CDMA cellular Network.
Level 1: Fundamental - IP Ran Engineer Certification is recommended for personnel with 6-
12 months of experience.
1. IP Core Certification
2. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
3. CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview
4. CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview

Level 2: Intermediate - IP Ran Engineer Certification is recommended for personnel with 12-
18 months experience.
1. CDMA-OMCP100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMC-IP
2. GK-ICND: Interconnection Cisco Network Devices
3. GK-OSPF: Open Shortest Path First
4. CDMA-NET400A: 1X Network Administration (Unix)

Level 2: Advanced
1. CDMA-SYS370: CDMA RAN IP Planning
2. GK-BSCI: Building Scalable CISCO Internet Works
3. GK-BCMSN: Building CISCO Multilayer Switch Network
4. CDMA-NET500A: SC Cisco Network Administration
5. (TBD) SYS403: IP Performance Management
6. Maintenance Curriculum

Level 3: Master
1. Pre project report including aims and objectives of the project
2. Project Report
3. Presentation of the project results

70 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification Path for CDMA Intelligent Network Engineer

Jobset Description
The CDMA Intelligent Network Engineer will be responsible for a number of operational tasks.
Using TACL commands.
Conducting alarm/ERAD-specific searches.
Identifying the MR statistics and related registers and messages.
Using the report-generating utility.
Configuring SS7/C7 links and verifying that SS7 links are operational.
Ability to maintain the various database files necessary for the successful operation of the
Compaq/Tandem HLR/AC system application software.
Ability to maintain the various database files necessary of the successful operation of the SMS
Gateway system application software using the User Friendly SMS Gateway Web Interface.

Level 1: Fundamental - (K-Series) - Intelligent Network Certification is recommended for


personnel with 6-12 months of IN experience.
1. CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2. CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
3. CDMA-PER200: K-Series Fundamentals

Level 1: Fundamental - (S-Series) - Intelligent Network Certification is recommended for


personnel with 6-12 months of IN experience.
1. CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2. CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
3. CDMA-PER640: S-Series Fundamentals

Level 2: Intermediate - (K-Series) Intelligent Network Technician Certification is


recommended for personnel with 12-18 months of IN experience.
1. CDMA-PER210: IS-41 Operation
2. CDMA-PER220: Message Register (MR)

Level 2: Intermediate - (S-Series) Intelligent Network Certification is recommended for


personnel with 12-18 months of IN experience.
1. CDMA-PER220: Message Register (MR)
2. CDMA-PER270: Compaq HLR41/AC

Level 2: Advanced - (S-Series) Intelligent Network Certification is recommended for


personnel with 18-24 months of IN experience
1. CDMA-PER235: SMS Gateway Server

Level 3: Master
1. Pre project report including aims and objectives of the project
2. Project Report
3. Presentation of the project results

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 71


Certification Path for CDMA Performance Engineer

Jobset Description
The CDMA Performance Engineer will be responsible for:
Performing statistical analysis and trend analysis to predict future network reliability and identify
and recommend solutions for network bottlenecks.
Identifying the importance of good system design as part of CDMA system optimization.
Describing the basic concepts and the key CDMA system parameters useful to optimization

Level 1: Fundamental -
1. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
2. CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview
3. CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview
4. CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview
5. CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals
6. CDMA-GNL090: CNEOMI Fundamentals
7. CDMA-SYS401: Performance Fundamentals

Level 2: Intermediate
1. GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
or
2. GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
3. GEN-NET101: UNIX Part 2
or
GEN-NET201: Sun Solaris Part 2
4. CDMA-PER450: UNO Element Manager
5. CDMA-SYS230: CDMA RF Planning Course
6. CDMA-PER240: OMC-IP SYSLOG Analysis
7. CDMA-SYS500: CDMA2000 Call Flow
8. CDMA-PER250: System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP)
9. CDMA-SYS250: Optimization using SMAP
10.CDMA-SYS402: BTS Performance Management

LEVEL 2: ADVANCED
1. CDMA-SYS300: CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link
2. CDMA-SYS403: IP Performance Management

LEVEL 3: MASTER
1. Pre project report including aims and objectives of the project
2. Project Report
3. Presentation of the project results

72 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification Path for CDMA RF Planner

Jobset Description
The CDMA RF Planner will be responsible for:
Planning and re-planning cell size and location to meet traffic capacity
Planning link capacity in relation to network topology and connectivity
Understand the total requirements for a system and provide the method to calculate the total
requirements for a system.

Level 1: Fundamental - RF Planner Core Certification is recommended for personnel with 6-


12 months of RF experience
1. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
2. CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview
3. CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals
4. CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview
5. CDMA-MLS100NE: MLS Network Element Overview
6. CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview
7. CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview
8. CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview
9. CDMA-PDSN100NE: PDSN Cisco Network Element Overview
10.CDMA-PDSN101NE: PDSN 3Com Network Element Overview
11. CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview
12.CDMA-XC100NE: XC Network Element Overview
13.CDMA-GNL090: CNEOMI Fundamentals
14.CDMA-SYS360: RAN Equipment Planning

Level 2: Intermediate - RF Planner Core Certification is recommended for personnel with 12-
18 months of RF experience
1. GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
or
2. GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
3. GEN-NET101: UNIX Part 2
or
GEN-NET201: Sun Solaris Part 2
4. CDMA-SYS230: CDMA RF Planning Course
5. CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration
6. CDMA-OMCR110A: SDU-OMCR Database Administration
7. CDMA-OMCR120A: pBTS-OMCR Database Administration
8. CDMA-SYS500: CDMA2000 Call Flow
9. CDMA-SYS370: CDMA RAN IP Planning
10.CDMA-PER250: System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP)
11. CDMA-PER350: NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA (Optional Endorsement) **

Level 2: Advanced - RF Planner Core Certification is recommended for personnel with 18-24
months of RF experience
1. CDMA-SYS250: Optimization using SMAP
2. CDMA-SYS300: CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link
3. CDMA-PER360: NetPlan CDMA RF System Design

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 73


LEVEL 3: MASTER
1. Pre project report including aims and objectives of the project
2. Project Report
3. Presentation of the project results

74 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification Path for CDMA RAN Network Operator

Jobset Description
The CDMA RAN Network Operator will be responsible for monitoring and performing basic
troubleshooting on a SUN OMCR/PUMA-based cellular system with a PDSN. It consists of the
Circuit and Packet CBSC courseware.

Level 1: Fundamental - Certification is recommended for personnel with 6-12 months of


experience
1. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
2. CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview
3. CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview
4. CDMA-MLS100NE: MLS Network Element Overview
5. CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview
6. CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview
7. CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview
8. CDMA-PDSN100NE: PDSN Cisco Network Element Overview
9. CDMA-PDSN101NE: PDSN 3Com Network Element Overview
10.CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview
11. CDMA-XC100NE: XC Network Element Overview
12.CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals
13.CDMA-GNL090: CNEOMI Fundamentals

Level 2: Intermediate - Certification is recommended for personnel with 12-18 months of


experience
1. CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM Overview
2. CDMA-AGN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE
3. CDMA-MLS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MLS
4. CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM
5. CDMA-OMCP100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMC-IP
6. CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
7. CDMA-PDSN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: Cisco PDSN
8. CDMA-PDSN200OM: Operations and Maintenance: 3Com PDSN
9. CDMA-SDU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: SDU
10.CDMA-XC100OM: Operations and Maintenance: XC
11. CDMA-pBTS101OM: Operations and Maintenance: pBTS

Level 2: Advanced - Certification is recommended for personnel with 18-24 months of


experience
12.CDMA-SYS330MI: Advanced Troubleshooting Workshop

LEVEL 3: MASTER
1. Pre project report including aims and objectives of the project
2. Project Report
3. Presentation of the project results

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 75


Certification Path for CDMA RAN Administrator

Jobset Description
The CDMA RAN Administrator will be responsible for carrying out the tasks of provisioning and
implementing SC databases. It consists of the Circuit and Packet CBSC/1X courseware.

Level 1: Fundamental - Certification is recommended for personnel with 6-12 months of


experience.
1. CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) or
2. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
3. CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview
4. CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview
5. CDMA-MLS100NE: MLS Network Element Overview
6. CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview
7. CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview
8. CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview
9. CDMA-PDSN100NE: PDSN Cisco Network Element Overview
10.CDMA-PDSN101NE: PDSN 3Com Network Element Overview
11. CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview
12.CDMA-XC100NE: XC Network Element Overview
13.CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals
14.CDMA-GNL090: CNEOMI Fundamentals
Level 2: Intermediate - Certification is recommended for personnel with 12-18 months of
experience.
1. GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
or
2. GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
3. GEN-NET101: UNIX Part 2
or
GEN-NET201: Sun Solaris Part 2
4. CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration
5. CDMA-OMCR110A: SDU-OMCR Database Administration
6. CDMA-OMCR120A: pBTS-OMCR Database Administration
7. CDMA-SYS110A: 1X System Administration (Unix)

Level 2: Advanced - Certification is recommended for personnel with 18-24 months of


experience
1. CDMA-SYS370: CDMA IP RAN Planning Course
2. CDMA-NET400A: 1X Network Administration (Unix)
3. CDMA-NET500A: SC Cisco Network Administration

LEVEL 3: MASTER
1. Pre project report including aims and objectives of the project
2. Project Report
3. Presentation of the project results

76 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


Certification Path for CDMA CBSC Engineer

Jobset Description
The CDMA CBSC will be responsible for carrying out the tasks of provisioning and implementing SC
databases and troubleshooting different CBSC related problems. It consists of the Circuit and
Packet CBSC/1X courseware.

Level 1: Fundamental - CBSC/1X Engineer Core Certification is recommended for personnel


with 6-12 months of CBSC/1X experience
1. CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
3. CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview
4. CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview
5. CDMA-MLS100NE: MLS Network Element Overview
6. CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview
7. CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview
8. CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview
9. CDMA-PDSN100NE: PDSN Cisco Network Element Overview
10.CDMA-PDSN101NE: PDSN 3Com Network Element Overview
11. CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview
12.CDMA-XC100NE: XC Network Element Overview
13.CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals
14.CDMA-GNL090: CNEOMI Fundamentals

Level 2: Intermediate - CBSC/1X Engineer Core Certification is recommended for personnel


with 12-18 months of CBSC/1X experience
1. GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
or
2. GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
3. GEN-NET101: UNIX Part 2
or
GEN-NET201: Sun Solaris Part 2
4. CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration
5. CDMA-OMCR110A: SDU-OMCR Database Administration
6. CDMA-OMCR120A: pBTS-OMCR Database Administration
7. CDMA-SYS110A: 1X System Administration (Unix)
8. CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM Overview
9. CDMA-AGN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE
10.CDMA-MLS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MLS
11. CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM
12.CDMA-MSSC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA
13.CDMA-OMCP100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMC-IP
14.CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
15.CDMA-PDSN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: Cisco PDSN
16.CDMA-PDSN200OM: Operations and Maintenance: 3Com PDSN
17.CDMA-SDU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: SDU
18.CDMA-XC100OM: Operations and Maintenance: XC
19.CDMA-pBTS101OM: Operations and Maintenance: pBTS

March 2005 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com 77


Level 2: Advanced - CBSC/1X Engineer Core Certification is recommended for personnel with
18-24 months of CBSC/1X experience
1. CDMA-NET400A: 1X Network Administration (Unix)
2. CDMA-NET500A: SC Cisco Network Administration
3. CDMA-SYS330MI: Advanced Troubleshooting Workshop

LEVEL 3: MASTER
1. Pre project report including aims and objectives of the project
2. Project Report
3. Presentation of the project results

78 Visit our web site at https://services.motorola.com March 2005


March 2005 Visit our web site at https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 79
Customer Support Documentation

This is a guide to the Motorola Cellular customer support manuals; it describes how the manuals are
referenced, and how to obtain them.

Motorola cellular equipment is supported by a range of documentation that provides the required
information for a customer to manage, operate and maintain their Network, as implemented by
Motorola. This documentation is provided in the form of task-oriented system manuals and
hardware product manuals.

Motorola Technical Information Products and Services provides electronic, on-line and printed
documentation required to install, maintain and operate our cellular infrastructure equipment. For a
complete listing of our publications, please visit our Internet site at:
http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 80


CDMA Documentation

Supported Products
On our customer internet site documentation lists are provided for product releases. Products are
grouped into the following categories:

BTS Solutions
This group contains the following CDMA BTS products: LMF, SC300 BTS, SC480 BTS, SC4812ET
BTS, SC4812ET Lite BTS, SC4812T BTS, SC4812T Lite BTS, SC4812T MC BTS, SC4812T MF
BTS. This group also contains the following JCDMA BTS products: LMF, SC340 BTS, SC484 BTS,
SC2440 BTS and SC4840 BTS.

Internet Protocol (IP) Data Network Solutions


This group contains 1xEV-DO, IWU Packet Data and IWU Circuit Data.

Internet Protocol - Radio Access Network (IP-RAN) Solutions


This group contains CBSC (which includes the Mobility Manger and Transcoder), Access Node,
Selection Data Unit and Vocoder Processing Unit.

Network Operations Solutions


This group contains NetPlan(r), OMC-R, OMC-IP, SMAP, and UNO. The OMC-R section contains
the CDMA Online Help Documentation (Cellular System Administration, Performance Analysis,
System Commands Reference, and System Output Messages).

Switching Solutions
This group contains EMX 2500/5000/VLR, Motorola Softswitch (MSS-C) and SwitchMATE II.

Value Added Solutions


This group contains HLR41, Message Register, MMSC, PoC, SMS Gateway, and Wiretap.

How to order manuals


CDMA documentation can be ordered online at: https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com

Please provide the following information: Contact, Shipping and Order Information.

A print vendor representative will contact you for billing information and to verify your order.

81 March 2005
CDMA Documentation

Documentation Distribution
Order number
All CDMA and Analog manuals have an order number. The 68P manual order number is a unique
identifier used for ordering purposes. The order number is an eleven character Motorola code, that
starts with 68P... for technical manuals, as shown in Figure 1. It is the part number used when
ordering Motorola hardcopy CDMA and Analog manuals. An additional suffix letter indicates the
issue status of the manual. Note that this starts at O for original then A, B, C and so on.

68P 09201A40 -E
Technical Manual Identifier
Unique Identity Number
Issue Suffix

Figure 1: Example breakdown of a CDMA publication number

Example
The order number (in this example 68P09201A40-E) is divided into three parts:
1. The first three characters (68P) identify the item as a technical manual.
2. The second eight characters (09201A40) are allocated from a sequential list of numbers, which
are in effect unique identity numbers. However, these may be allocated in blocks for specific
manual sets.
3. The final letter is the issue suffix as described above.

Manual releases
For each new major CDMA software release, certain software release dependent manuals are
released. Other manuals, such as hardware service manuals, are upissued as required. Manual
issues are sequentially lettered from A, B and so on.

82 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GSM/GPRS Documentation

How does the coding system work?


All manuals have a unique identifier for ordering purposes:
The 68P... manual order number is a unique identifier, used for ordering purposes.
The classification number (for example GSM100311) identifies the type of manual, the overall
manual set to which it belongs, the type of information it contains, and the user it is aimed at.

Order number
The order number is an eleven character Motorola code, that starts with 68P... for technical
manuals. It is the part number used when ordering Motorola hardcopy GSM and GPRS manuals. An
additional suffix letter indicates the issue status of the manual. Note that this starts at O for original
then A, B, C and so on. For software dependent manuals, the issue suffix letter corresponds to each
major software release.

Other manuals, such as hardware service manuals, are reissued as and when required and are
not linked to a particular software release. Some other manuals contain cumulative release
information that is backward compatible, or cover more than one release. Therefore, these manuals
do not conform to the above suffix letter criteria. Table 1 shows a typical issue history for a software
dependent manual with the identifying order number 68P02900W15 (an example only).

Table 1

Order Number Date of issue Remarks

68P02900W15O 3rd Oct 94 Software Release 1.2.2.x

68P02900W15A 30th Dec 94 Software Release 1.2.3.x

68P02900W15B 1st Sep 95 Software Release 1.3.0.x

68P02900W15C 31st May 96 Software Release 1.4.0.x

68P02900W15D 17th Dec 96 Software Release 1.4.1.x

68P02900W15E 29th Aug 97 Software Release GSR2 (1.5.0.x)

68P02900W15F 27th Apr 98 Software Release GSR3 (1.5.1.x)

68P02900W15G 12th Mar 99 Software Release GSR4

68P02900W15H 24th Oct 00 Software Release GSR4.1

68P02900W15J 31st Jul 01 Software Release GSR 5

68P02900W15K 30th Nov 01 Software Release GSR5.1

Example
The order number (in this example 68P02900W15K) is divided into three parts:
1. The first three characters (68P) identifies the item as a technical manual.
2. The second eight characters (02900W15) are allocated from a sequential list of numbers, which
are in effect unique identity numbers. However, these may be allocated in blocks for specific
manual sets.
3. The final letter is the issue suffix as described above.

83 March 2005
GSM/GPRS Documentation

How do manual updates work?


Upissuing a manual
For each new major GSM and GPRS software release, certain software release dependent
manuals are revised and reissued. When this happens, the issue suffix letter of the Order number
increments by one letter of the alphabet, for example, release GSR5 manuals have the suffix J and
release GSR5.1 manuals have the suffix K.

Other manuals, such as hardware service manuals, are upissued as and when required and do not
follow the above suffix letter rules, but are sequentially lettered from O for Original, followed by A, B
and so on.

General Manual Revisions (GMRs)


GMRs are produced to update and correct GSM and GPRS manuals when required. A GMR may
be produced for release dependent manuals when a software point load is issued. For all manuals,
GMRs are produced to incorporate minor technical changes and to correct any errors. An updated
version of the documentation CDROM is produced when the GMRs are incorporated in the
manuals.

Motorola Order Management maintain a database of customers. Any customer who has ordered
manuals for a particular release will be supplied automatically with GMRs, as and when they are
produced. Similarly, any customer who has ordered a documentation CDROM for a particular
software load will be supplied automatically with the GMR version of that CDROM.

Where a documentation CDROM is supplied free of charge, as part of the software load package,
an updated CDROM will be supplied, when available, by Motorola GSM Software Distribution and
Licensing Centre (SDLC).

How to order manuals


Motorola GSM and GPRS manuals for customers must be ordered through the Motorola Local
Office or Representative. Manuals are ordered using the Order number. Remember to specify the
manual issue required by quoting the correct suffix letter that relates to the software load supported.

Details of publications
Motorola provides electronic, online and printed documentation required to install, maintain and
operate our GSM and GPRS cellular infrastructure equipment. For a complete listing of our
publications, please visit the GSM and GPRS sections of our Internet site at: http://
mynetworksupport.motorola.com.

A CDROM containing all the GSM and GPRS manuals, except release notes, is also available.
From release GSR5 onwards, the data is structured in a navigable PDF format to facilitate ease of
search and location of specific blocks of information.

84 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


85 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005
Motorola Technical Training Tiering Model

With the emergence of new technologies, an updated training curriculum is being developed by
Motorola Technical Training. The convergence between IT and cellular technologies brings about
new challenges when training engineers for these emerging systems.

Recognizing the need for ease of identification Motorola Training has structured its portfolio of
training courses to allow customers to clearly identify the correct courses for their staff. Course
modules have been divided in to functional areas. Each area is subdivided into the layer model
allowing ease of identification of the correct level of training for an engineer.

Technical training courses offered by Motorola are structured in a 5-tier system, based on the level
of content complexity. Contact your Customer Account management team for questions or
additional information. Tiering is subject to change.

Tier 1 Introduction
Tier 1 of the training model includes common principles such as Air Interfaces (i.e. IS-95), TCP/IP,
ATM, which are not linked directly to any generation of cellular technology. These principles
(courses) are fundamental to further understanding of cellular technologies.

Tier 2 Intermediate
Tier 2 of the training model includes hardware specific training modules.

Tier 3 Advanced
Tier 3 of the training model incorporates advanced training modules

Tier 4 System
Tier 4 of the training model includes training modules which facilitate a network wide perspective,
consisting of System Level courses.

Tier 5 Optimization / Workshops


Tier 5 of the training model includes optimization / workshops, advanced applications, and On-the-
Job-Training (OJT) courses.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 86


Tiering

GSM, GPRS, and UMTS


Tier5
Tier1 Tier2 Tier3 Tier4
Course Number Optimization/
Introductory Intermediate Advanced System
Workshops
GSM-BSS05: BTS Theory and Equipment Operation X

GSM-BSS07: Advanced BSS Field Support X

GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory X

GSM-BSS11A: BSS Overview (Non-Technical) X

GSM-BSS12: BSS Operations and Maintenance X

GSM-BSS14: BSS Technical Overview X

GSM-BSS15: BSS Installer X

GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular X

GSM-CP02A: GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical) X

GSM-CP15: Principles of RF Planning X

GSM-ENG941: Understanding GSM X

GSM-GSR6: Delta Course X

GSM-GSR7: (1760 Load) Delta Course X

GSM-H11WKS Horizon II Macro Workshop X

GSM-HLR01: Hardware System Structure X

GSM-HLR02: SPU Operation and Maintenance X

GSM-HLR03: SMU Operation and Maintenance X

GSM-HLS/EIS101: Operation and Maintenance


GSM-MSS-G100 Motorola Soft Switch GSM X

GSM-MSS-G101OM: Motorola SoftSwitch for GSM Operation X


and Maintenance
GSM-MTSG01: Hardware System Structure X

GSM-MTSG02: Operation and Maintenance X

GSM-MTSG03: Motorola MTSG Troubleshooting X

GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations X

GSM-NET02: OMC-R Advanced Network Operations X

GSM-NET03: Network Performance X

GSM-NET04: Cell Optimization Product (COP) X

GSM-NET05: Network Health Analyst X

GSM-NET06: Datagen Operations X

GSM-OMC01: OMC-R Overview X

GSM-OMC01A: OMC-R Overview (Non-Technical) X

GSM-OMC03: OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform) X

GSM-OMC04: OMC-R System Administration Workshop (Sun X


Fire 4800, Sun Netra 20, Sun Blade 150)
GSM-OMCS/T 01: Motorola OMC-S/T System Structure

87 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Tiering

GSM, GPRS, and UMTS


Tier5
Tier1 Tier2 Tier3 Tier4
Course Number Optimization/
Introductory Intermediate Advanced System
Workshops
GSM-OMCS/T 02: Motorola OMC-S/T Introduction to Opera-
tion System and Database
GSM-OMCS/T 03: Motorola OMC-S/T Operation and Mainte-
nance
GSM-PER300: NetPlan X

GSM-SYS01: GSM Interfaces and Protocols X

GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database X

GSM-SYS03: Advanced BSS Database X

GSM-SYS04: Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning X

GSM-SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered X


Systems
GSM-WKS01: 3G/2G handover, 2G/3G cell reselection feature X
workshop Circuit switched
GSM-WKS03: HDPC Workshop X

GSM-WKS04: HDPC2 Workshop X

GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory X

GPRS-BSS102: PCU Installation and Maintenance X

GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS X

GPRS-CP07A: GPRS Overview (Non -Technical) X

GPRS-GNL140: Overview of GPRS X

GPRS-GNL141: GPRS Air interface X

GPRS-GNL142: GPRS Mobility X

GPRS-GNL143: GPRS Packet Data Operations X

GPRS-GSN101: Cisco ICND X

GPRS-GSN103: Gateway GPRS Support Node X

GPRS-GSN203: Gateway GPRS Support Node - Advanced X

GPRS-NET103: BSS (GPRS) Network Performance X

GPRS-PoC100: Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC) Overview X

GPRS-PoC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Push To Talk X

GPRS-SYS101: GPRS Interfaces and Protocols R99 X

GPRS-SYS102: BSS (GPRS) Database X

GPRS-SYS104: BSS (GPRS) Planning X

GPRS-SYS105: Introduction to EGPRS X

GPRS-SYS116: SF Database and SGSN Signaling Interfaces X

UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS X

UMTS-CP13A: UMTS Overview (Non-Technical) X

UMTS-GNL144: Overview of UMTS X

88 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Tiering

GSM, GPRS, and UMTS


Tier5
Tier1 Tier2 Tier3 Tier4
Course Number Optimization/
Introductory Intermediate Advanced System
Workshops
UMTS-GNL145: UMTS/W-CDMA Air Interface Fundamentals X

UMTS-GSN207: Sun Enterprise Cluster 3 Administration X

UMTS-GSN208: Sun StorEdge Volume Manager Administra- X


tion
UMTS-GSN209: Charging Gateway X

UMTS-GSN212: C-SGSN Hardware System and Installation X

UMTS-v2.0 HLR01: Motorola v2.0 HLR Hardware Structure X


and System Overview
UMTS-v2.0 HLR02: Motorola v2.0 HLR Provisioning X

UMTS-v2.0 HLR03: Motorola v2.0 HLR Troubleshooting X

UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure X

UMTS-MTS-U02: Motorola MTS-U Operations and Mainte- X


nance
UMTS-MTS-U03: MTS-U Troubleshooting X

UMTS-MTS-U MGW 01: MTS-U MGW Hardware and Structure X


and System Overview
UMTS-MTS-U MGW 02: MTS-U MGW Provisioning X

UMTS-MTS-U MGW 03: Motorola MTS-U MGW Troubleshoot- X


ing
UMTS-NET201: OMCu Network Operations X

UMTS-NET203: UTRAN Network Performance X

UMTS-NET211: OMC-T Network Operations


UMTS-OMCu-S 01: Motorola OMCu-S Network Operations X

UMTS-PER560: NetPlan UMTS Static Simulator X

UMTS-PER570: NetPlan Fundamentals Plus UMTS X

UMTS-RNS01: RNS Operational Overview X

UMTS-RNS02: RNS Operations and Maintenance X

UMTS-SYS201 M1: UTRAN Air-Interface Protocols X

UMTS-SYS201 M2: UTRAN Terrestrial Protocols X

UMTS-SYS202 Module 1: UTRAN RNS Basic Database X


Parameters
UMTS-SYS202 Module 2: UTRAN RNS Database Radio X
Resource Management Parameters
UMTS-SYS204: UMTS Radio Planning X

UMTS-SYS212: C-SGSN Data Interface Configuration X

UMTS-SYS213: C-SGSN Context Interfaces Configuration X

UMTS-TEL1226: Understanding UMTS X

TDMA-ENG932: Understanding TDMA X

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 89


Tiering

CDMA Tiering
Tier 5
Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4
Course Optimization/
Introductory Intermediate Advanced System
Workshops
CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview X

CDMA-AGN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE X

CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals X

CDMA-pBTS101OM: Operations and Maintenance: pBTS X

CDMA-BTS480: SC 480 CDMA BTS X

CDMA-BTS610: SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station X


(CDMA) (Trunked)
CDMA-BTS710: SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station X
(CDMA) (Trunked)
CDMA-BTS720: SC 4812T Lite Base Transceiver Station X

CDMA-BTS780: SC 4812 Series BTS Packet Backhaul X


Upgrade
CDMA-BTS910: SC 4812T-MC BTS X

CDMA-BTS930: SC 300 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) X

CDMA-GNL035: 1X EV-DO Overview X

CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA X

CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) X

CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) X


eLearning
CDMA-GNL090: CNEOMI Fundamentals X

CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling X

CDMA-GNL120: Basic IP Fundamentals X

CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview X

CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based) X

CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview X

CDMA-GNL134: R16.3 Overview X

CDMA-GNL135: 1X Non-Technical Overview X

CDMA-GNL136: R16.4/R16.4.1 Overview X

CDMA-GNL138: R16.5 Overview X

CDMA-GNL800: IS-95 CDMA Technology (Latin America) X

CDMA-GNL810: CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT (Latin America) X

CDMA-GNL820: IS-95 & CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT (Latin America) X

CDMA-MLS100NE: MLS Network Element Overview X

CDMA-MLS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MLS X

CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview X

CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM X

90 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Tiering

CDMA Tiering (Continued)


Tier 5
Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4
Course Optimization/
Introductory Intermediate Advanced System
Workshops
CDMA-MMG101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola X
Media Gateway
CDMA-MSS100: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Overview X

CDMA-MSS100A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Administra- X


tion and Provisioning
CDMA-MSS100W: MSS-C Delta Workshop X

CDMA-MSSC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola X


Soft Switch for CDMA
CDMA-MSS200A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Translations X

CDMA-NETRA104NE: Netra 20 Network Element Overview X

CDMA-NETRA440NE: Netra 440 Network Element Overview X

CDMA-NET400A: 1X Network Administration (Unix) X

CDMA-NET500A: SC Cisco Network Administration X

CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview X

CDMA-OMCP104NE: OMC-IP with Netra 20 Network Element X


Overview
CDMA-OMCP100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMC-IP X

CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration X

CDMA-OMCR110A: SDU-OMCR Database Administration X

CDMA-OMCR120A: pBTS-OMCR Database Administration X

CDMA-OMCR140A: VPU-OMCR Database Administration X

CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview X

CDMA-OMCR104NE: OMCR with Netra 20 Network Element X


Overview
CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR X

CDMA-OMCR101: SUN OMC-R (CDMA) X

CDMA-PDSN100NE: PDSN Cisco Network Element Overview X

CDMA-PDSN101NE: PDSN 3Com Network Element Overview X

CDMA-PDSN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: Cisco PDSN X

CDMA-PDSN200OM: Operations and Maintenance: 3Com PDSN X

CDMA-PER200: K-Series Fundamentals X

CDMA-PER210: IS-41 Operation X

CDMA-PER220: Message Register (MR) X

CDMA-PER235: SMS Gateway Server X

CDMA-PER240: OMC-IP SYSLOG Analysis X

CDMA-PER250: System Monitoring Application Processor X


(SMAP)
CDMA-PER270: Compaq HLR41/AC X

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 91


Tiering

CDMA Tiering (Continued)


Tier 5
Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4
Course Optimization/
Introductory Intermediate Advanced System
Workshops
CDMA-PER290: CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and X
Maintenance
CDMA-PER350: NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA X

CDMA-PER360: NetPlan CDMA RF System Design X

CDMA-PER390: Multimedia Message Service Center X

CDMA-PER450: UNO Element Manager X

CDMA-PER460: UNO Market Manager X

CDMA-PER470: UNO Software Installation X

CDMA-PER500: Access Network Tools X

CDMA-PER640: S-Series Fundamentals X

CDMA-PoC100: Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC) Overview X

CDMA-PoC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Push To Talk X

CDMA-REL163: 16.3 Delta Workshop X

CDMA-REL164: R16.4/R16.4.1 Delta Workshop X

CDMA-REL165: R16.5 Delta Workshop X

CDMA-S2K320: 3G CDMA 2000 Implementation and Opera- X


tional Issues
CDMA-S2K400: WCDMA for UMTS: Guided Tour of the Physi- X
cal Layer
CDMA-SAO110: IOS X

CDMA-SAO190: Performance Management X

CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview X

CDMA-SDU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: SDU X

CDMA-SWT060: Nortel MTX Overview (Web-based) X

CDMA-SWT070: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals X

CDMA-SWT080: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals Advanced X

CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1) X

CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2) X

CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) X

CDMA-SWT150: EMX Advanced X

CDMA-SWT160: DMX X

CDMA-SWT180: Managing Switch Performance and Growth X

CDMA-SWT240: EMX Translations (International) X

CDMA-SWT260: CCS/SS7 Implementation X

CDMA-SWT270: CCS/C7 Implementation X

CDMA-SWT280: Split Mode Operation and Maintenance X

CDMA-SWT281: SLIC II Operations X

92 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Tiering

CDMA Tiering (Continued)


Tier 5
Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4
Course Optimization/
Introductory Intermediate Advanced System
Workshops
CDMA-SWT340: EMX Overview X

CDMA-SWT370: EMX-V Provisioning X

CDMA-SWT440: EMX-V Translations X

CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance X

CDMA-SYSEV001: 1XEV-DO Operations X

CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM X


Overview
CDMA-SYS110A: 1X System Administration (Unix) X

CDMA-SYS150: Alarm Handling and System Documentation X

CDMA-SYS200: CBSC/RFDS Operations X

CDMA-SYS230: CDMA RF Planning Course X

CDMA-SYS250: Optimization using SMAP X

CDMA-SYS300: CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link X

CDMA-SYS330MI: Advanced Troubleshooting Workshop X

CDMA-SYS340MI: OMCR-BTS Troubleshooting Workshop X

CDMA-SYS360: RAN Equipment Planning X

CDMA-SYS370: CDMA RAN IP Planning X

CDMA-SYS401: Performance Fundamentals X

CDMA-SYS500: CDMA2000 Call Flow X

CDMA-VPU100NE: VPU Network Element Overview X

CDMA-VPU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: VPU X

CDMA-XC100NE: XC Network Element Overview X

CDMA-XC100OM: Operations and Maintenance: XC X

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 93


Tiering

General Technology Tiering


Tier 5
Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4
Course Number Optimization/
Introductory Intermediate Advanced System
Workshops
GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling X

GEN-CP04: UNIX for OMC Users X

GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles X

GEN-CP06: Asynchronous Transfer Mode X

GEN-CP08: Frame Relay X

GEN-CP09: TCP/IP X

GEN-CP10: Voice Over IP X

GEN-CP11: WAP Overview X

GEN-ENG745: Understanding ATM X

GEN-ENG746: Understanding Advanced ATM X

GEN-ENG934: Understanding the Basics of Communications X


Networks
GEN-ENG936: Understanding SS7 for IN, Wireless, and VoIP X

GEN-ENG937 : Understanding Wireless Internet Access X

GEN-ENG942: Understanding 3G Wireless Mobile Communi- X


cations
GEN-ENG943: Understanding Emerging Wireless Technolo- X
gies
GEN-ENG945: Understanding TCP/IP X

GEN-ENG947: Understanding Voice over IP X

GEN-ENG948: Understanding Frame Relay X

GEN-ENG949: Understanding Quality of Service, IP, ATM and X


MPLS
GEN-GNL010: UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network X

GEN-GNL167: Understanding Radio Fundamentals X

GEN-GNL168: Understanding Transmission in Telecommunica- X


tions Network
GEN-GNL169: Understanding the Basics of Wireless Commu- X
nications
GEN-GNL179: Understanding Data Networking X

GEN-GNL168: Understanding Transmission in Telecommunica- X


tions Network
GEN-GNL187: Understanding the Basics of SONET X

GEN-GNL188: Understanding ISDN X

GEN-GNL189: Understanding Optical Networking X

GEN-GNL191: WAP 2.0 M-Services


GEN-GNL192: Overview of Wireless LAN X

94 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


Tiering

General Technology Tiering (Continued)


Tier 5
Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3 Tier 4
Course Number Optimization/
Introductory Intermediate Advanced System
Workshops
GEN-GNL193: IP Quality of Service X

GEN-GNL194: Sessions Initiation Protocol X

GEN-GNL195: Overview of MPLS X

GEN-GNL240: Evolution from GSM to UMTS X

GEN-GNL241: Overview of CDMA2000 Networks X

GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1 X

GEN-NET101: UNIX Part 2 X

GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1 X

GEN-NET201: Sun Solaris Part 2 X

GEN-TEL1054: Understanding the Basic of Data Communica- X


tions
GEN-TEL1218: Understanding the Principles of LANs and X
WANs
GEN-WAP101: WAP Overview X

GEN-WAP201: Writing Static WML Pages X

GEN-WAP202: Writing WMLScript Applications X

GEN-WAP301: Dynamic WAP Application Development Using X


Perl

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 95


96 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005
97 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005
General Courses

General Technology courses equip the student with the fundamental knowledge and confidence required to attend
more advanced technology and product specific courses. Whilst these courses are usually generic, it is imperative
that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each student.

GEN-ENG745: Understanding ATM ...................................................................................................................... 99


GEN-ENG746: Understanding Advanced ATM ................................................................................................... 100
GEN-ENG934: Understanding the Basics of Communications Networks ........................................................... 101
GEN-ENG936: Understanding SS7 for IN, Wireless, and VoIP........................................................................... 102
GEN-ENG937 : Understanding Wireless Internet Access ................................................................................... 103
GEN-ENG942: Understanding 3G Wireless Mobile Communications................................................................. 104
GEN-ENG943: Understanding Emerging Wireless Technologies ....................................................................... 105
GEN-ENG945: Understanding TCP/IP ................................................................................................................ 106
GEN-ENG947: Understanding Voice over IP ...................................................................................................... 107
GEN-ENG948: Understanding Frame Relay ....................................................................................................... 108
GEN-ENG949: Understanding Quality of Service, IP, ATM and MPLS............................................................... 109
GEN-GNL010: UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network........................................................................ 110
GEN-GNL167: Understanding Radio Fundamentals ........................................................................................... 111
GEN-GNL168: Understanding Transmission in Telecommunications Network................................................... 112
GEN-GNL169: Understanding the Basics of Wireless Communications ............................................................. 113
GEN-GNL179: Understanding Data Networking.................................................................................................. 114
GEN-GNL186: Understanding Digital Subscriber Lines ...................................................................................... 115
GEN-GNL187: Understanding the Basics of SONET .......................................................................................... 116
GEN-GNL188: Understanding ISDN.................................................................................................................... 117
GEN-GNL189: Understanding Optical Networking .............................................................................................. 118
GEN-GNL191: WAP 2.0 M-Services ................................................................................................................... 119
GEN-GNL192: Overview of Wireless LAN........................................................................................................... 120
GEN-GNL193: IP Quality of Service.................................................................................................................... 121
GEN-GNL194: Sessions Initiation Protocol ......................................................................................................... 122
GEN-GNL195: Overview of MPLS....................................................................................................................... 123
GEN-GNL240: Evolution from GSM to UMTS ..................................................................................................... 124
GEN-GNL241: Overview of CDMA2000 Networks .............................................................................................. 125
GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1.................................................................................................................................. 126
GEN-NET101: UNIX Part 2.................................................................................................................................. 127
GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1........................................................................................................................ 128
GEN-NET201: Sun Solaris Part 2........................................................................................................................ 129
GEN-TEL1054: Understanding the Basic of Data Communications.................................................................... 130
GEN-TEL1218: Understanding the Principles of LANs and WANs ..................................................................... 131
GEN-WAP101: WAP Overview............................................................................................................................ 132
GEN-WAP201: Writing Static WML Pages .......................................................................................................... 133
GEN-WAP202: Writing WMLScript Applications.................................................................................................. 134
GEN-WAP301: Dynamic WAP Application Development Using Perl .................................................................. 135

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 98


GEN-ENG745: Understanding ATM

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is intended for any interested student.
However, the course is best suited to those at an
intermediate experience level.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with an excellent understanding of current ATM technologies,
where ATM is deployed in the network, as well as the issues involved in migrating non-ATM traffic over ATM.
Understanding ATM helps students conceptualize ATM and identify profitable ATM applications and deployment
scenarios.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to understand and identify the following:
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Essentials
ATM Overview
ATM Standard and Interfaces
Service Provided to Users
ATM Protocol
Selected Topics in ATM
ATM Summary

99 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-ENG746: Understanding Advanced ATM

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 A basic understanding of ATM, either from your
the Technical Training Direct link. own work experience or from an introductory ATM
course is helpful.
Audience
This course is intended for anyone responsible for
equipment or services employing ATM, including
systems integration, network management, public
network services, sales, and personnel dealing with
QoS issues either internally or as part of a product
support team.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive appreciation of the role of ATM in today's networks.
students also gain an understanding of how ATM interworks with other networks and transports non-ATM traffic.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to understand and identify:
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Basics
ATM For the Public Carrier Backbone
Public Carrier ATM Service Interworking
ATM over Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL)
Video over ATM
Switching and Routing over ATM
Private ATM Wide Area Networks (WANs)
QoS in ATM and IP

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 100


GEN-ENG934: Understanding the Basics of
Communications Networks

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is intended for students who need to
understand the fundamentals of switching, signaling or
transmission, enhance your ability to explain complex
communications concepts, or identify and compare
competitive technologies

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to broaden the student's comprehension of current and emerging communications
networks enabling them to easily identify the major components of telephone networks and enhance their ability
to analyze the benefits of various technologies. students will examine the current industry structure establishing
an appreciation of market motivations as well as explore the network services typically available.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain today's network operates
Explain the networks evolution from its analog roots
Explain how it Networks are now transitioning from circuit to packet

101 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-ENG936: Understanding SS7 for IN, Wireless, and
VoIP

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on A solid, mid-level understanding of
the Technical Training Direct link. telecommunications equivalent to ENG934 and
ENG936.
Audience
This course is intended for network planners, design
and systems engineers, equipment and service
product managers, and sales and network support
specialists who need to understand Signaling System
Number 7 and its evolving role in any of a variety of
networks.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a comprehensive explanation of how SS7 protocols work in current
telecommunications networks, including Intelligent Networks, and how SS7 is evolving and being deployed for
Wireless and VoIP networks based on emerging standards.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain how and why SS7 is used for call control and supports new services using Intelligent Networks as
well as the Wireless and VoIP environments

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 102


GEN-ENG937 : Understanding Wireless Internet Access

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 A basic understanding of wireless communications
the Technical Training Direct link. and of fundamental Internet technologies, including
Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
Audience (TCP/IP), and digital and cellular technologies.
Students who need a comprehensive overview of
Mobile Data Applications, networks, and protocols will
benefit from attending this course.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide you with a comprehensive understanding of how today's wireless networks
are being extended to support Mobile IP/Wireless IP and GPRS. Scenarios are presented from IS-835 (TIA's
wireless IP standard) and GPRS (ETSI's General Packet Radio Service), which explain the fundamentals of
mobile Internet access. With this as the foundation, the emphasis of the course shifts to show how each of the
major GSM, TDMA, and CDMA Digital Cellular / PCS technologies is evolving to 3G capabilities for providing
higher bit rate services and new multimedia capabilities.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain how the Internet is evolving to support Mobile IP networking as well as the current and future
evolution of data capabilities in GSM and 3G Digital Cellular / PCS systems

103 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-ENG942: Understanding 3G Wireless Mobile Communications

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click 1 A basic comprehension of digital cellular and GSM
on the Technical Training Direct link. Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
technologies and wireless communications.
Audience
This course is intended for anyone who wants to
understand next generation wireless mobile
communications, as well as the technologies that
enable it.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a a basic understanding of the future growth in high-bandwidth wireless
services. The major impetus for the investment in 3G (currently well over $4 billion) is the present trend of wired
data's double-digit growth rates. Wireless growth is expected to follow wired growth as more and more
businesses look for alternatives to the incumbent telephone company's ability to meet increasing bandwidth
needs.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the possible flavors of 3G systems expected in the near future
Explain how current GSM systems form the technical foundation for the 3G systems of tomorrow
Discuss and compare 3G proposals, as well as the capabilities and service sets 3G systems will offer

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 104


GEN-ENG943: Understanding Emerging Wireless Technologies

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click Basic knowledge of the wireless cellular industry,
on the Technical Training Direct link. along with First Generation (1G) and Second
Generation (GSM) wireless systems.
Audience
This course is intended for account representatives,
programmers, communications or operations
managers, and system engineers.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with an objective overview of the wide range of emerging wireless
technologies, a comprehensive understanding of the many voice and data services available in the market
today, as well as what's in store for the near future.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the basics of Third Generation (3G) systems
Identify in-building wireless systems
Identify how wireless systems offer quickly-deployed solutions for data-hungry customers

105 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-ENG945: Understanding TCP/IP

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click None
on the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is intended for anyone who wants a
detailed technical overview of TCP/IP and related
protocols.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with a good understanding of the TCP/IP suite so they can evaluate
the potential communication opportunities it presents. They will be able to discuss it technically and
professionally with colleagues and customers alike and will be able to make intelligent decisions, not only for
their own companys needs, but also for those of their clients and customers.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to understand and identify the basics of:
Internet Protocol (IP) Addressing and Routing
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
Quality of Service (QoS)
Related Protocols and Applications
Network Security

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 106


GEN-ENG947: Understanding Voice over IP

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click None
on the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is intended for anyone who needs to
understand Voice over IP (VoIP) and its impact on
current networks.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to enable students to gain an understanding of Voice over IP and its impact on current
networks and provide a comprehensive examination of the applications and services available for IP. students
will explore the process of migrating voice traffic to packet-based networking solutions as well as examine the
business forces driving integration of communications services over IP networks and the services in store for
the near term.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to understand and identify:
VoIP applications and services
internet protocol (IP)
protocols for VoIP call control
the public switched telephone network (PSTN) and VoIP interworking
the basics of voice coding, fax, and delay

107 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-ENG948: Understanding Frame Relay

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click None
on the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is intended for applications engineers,
sales and marketing personnel, planners, end-user
management, network operations personnel, and
consultants.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with an understanding of network solutions based on Frame Relay.
students will acquire a basic understanding of Frame Relay as a protocol, how Frame Relay networks are
designed, engineering considerations for Frame Relay solutions, and how Frame Relay networks are managed.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to understand and identify:
frame relay standards activity
inside the frame relay protocol
frame relay popularity
customer network management (CNM)
frame relay implementation
frame relay and ATM interworking
frame relay end to end
engineering a frame relay solution
management, service configuration, and troubleshooting

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 108


GEN-ENG949: Understanding Quality of Service, IP, ATM and MPLS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click None
on the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is specifically designed for students with a
technical focus, who need an understanding of QoS
and the issues associated with it.

.Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
Quality of Service (QoS) may well be one of the most confusing and elusive topics in data networking today.
QoS is a broadly-used term that refers to the performance attributes of an end-to-end connection. The particular
elements of a QoS definition depend on the information being transported. For example, QoS for voice defines
limits on specific parameters such as delay, signal loss, noise, and echo. The definition of QoS for data may
identify attributes such as error rates, lost packet rates, throughput, and delay. In many cases, particularly in
data networks, differing levels of QoS are supported by the same network.

Confusion arises primarily because QoS means so many things to so many people. The trade press, hardware
and software vendors, and consumers all associate different meanings to QoS, as well as define QoS differ-
ently. Evidence indicates that QoS mechanisms are becoming more in demand in corporate and other private
intranets than they are in the global Internet. This results in network designers having to select which mecha-
nisms will best support their existing networks and possibly interoperate with the larger Internet in the long-term.
This course presents differing QoS mechanisms in a clear and concise manner, helping resolve the current
industry confusion.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Gain an objective understanding of today's Quality of Service mechanisms, along with a solid understanding
of the business goals successful enterprise QoS deployments are designed to meet.

109 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-GNL010: UNIX Commands Applied to Motorola's Network

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days No

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered by the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
training facilities only, or other premises by 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
arrangement. 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Audience
System Engineers, Field Engineers and Technicians
involved with Motorola's network operation and
Maintenance tasks.

Features
Offered in LAC only as an option to taking both GEN-
NET100: UNIX Part 1 and GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1.

Course Content
This course presents the UNIX commands and concepts that are most used in Motorola's network. Those UNIX
commands are needed to perform several tasks in Motorola's network, such as operation and maintenance of
CBSC, SwitchMATE, UNIX LMF, NetPlan and UNO.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
identify and execute the UNIX commands used in Motorola's network operation and maintenance tasks.
In this course, you will learn:
handling of files using vi editor
Manage file access permissions
User maintenance
Control processes
command execution scheduling
Shell programming
File directory structure

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 110


GEN-GNL167: Understanding Radio Fundamentals

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, Allow 2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click 1 None
on the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Students who want a technical introduction to basic
RF transmission, with an application to fixed wireless,
will find this the ideal TRA CD.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
Understanding Radio Fundamentals (tm) e-Learning CD builds a foundational understanding of RF wireless
concepts and infrastructure. Among the many topics covered in this course are basic wireless terms, channel
coding and modulation techniques, fundamentals of RF transmission and reception, access techniques, and an
introduction to shared-spectrum protocols, including Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA), Time Division
Multiple Access (TDMA), and Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA). The course also expand on those
concepts with a specific focus on fixed wireless issues, including system level planning, site planning,
equipment installation, and proof-of-performance.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Provide a baseline of wireless knowledge of wireless technology, especially as it applies to fixed wireless
solutions.

111 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-GNL168: Understanding Transmission in
Telecommunications Network

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click 1 None
on the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Students who need to learn the basics of
Transmission fundamentals, such as voice coding,
digital transmission, and loop design.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
TRA's Understanding Transmission in Telecommunications Networks (tm) provides the fundamental knowledge
and skills needed to understand and appreciate the capabilities of today's transmission networks. This course
explains the basics of voice coding, speech compression, time division multiplexing (TDM), digital signal
hierarchies, synchronization, loop design, and Digital Subscriber Lines (DSL). It also explores the foundation on
which future networks will be based.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the current telecommunications network transmission infrastructure, its current capabilities and how
it has evolved.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 112


GEN-GNL169: Understanding the Basics of Wireless Communications

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click 1 None
on the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Students who need to learn the basics of Wireless
Communications.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
The course explains the dynamic shift from older technologies based on copper lines to the newer wireless
technologies, including cellular, radio, Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Code Division Multiple Access
(CDMA), and more.

You will receive a brief overview of the history of radio and radio technologies and a review of newer
applications of wireless, including mobile access to the Internet, wireless office telephone systems, Mobile
Satellite Services, and Third Generation (3G) cellular technologies.

The growth in cellular has reached only a small percentage of the world population and has far more growth yet
to come. There will be an immense need by the wireless industry for new people, and these new hires will have
to come from other areas of the industry and may not be familiar with wireless. This course will enable both
newcomers to the field and old hands to get a broad perspective of wireless - where it's been, where it is now,
and where it's going.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Obtain a good understanding of the principles of radio, especially cellular radio, and an appreciation of the
problems faced by cellular and other radio-based companies, how these problems can be addressed, and
where the various wireless-related industries are headed.

113 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-GNL179: Understanding Data Networking

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Perfect for the beginner. Students learn about the hot
topics in today's networks, such as the Internet, IP,
LANs, WANs, ethernet, xDSL, ATM, frame relay,
routers, switches, transmission, TCP/IP, and the
evolution of data networks.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
Understanding Data Networking (tm) is designed to provide students with an excellent overview of how modern
data communication networks function by examining Local Area Networks (LANs), Wide Area Networks
(WANs), Internet Protocol (IP), and evolving data networks. In today's hyper-competitive communications
marketplace, customers expect equipment vendors to provide real-world solutions to the challenges facing
business. They demand more than glossy sales brochures and pricing schedules; they want knowledgeable,
problem-solving partners. Are you ready? Is your organization ready? This course prepares you to confidently
discuss LAN/WAN technologies, including ethernet, xDSL, ATM, frame relay, and TCP/IP, and increases your
comfort level with the services and equipment in today's marketplace. Understanding Data Networking (tm) is
your key to understanding where the marketplace for services and equipment is today, as well as what's in store
for the near future.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain today's data networking environment by exploring the migration of customer networks to Internet-
based delivery methodologies.
Explain the near-term potential future of Local and Wide Area Networks and prepare students for high-level
conversations on data networking topics.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 114


GEN-GNL186: Understanding Digital Subscriber Lines

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Anyone responsible for DSL service implementation or
who needs to evaluate DSL as a current broadband
service vehicle, including exchange carrier planners,
sales support specialists, facilities planners, and
corporate communications managers and planners.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
The age of electronic commerce (e-commerce) has arrived at homes and businesses, enabled primarily by
Internet connectivity. Individuals reach from their desktops into a "cyberlibrary" containing billions of terabytes of
information,

in multimedia formats, from anywhere in the world. Networking technologies that move this information at
gigabit speeds exist and are rapidly evolving. Internet technologies have allowed the formation of virtual
companies. Employees are no longer confined to the corporate office; they can work from home with remote
access to their company's information networks. Getting the information to the residence with speed and
economy, however, has not kept pace. The "final mile," designed for voice and often served by facilities
constructed over the last 50 years, remains bottle necked.

However, there is hope. Service providers such as ILECs, CLECs, ISPs, and even corporations are ready to
deploy technologies that will overcome the final mile obstruction. Understanding Digital Subscriber Lines(tm)
examines, in detail, one of the most promising emerging technologies to address the issue of local bandwidth.
Concentrating on Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Lines (ADSL), this course covers a multitude of deployment
alternatives. It helps students discover the applicable standards, service offerings, how much bandwidth is
available, who's deploying it, the potential performance impediments, and how it's tested.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain ADSL, other Digital Subscriber Line (xDSL) technologies and the environment in which they are
designed to operate.

115 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-GNL187: Understanding the Basics of SONET

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, Allow 2 Days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
( http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Network and facility planners and engineers, members
of internal systems organizations, and technical
infrastructure sales representatives.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
The rate of technological advances in fiber-optic components has led to a revolution in communications-network
transmission systems. Advances in fiber-optic system products have driven down the cost per circuit-mile to
rates that are lower than ever before. The keys to this rapid cost reduction have been the world standardization
of optical transmission systems in specifications named the Synchronous Optical Network (SONET in North
America) and Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH in most other parts of the world) and the introduction and
refinement of Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Systems.

This course helps students understand the key elements of SONET/SDH technology; its profitable applications;
and its operations, administration, and maintenance features.

If you need to understand today's broadband marketplace, what technologies are available, and what's in store
for tomorrow, this is a "must-see" course.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Provide a practical overview of SONET/SDH and optical technologies, and their applications, evolution, and
implementation.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 116


GEN-GNL188: Understanding ISDN

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, Allow 2 Days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Anyone requiring a technological overview of ISDN's
implementation and support considerations, services,
and features. This course is structured to satisfy the
needs of students whose professions involve
supporting ISDN implementations.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
In the 1960s, networks began using digital transmission. By the mid '60s, the use of stored program control
network switches allowed carriers to offer more highly developed services. By the mid '70s, a sophisticated
Common Channel Signaling (CCS) mechanism (which later evolved into Signaling System Number 7) allowed
Intelligent Network (IN) switches to communicate with one another or with network-based Service Control Points
(SCPs) to offer even more advanced services. However, in the midst of all these advances, most users
continued to access the network using analog technologies (which limited the user's bandwidth).
To solve the problem of having limited analog access to a sophisticated digital network, Integrated Services
Digital Network (ISDN) was developed. The ISDN concept has been around since the late '70s, and has been
deployed in some carrier networks since the mid '80s. The vision was to provide a blueprint for a set of end-to-
end digital services, based on the availability of digital transmission and CCS. ISDN defined interfaces, services,
digital access, and a sophisticated CCS protocol so end-users could take full advantage of the power of the
network.
Today, for most people, ISDN is primarily a method of gaining digital access to the network. ISDN defines two
access interfaces, with the major difference between them being bandwidth (or data rate, which leads to
differing service availability). Understanding ISDN(tm) reviews the important underlying concepts and
technologies that contribute to ISDN's versatility.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the technical issues associated with implementing ISDN-based applications and solutions.

117 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-GNL189: Understanding Optical Networking

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, Allow 2 Days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Anyone who wants to understand this 21st century
network needs to begin laying the foundation by
getting a clear grasp of the concepts surrounding
optical networking.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
Optical technology is revolutionizing the communications industry. Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
(DWDM) and erbium amplifiers have combined to allow a single, hair-thin fiber to carry more than a terabit per
second of information over distances of several hundred miles or more. All-optical switches with multi-terabit
capacity are smaller than a shoebox!

The introduction of photonic add-drop multiplexers and cross-connects is allowing service providers to construct
extremely flexible transport networks that are independent of bit rate and service type. The cost of bandwidth is
orders of magnitude less than it was only a few years ago, and the revolution is only beginning. The core of
future communications networks will clearly be optical. This course introduces the student to the basic
terminology, concepts, capabilities, and issues associated with the optical revolution. If you need to understand
the jargon, the 'gee whiz,' the motivations, the technology, the ugly truths, and some of the ongoing challenges
of optical networks, TRA's Understanding Optical Networking(tm) is for you. This course is aimed at the
communications industry professional who has little or no background in optics or optical networking but who
has a need for an intermediate level of understanding.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the basic jargon, key concepts, current directions, future potential, and ongoing issues surrounding
the optical revolution.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 118


GEN-GNL191: WAP 2.0 M-Services

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking an overview of WAP, its features,
and capabilities.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course is designed as an overview of WAP, its features, and capabilities.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the bandwidth and processing power of a wireless device
Understand the requirements of the GSM Forum for the M-Services initiative
Understand the features and capabilities of WAP
Understand the components and architecture of WAP
Understand the features and use of the Wireless Markup Language
Understand the WAP protocols and their use
Understand the requirements WAP on a content provider
Understand the security related issues with WAP

119 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-GNL192: Overview of Wireless LAN

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking an overview of IEEE 802.11 and
802.11b Wireless LANs, their features, and
capabilities.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course is designed as an overview of IEEE 802.11 and 802.11b Wireless LANs, their features, and
capabilities.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand what is a Wireless LAN
Understand the IEEE 802.11 and 802.11b architecture standard
Understand the applications that are available with a wireless LAN
Understand the achievable data rates for Wireless LAN
Understand the Wireless LAN network and laptop computing components
Understand physical layer and MAC layer details
Understand how a public carrier will use and deploy Wireless LANs
Understand how a private company can deploy and use a Wireless LAN in their corporate environment
Understand the security issues with Wireless LAN
Understand the future of Wireless LAN

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 120


GEN-GNL193: IP Quality of Service

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking an overview of the IP Quality of
Service architectures in the Internet.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of the IP Quality of Service architectures in the Internet.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the limitations of the best effort approach to QoS
Understand the need of QoS with respect to new applications
Understand how QoS requirements are communicated
Understand policy based architecture
Understand the benefits and limitations of the Integrated Services approach to QoS
Understand the benefits and limitations of the Differentiated Services approach to QoS
Understand the protocols that are used for each of the QoS approaches
Understand emerging trends in IP QoS

121 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-GNL194: Sessions Initiation Protocol

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking an overview of SIP, its features,
and capabilities.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course provides an overview of SIP, its features, and capabilities.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the motivation for a consolidated voice and data network
Understand the challenges of a consolidated network
Understand the term soft switch and how it is used
Understand how SIP will be used to establish everything from voice calls to multimedia sessions
Understand how SIP is being extended to provide additional capabilities
Understand the use and flexibility of the Session Description Protocol

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 122


GEN-GNL195: Overview of MPLS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking an overview of MPLS, its features,
and capabilities.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course provides an overview of MPLS, its features, and capabilities.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the reason for MPLS
Understand the limitations of ATM
Understand how MPLS performs fast routing
Understand the architecture of MPLS
Understand the protocols used in MPLS
Understand how MPLS will support multiple Quality of Services
Understand the next steps for MPLS
Understand the applications of MPLS

123 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-GNL240: Evolution from GSM to UMTS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking a detailed understanding of the
evolution of GSM to UMTS. This includes those in a
design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering
network engineering, and verification role.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course provides a detailed understanding of the evolution of GSM to UMTS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the differences between a Packet Switched Network and the Circuit Switched Network
Understand how GSM can evolve to GPRS and what new services are provided
Understand how GSM/GPRS can evolve to UMTS and the new services that will be provided
Understand the future of UMTS

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 124


GEN-GNL241: Overview of CDMA2000 Networks

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking a detailed understanding of the
basics of the cdma2000 network. This includes those
in a design, test, systems engineering, sales
engineering, network engineering, or verification role.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course provides a detailed understanding of the basics of the cdma2000 network.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the history of cdma2000 and the motivation behind designing cdma2000 standards
Understand the limitations of existing IS-95 networks
Understand the cdma2000 network architecture with focus on packet data networks
Understand key goals of cdma2000 air interface
Understand the differences between 1x and 3x air interfaces
Understand key features of the 1x air interface option
Understand inter operability issues between IS-95 networks and cdma2000 network
Understand the current deployment situation of cdma2000 networks
Understand the evolution strategy from IS-95 to cdma2000

125 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approx. 6-8 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
End User, Application Developer, Technical Manager,
System Analyst, System Administrator, Software
Engineer, Database Administrator, Help Desk/
Support.

Features
Web-based

Course Content
The UNIX Part 1: User Fundamentals course is the first in a series of 10 courses on the UNIX operating system.
It describes how to get started with UNIX, introducing the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) and the
terminal window. It introduces files, directories, and printing and operations frequently performed on these. It
teaches how to manipulate input and output, as well as how to compress and uncompress files. It also
introduces the UNIX shell environment, shell functionality, and text patterns.

Course Objectives
Upon completion the student will be able to:
Identify the differences between working with windows and with shells.
Identify the features of X-windows.
Identify the components of the Common Desktop Environment (CDE).
Identify the command options used to change directories.
Identify print commands for printing options in System V.
Identify the functions of filters and pipes.
Identify ways of manipulating shell variables.
Identify the methods for condensing command names by using wildcards and metacharacters.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 126


GEN-NET101: UNIX Part 2

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approx. 6-8 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
The intended audience for this series of courses are
End Users, Application Developers, Technical
Managers, System Analysts, System Administrators,
Software Engineers, Database Administrators, Help
Desk/Support.

Features
Web-based

Course Content
The second course in the UNIX curriculum teaches end users a little about how UNIX works and handles
resources. It shows how UNIX can be best used by advanced users in a UNIX-based enterprise. This course
can even act as a starting primer for users interested in becoming administrators.

Course Objectives
Upon completion the student will be able to:
Identify the hardware requirements for a UNIX system
Identify the features of job control
Identify the guidelines for managing disk space usage
Identify the benefits of networking
Identify the features of Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Identify the requirements for remote access
Identify the features of Network Information Services (NIS)
Identify the features of Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)

127 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approx. 6-8 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1

Audience
System Manager, System Administrator, System
Analyst, Web Administrator, Database Administrator,
Mail Administrator, Network Engineers.

Features
Web-based training.

Course Content
The first course in the Sun Solaris implementation track covers basic user and system administration in the
Solaris environment. It focuses on the common skills that an administrator will perform and how they are
handled in this flavor of Unix.

Course Objectives
Upon completion the student will be able to:
Identify the functions of the Unix system administrator
Identify the features of the Solaris operating environment
Identify the methods for installing Solaris
Identify the commands used to manage groups with the CLI
Identify the features of Solaris physical disk partitions
Identify the types of Solaris file systems
Identify the ps command options
Identify the features of system message logging
Identify the function of system monitoring

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 128


GEN-NET201: Sun Solaris Part 2

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approx. 6-8 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
System Manager, System Administrator, System
Analyst, Web Administrator, Database Administrator,
Mail Administrator, Network Engineers. Specifying,
installing and administering UNIX systems in small to
large enterprises. Administering applications running
on UNIX systems (both hardware and software).
Managing users and security. Providing advanced
help desk and information services.

Features
Web-based

Course Content
This second course in the Sun Solaris implementation track covers internetworking connectivity, systems,
services, and security. Wherever possible, It focus's on the tools and features specific to Solaris.

Course Objectives
Upon completion the student will be able to:
Identify the characteristics of the print service
Identify the CLI commands used to add a network printer
Identify the CLI commands used to manage print queues and jobs
Identify the features of computer networks
Identify the components that configure TCP/IP
Identify the features of the TCP/IP-related commands
Identify the features of the NFS service
Identify the features of automounter
Identify features of e-mail services
Identify the characteristics of sendmail
Identify the features of POP3.

129 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-TEL1054: Understanding the Basic of Data Communications

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is a fundamental course for users moving
their voice requirements into the data network.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
Understanding the Basics of Data Communications(tm) is designed to give you the basic knowledge you need
to become conversant with modern data networks. You will receive the historical perspective necessary to
understand how and why the technology evolved to its current widespread deployment and use, and you'll get
the background you need if you are entering the technology field with little or no technical background. Like any
technology, it has its own language base; so as an introductory course it leads into more complex subjects.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Present the industry's need for data networks, how these networks evolved, how they operate, and what
services they offer.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 130


GEN-TEL1218: Understanding the Principles of LANs and WANs

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on the None
Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is a fundamental course for anyone who
needs to understand the principles of LANs and WANs

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with an excellent overview of how modern communication
networks function by examining LANs, WANs, Internet Protocol, and evolving data networks.This course
prepares the student to confidently discuss LAN/WAN technologies such as Ethernet, xDSL, ATM, Frame Relay,
and TCP/IP, and increases the students comfort level with the services and equipment available in today's
marketplace.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the fundamental concepts associated with LAN and WAN technologies, standards, operations, and
internet working
Explain the potential of Local and Wide Area Networks
Discuss networking technologies and concepts

131 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-WAP101: WAP Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is intended for WAP developers.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a provide a basic understanding of the history, architecture, and
development requirements for Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) programming. The learning activities have
been designed to introduce developers to the practical world of WAP communications, wireless devices and
their WAP functionality, markup languages and scripting, and development tools.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the fundamentals WAP program development

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 132


GEN-WAP201: Writing Static WML Pages

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 GEN-WAP101: WAP Overview
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is intended for WAP developers.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide developers with an overview of WML and the background information and
basic skills needed to begin creating useful, commercial WAP applications using the Motorola Application
Development Toolkit.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to perform the following WAP / WML functions:
Write a single card deck
Create navigation
Use timers
Create a list of choices
Use WML variables
Acquire text input
Use images
Create an optional head section of a WML document

133 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


GEN-WAP202: Writing WMLScript Applications

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 GEN-WAP101: WAP Overview
the Technical Training Direct link. 2 GEN-WAP201: Writing Static WML Pages
3 Familiarity with HTML, WML, and Java Script
Audience basics is strongly recommended.
Application developers seeking an understanding of
the basics for using WMLScript.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This is the third course in a series of courses dealing with developing applications in the Wireless Application
Protocol (WAP) environment.
This course will provide developers with an overview of the WAP specified client side scripting language,
WMLScript, and the background information needed to begin creating dynamic pages using WMLScript for
wireless mobile devices.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to perform the following WAP / WML functions:
Explain the general characteristics of WMLScript.
Explain why it is desirable to use WMLScript.
Describe the difference between WML and WMLScript, and ECMAScript and WMLScript.
Be familiar with the appropriate WMLScript syntax.
Describe how to use the WMLScript programming features.
List the WMLScript standard libraries.
Be familiar with how to invoke library functions.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com 134


GEN-WAP301: Dynamic WAP Application Development Using Perl

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 4 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 GEN-WAP101: WAP Overview
the Technical Training Direct link. 2 GEN-WAP201: Writing Static WML Pages
3 GEN-WAP202: Writing WMLScript Applications
Audience 4 Familiarity with Perl or a similar programming
language is strongly recommended.
Application developers seeking an overview of the
basic skills needed to create dynamic WAP
applications for wireless mobile devices.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This is the final course in a series of courses dealing with developing applications in the Wireless Application
Protocol (WAP) environment.
This course will provide developers with an overview of the background information and basic skills needed to
begin creating dynamic Common Gateway Interface (CGI) applications that allow the user to interact with
databases and other programs or resources via their wireless mobile device.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to perform the following WAP / WML functions:
Write CGI in the WAP environment.
Refresh your familiarity with Perl.
Implement WAP applications using Perl.
Write WAP applications using database content.
Write WAP applications using Internet content.

135 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com March 2005


CDMA Courses

CDMA Technology courses equip the student with the knowledge required to commission, maintain, monitor and
optimize digital CDMA networks. It is imperative that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each
student and to ensure that all prerequisite training is completed.

CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview ................................................................................ 138


CDMA-AGN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE............................................................................ 139
CDMA-BTS480: SC 480 CDMA BTS ............................................................................................................... 140
CDMA-BTS610: SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked) .................................................... 141
CDMA-BTS710: SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)....................................................... 142
CDMA-BTS780: SC 4812 Series BTS Packet Backhaul Upgrade................................................................... 143
CDMA-BTS910: SC 4812T-MC BTS................................................................................................................ 144
CDMA-GNL035: 1X EV-DO Overview ................................................................................................................. 145
CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA............................................................................................................... 146
CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) eLearning ................................................................. 147
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)...................................................................................................... 149
CDMA-GNL138: R16.5 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 151
CDMA-MLS100NE: MLS Network Element Overview ......................................................................................... 152
CDMA-MLS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MLS .................................................................................... 153
CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview............................................................................................ 154
CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM ....................................................................................... 155
CDMA-MM117NE: MM II Network Element Overview......................................................................................... 157
CDMA-MMG101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola Media Gateway .................................................. 159
CDMA-MSS100: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Overview................................................................................ 160
CDMA-MSS100A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Administration and Provisioning.......................................... 161
CDMA-MSS100MI: MSS Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 162
CDMA-MSS100W: MSS-C Delta Workshop........................................................................................................ 163
CDMA-MSS200A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Translations......................................................................... 164
CDMA-MSSC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA ....................................... 165
CDMA-NET400A: 1X Network Administration (Unix)........................................................................................... 166
CDMA-NET500A: SC Cisco Network Administration........................................................................................... 167
CDMA-NETRA104NE: Netra 20 Network Element Overview.............................................................................. 168
CDMA-NETRA440NE: Netra 440 Network Element Overview............................................................................ 169
CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview ................................................................................ 170
CDMA-OMCP104NE: OMC-IP with Netra 20 Network Element Overview.......................................................... 171
CDMA-OMCP100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMC-IP .......................................................................... 172
CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration ................................................................................. 174
CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview................................................................................. 173
CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR ............................................................................. 175
CDMA-OMCR104NE: OMCR with Netra 20 Network Element Overview............................................................ 176
CDMA-OMCR110A: SDU-OMCR Database Administration................................................................................ 177
CDMA-OMCR120A: pBTS-OMCR Database Administration .............................................................................. 178
CDMA-OMCR140A: VPU-OMCR Database Administration ................................................................................ 179
CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals.................................................................................... 180
CDMA-pBTS101OM: Operations and Maintenance: pBTS ................................................................................. 181
CDMA-PDSN100NE: PDSN Cisco Network Element Overview.......................................................................... 182
CDMA-PDSN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: Cisco PDSN ..................................................................... 183

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 136


CDMA Courses

CDMA-PDSN101NE: PDSN 3Com Network Element Overview ..........................................................................184


CDMA-PDSN200OM: Operations and Maintenance: 3Com PDSN .....................................................................185
CDMA-PER040: IMS: IP Multimedia Subsystem Overview..................................................................................186
CDMA-PER220: Message Register (MR).............................................................................................................188
CDMA-PER235: SMS Gateway Server ................................................................................................................189
CDMA-PER240: OMC-IP SYSLOG Analysis .......................................................................................................190
CDMA-PER250: System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP) ...................................................................191
CDMA-PER450: UNO Element Manager .............................................................................................................192
CDMA-PER460: UNO Market Manager ...............................................................................................................193
CDMA-PER500: Access Network Tools ...............................................................................................................194
CDMA-PoC100: Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC) Overview ...............................................................................195
CDMA-PoC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Push To Talk........................................................................196
CDMA-REL164: R16.4/R16.4.1 Delta Workshop .................................................................................................197
CDMA-REL165: R16.5 Delta Workshop...............................................................................................................198
CDMA-S2K320: 3G CDMA 2000 Implementation and Operational Issues ..........................................................199
CDMA-S2K400: WCDMA for UMTS: Guided Tour of the Physical Layer ............................................................200
CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview .........................................................................................201
CDMA-SDU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: SDU.....................................................................................202
CDMA-SWT060: Nortel MTX Overview (Web-based) ..........................................................................................203
CDMA-SWT070: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals..............................................................................................204
CDMA-SWT080: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals Advanced.............................................................................205
CDMA-SYSEV001: 1XEV-DO Operations............................................................................................................206
CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM Overview..................................................................207
CDMA-SYS110A: 1X System Administration (Unix).............................................................................................208
CDMA-SYS150: Alarm Handling and System Documentation .............................................................................209
CDMA-SYS230: CDMA RF Planning Course.......................................................................................................210
CDMA-SYS250: Optimization using SMAP ..........................................................................................................211
CDMA-SYS300: CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link...............................................................................212
CDMA-SYS330MI: Advanced Troubleshooting Workshop...................................................................................213
CDMA-SYS340MI: OMCR-BTS Troubleshooting Workshop................................................................................214
CDMA-SYS360: RAN Equipment Planning ..........................................................................................................215
CDMA-SYS370: CDMA RAN IP Planning ............................................................................................................216
CDMA-SYS401: Performance Fundamentals ......................................................................................................217
CDMA-SYS500: CDMA2000 Call Flow ................................................................................................................218
CDMA-VPU100NE: VPU Network Element Overview..........................................................................................219
CDMA-VPU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: VPU .....................................................................................220
CDMA-XC100NE: XC Network Element Overview...............................................................................................221
CDMA-XC100OM: Operations and Maintenance: XC ..........................................................................................222

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 137


CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 5 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) or
the Technical Training Direct link. 6 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview

Audience
Wireless Operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the Aggregation Node (AGNODE).

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

Course Content
This module is designed to present an overview of the AGNODE, its purpose, network location, hardware
components, interfaces/cables, CLI commands, and display outputs.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
State the purpose of the device
Locate the device on the network
Describe frame and card slot components
Explain the basic interfaces/cables for proper configuration
Recognize main OEM CLI commands
Recognize POST display output indicators
Identify LEDs display states for AGNODE modules
In this course you will learn to:
Locate the AGNODE function in the Network
Identify the XC frame components and specifications
Identify board layout on the AGNODE shelf
Describe the function of specific AGNODE card modules
Recognize the cabling interface for front to back cards
Verify the physical interfaces for AGNODE modules
Recognize OEM CLI commands
Recognize POST display output indicators
Recognize LED display states for AGNODE module

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 138


CDMA-AGN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and 4 CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically 5 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
the Aggregation Node (AGNODE). Overview

Features
An instructor-led course

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of Aggregation Node (AGNODE); event, particularly
alarm management; and device state management. This lab based course focuses on all activities required on
a daily, weekly or per shift basis according to the operating procedures of the system. Furthermore, course
content provides the first level recovery efforts prior to entering a corrective maintenance phase, as well as, the
task and/or duties required to maintain equipment or system in a healthy state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Recognized the Operations Process through AGNODE components and functions overview.
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance of Cisco commands, CLI commands and
reference documentation.
Monitor and Interpret Operations event and alarm messages using reference documentation and lab
simulations.
Implement SNMP configuration and fault management flow in a hands-on lab activity.

139 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-BTS480: SC 480 CDMA BTS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience eLearning
Personnel involved with the optimization and or
maintenance of the SC 480 Series Base CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Transceiver Subsystem (BTS). 3 Working knowledge of/experience with Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
technologies.
Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 480 Series Base Transceiver Sub-
systems (BTS). Hands on laboratory activities allow the student to perform optimization, Acceptance Test Pro-
cedures (ATPs) and troubleshooting on the SC 480 Series BTS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform optimization, ATPs and troubleshooting on the SC 480 Series BTS.
In this course you will learn to:
Describe the voice signal conversion processes that take place in a digital network
Explain Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) conversion
Describe the Code Excited Linear Predictive (CELP) technique used in the CDMA network.
Describe the transcoding and vocoding process
Describe how unique codes are applied within the CDMA network
Identify the components which make up R16.1 through R16.4.1 SuperCell Network.
Describe the physical interfaces used between the network entities
Describe simple call paths
Identify the SC 480 Series frames to include major functional areas and card/module location
Describe the function of the Interconnect Panel connectors
List the cards/modules located in the CDMA Compact Channel Processing (CCP2) Cage.
Describe the external cCLPA module
Perform BTS CCP2 Cage backplane dip switch setting verification (as required) to configure the SC 480
Series BTS
Describe the CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) in terms of functionality, interconnection, directories,
files, command usage and connectivity
Perform LMF connectivity and usage
Describe Test Equipment supported by CDMA LMF
Perform LMF ping, login/logout and MMI procedures for the SC 480 Series BTS
Describe SC 480 Series BTS optimization procedures
Perform SC 480 Series BTS optimization procedures
Describe SC 480 Series BTS Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs)
Perform Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) for the SC 480 Series BTS
Perform SC 480 Series BTS prior to leaving the site procedures
Perform SC 480 BTS fault isolation and repair procedures

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 140


CDMA-BTS610: SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)
(Trunked)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 Working knowledge of/experience with Code
Personnel involved with the optimization and Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
maintenance of the SC 4812ET Base Transceiver technologies.
Station (BTS).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides a high-level view of the network elements (NEs) that make up the Motorola CDMA network
in relationship to the BTS. The course also identifies the subsystems and functionality of the BTS within the
network. Additionally, the operation of the BTS is fully explored with hands-on lab exercises that cover all tasks
required for calibration, optimization and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs). Troubleshooting is included as
part of the class discussion as well as the lab process.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform calibration, optimization, Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) and troubleshooting on the SC4812T
Series BTS.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify SC4812T Series frames to include major functional areas.
Locate the modules within the major functional areas of the BTS and explain the function.
Discuss the CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) in terms of functionality, interconnection, directories/
files, command usage and connectivity.
Create test equipment connection and accomplish calibration.
Demonstrate LMF procedures (such as module download) for the SC4812T Series BTS.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS optimization procedures.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs).
Execute SC4812T Series BTS fault isolation and repair procedures.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS procedures prior to leaving the site.

141 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-BTS710: SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) (Trunked)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 Working knowledge of/experience with Code
Personnel involved with the optimization and Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
maintenance of the SC 4812T Base Transceiver technologies.
Station (BTS).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides a high-level view of the network elements (NEs) that make up the Motorola CDMA network
in relationship to the BTS. The course also identifies the subsystems and functionality of the BTS within the
network. Additionally, the operation of the BTS is fully explored with hands-on lab exercises that cover all tasks
required for calibration, optimization and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs). Troubleshooting is included as
part of the class discussion as well as the lab process.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform calibration, optimization, Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) and troubleshooting on the SC4812T
Series BTS.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify SC4812T Series frames to include major functional areas.
Locate the modules within the major functional areas of the BTS and explain the function.
Discuss the CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) in terms of functionality, interconnection, directories/
files, command usage and connectivity.
Create test equipment connection and accomplish calibration.
Demonstrate LMF procedures (such as module download) for the SC4812T Series BTS.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS optimization procedures.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs).
Execute SC4812T Series BTS fault isolation and repair procedures.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS procedures prior to leaving the site.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 142


CDMA-BTS780: SC 4812 Series BTS Packet Backhaul Upgrade

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience eLearning
Experienced personnel involved with the optimization 3 Knowledge of basic network administration
and maintenance of the SC 4812Series Base (including IP fundamentals)
Transceiver Station (BTS). 4 CDMA-BTS610: SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station
(CDMA) (Trunked)
or
Features CDMA-BTS710: SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station
An instructor-led course. (CDMA) (Trunked)
or
CDMA-BTS910: SC 4812T-MC BTS

Course Content
This course provides an overview of the Base Transceiver Station in relation to the implementation of packet
backhoe. Hands on laboratory activities allow the student to perform LMF Commands to the BTS router and
GLI3 card.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Download software files to the BTS router.
Perform Fast Ethernet verification from router to GLI3 card.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify the components which make up a CDMA Network.
Describe the physical interfaces used between the network entities.
Discuss simple call paths.
Identify the SC 4812 Series frames.
Locate the cards/modules located in the CDMA Channel Processing (CCP) Shelf.
Locate the possible modules located in the Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) Shelf.
Discuss the CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) in terms of functionality, interconnection, directories,
files, command usage and connectivity.
Describe the function of the BTS Router (BTSRTR).
Describe the GLI3 functional area.

143 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-BTS910: SC 4812T-MC BTS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 Days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience eLearning
Personnel involved with the optimization and 3 Knowledge of basic network administration
maintenance of the SC4812T-MC (Multi-carrier) BTS. (including IP fundamentals)
4 CDMA-BTS610: SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Station
(CDMA) (Trunked)
Features or
An instructor-led course or virtual classroom. CDMA-BTS710: SC 4812T Base Transceiver Station
(CDMA) (Trunked)

Course Content
This course provides a high-level view of the network elements (NEs) that make up the Motorola CDMA network
in relationship to the BTS. The course also identifies the subsystems and functionality of the BTS within the
network. Additionally, the operation of the BTS is fully explored with hands-on lab exercises that cover all tasks
required for calibration, optimization and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs). Troubleshooting is included as
part of the class discussion as well as the lab process.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform calibration, optimization, Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) and troubleshooting on the SC4812T
Series BTS.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify SC4812T Series frames to include major functional areas.
Locate the modules within the major functional areas of the BTS and explain the function.
Discuss the CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) in terms of functionality, interconnection, directories/
files, command usage and connectivity.
Create test equipment connection and accomplish calibration.
Demonstrate LMF procedures (such as module download) for the SC4812T Series BTS.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS optimization procedures.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs).
Execute SC4812T Series BTS fault isolation and repair procedures.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS procedures prior to leaving the site.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 144


CDMA-GNL035: 1X EV-DO Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on Knowledge of basic network administration
the Technical Training Direct link. (including IP fundamentals)
Working experience with/knowledge of CDMA
Audience technology
Working knowledge/experience with CDMA 1X
All personnel who will work with the Motorola CDMA
networks (Preferred)
1x Evolution Data Only (EV-DO) system who would CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
benefit from an overview of 1x EV-DO, its architec- eLearning
ture, functional overview, and system interaction with or
existing CDMA2000 1X network components. CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
Features
Instructor led course

Course Content
This course provides an overview of CDMA 1X Evolved Data Only (1xEV-DO) with an emphasis on the function
of 1xEV-DO, operating theory associated with 1xEV-DO, 1xEV-DO network elements and their interaction with
current CDMA 1X network elements.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the 1xEV-DO subsystem, its component and 1xEV-DO operability in the Motorola CDMA 1X
network.
In this course, you will learn to:
Identify characteristics of 1xEV-DO
Describe the 1xEV-DO system architecture
Describe 1xEV-DO subsystems to include:
BTS
CR
LSW
BSC-DO
OMC-DO
PDN
LMT
Describe 1xEV-DO system component functionality
Describe Air interfaces associated with the 1xEV-DO System
Describe call paths associated with 1xEV-DO
Describe considerations associated with the deployment of 1xEV-DO
Describe migration considerations associated with 1xEV-DO

145 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 A fundamental knowledge of digital cellular and an
the Technical Training Direct link. understanding of the basics of wireless
communications.
Audience
This course is intended for people who want an
understanding of the breadth of technical concepts
behind CDMA, as well as how CDMA fits into the
wireless industry. It will give the student an intuitive
understanding of the fundamentals of Code Division
Multiple Access (CDMA).

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide an intuitive understanding of the fundamentals of Code Division Multiple
Access (CDMA).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the pseudo-random codes, their role in CDMA systems,
Describe how they offer enhanced privacy, security, call quality, and coverage in comparison to other cellular
technologies
Explain how CDMA offers increased capacity and improved performance

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 146


CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) eLearning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 8 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
the Technical Training Direct link. 2 Working experience/knowledge of cellular systems.

Audience
Personnel who require a technical overview and
functional description of the Motorola SC Product
Family Overview (CDMA).

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course provides an overview of the SC family product describing the features and network elements of
the Motorola SC CDMA digital cellular system (including subsystems and their functions). This includes
Motorolas product migration to Third Generation Mobile Telecommunications (3G). The 3G technology provides
high-speed packet data rates (Mbps) and IP. The SC product family covers: OMC-R, AN, CBSC (MM & XC),
BTS, IWU, OMC-IP and the network components required for accessing the Internet or a company Intranet.
Additional network operations (UNO), planning (NetPlan) and optimization (SMAP) products are presented. The
course is comprised of 8 modules.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the subsystems of a Motorola SC CDMA network and describe the functionality of this architecture
In this course, you will learn to:
Identify the major and ancillary subsystems of the Motorola SCTM CDMA digital cellular system as well as the
1X IP-based architecture.
Describe the main components of a cellular network and state the different 1X BTS types.
Illustrate the major components of a CDMA2000 network, including IP-RAN, and 1X packet data, identifying
system interconnections and interfaces.

147 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-GNL120: Basic IP Fundamentals

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 None

Audience
This course is designed to give all personnel involved
in the day-to-day operations of an IP-connected
network the basic knowledge of the IP network
equipment and how they communicate.

Features
An instructor-led course

Course Content
This course has been designed to help technical personnel obtain an overview of the IP fundamentals.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Compare and contrast the OSI Model and TCP/IP Suite and their respective layers.
Identify the protocols used in the different OSI Layers.
Illustrate the basic components of an IP Network.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 148


CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 Working experience with/knowledge of Code
the Technical Training Direct link. Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology
2 Working knowledge and experience with R15
Audience (Preferred)
All personnel who will work with Motorolas 1X CDMA
release and who could benefit from an overview of 1X
architecture, connections, and call flows along with an
overview of 1X upgrade activities

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course

149 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)

Course Content
This course presents a conceptual and functional overview of Motorolas Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
1X network evolution from 16.0 through the current release. Included in this overview is a description of each
release major changes to the CDMA system architecture and Benefits offered through each release, as well as
a generic review of call flows for each release.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the key aspects in Motorolas CDMA network evolution strategy
Describe the features and benefits of each phases of Motorolas CDMA network evolution
Describe each major change to the system architectures for each release
Describe Split and Packet Backhaul
Describe the network connections for each release
Identify various call paths for each release

In this course, you will learn to:


Identify the key aspects in Motorolas CDMA network evolution strategy
Describe the benefits of the following phases of Motorolas CDMA network evolution:
cdma2000-1X (R16.0-R16.1)
cdma2000-1X (R16.3)
cdma2000-1X (R16.4)
1X EV-DO (Future)
State the objectives and benefits of the CDMA Release R16.0/R16.1.
Describe the functions of the Network Elements added in the 16.0/16.1 Architecture
Describe the features upgrades that are part of the R16.0/16.1 release
Describe Split and Packet Backhaul
Describe the features and benefits of R16.3 architecture
List the new components introduced in R16.3.
Describe the location, function, and features of new components in R16.3.
Describe the voice call path, Circuit data call path, and Packet data call paths in R16.3
List the benefits of R16.4 release
Describe the changes in the R16.4 Architecture
List the R16.4 features
Recall the R16.4 call flow
List the benefits of R16.5
Describe the changes in the R16.5 Architecture
List the R16.5 features
Recall the R16.5 call flow

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 150


CDMA-GNL138: R16.5 Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on Knowledge of basic network administration
the Technical Training Direct link. (including IP fundamentals)
Working experience with/Knowledge of Code
Audience Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology
Working knowledge and experience with R16/
All personnel who will work with the R16.4/R16.4.1
R16.1/R16.3/R16.4/R16.4.1 (Preferred)
System Release and who could benefit from an over- CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
view of R16.4/R16.4.1 architecture and features. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview

Features
Instructor led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides a high-level overview of differences associated CDMA 1X Release 16.5. It identifies
enhancements associated with the R16.5 release, provides background information and an overview of each
enhancement and details benefits of the enhancements. Other portions of the course describe R16.5 system
call flow and explain deployment considerations.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe Motorolas CDMA 1X Release and 1X network migration plan for R16.5 differences.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 151


CDMA-MLS100NE: MLS Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Wireless Operators or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the Multi-Layer Switch (MLS).

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom.

Course Content
This module is designed to present an overview of the Multi-layer Switch (MLS).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the MLS purpose and location in the network
Define the purpose of the MLS in the system
Identify the hardware components
Locate the cabling interface of the MLS in relation to other network elements
Recognize the main CLI commands
Define the software protocol of the MLS
Recognize MLS Display Output

152 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-MLS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MLS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and 4 CDMA-MLS100NE: MLS Network Element Overview
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically 5 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
the Multi-Layer Switches (MLS). Overview

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of Multilayer Switch (MLS); event, particularly alarm
management; and device state management. The hands-on lab applications included in the course focuses on
all activities required on a daily, weekly or per shift basis according to the operating procedures of the system.
Furthermore, course content provides the first level recovery efforts prior to entering a corrective maintenance
phase, as well as, the task and/or duties required to maintain equipment or system in a healthy state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Recognized the Operations Process through MLS components and functions overview.
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance of Cisco commands, CLI commands and
reference documentation.
Monitor and Interpret Operations event and alarm messages using reference documentation and lab
simulations.
Implement SNMP configuration and fault management flow in a hands-on lab activity.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 153


CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Wireless operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the MM.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

Course Content
This module is designed to present an overview of the Mobility Manager

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module the student will be able to:
Provide an overview and state the purpose of the Mobility Manager
Locate the device within the network
Identify the frame components
Recognize power on self test
Detail OEM CLI commands
Detail interconnections and cabling

154 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and 4 CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically 5 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
the Mobility Manager (MM). Personnel involved in the Overview
day-to-day operations and maintenance of a Motorola
digital network, specifically the Dual Node Puma
Mobility Manager (MM).

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of Mobility Manager (MM); event, particularly alarm
management; and device state management. The hands-on lab applications included in the course focuses on
all activities required on a daily, weekly or per shift basis according to the operating procedures of the system.
Furthermore, course content provides the first level recovery efforts prior to entering a corrective maintenance
phase, as well as, the task and/or duties required to maintain equipment or system in a healthy state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Recognize the operations process through Dual-Node Puma (DNP) MM components and functions
overview.
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance of ARSCLI commands, CLI commands and
reference documentation.
Monitor and interpret operations event and alarm messages using lab simulations and reference
documentation.
Implement device state management on the MM in a hands-on lab activity.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 155


CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM

156 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-MM117NE: MM II Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Wireless operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the Mobility Manager II (MM II).

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

Course Content
This module is designed to present an overview of the MM II being introduced into the Motorola Network. This
overview will provide a look at the MM II both physically and logically. This includes the MM II function in the
network, MM II hardware component, and MM II software architecture, CLI commands and POST indications
that will bring the MM II to operational state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the purpose and benefits of the MM II in the Motorola System. In order to fully describe that role
the student will be able to review the hardware components and specifications for the MM II, including card
slot, physical and logical interfaces and cabling interconnections, and lastly the MM II indicators of a good
software load though displays and status of the MM II network element.
In this course you will learn to:
Explain the purpose and benefits of the MMII platform.
Explain where the MM II appears in the network.
Identify the MMII hardware components and specifications.
Recognize the MMII interfaces and cabling interconnects that support proper operation of the equipment.
Recognize new / updated OMC-R CLI commands that will be introduced with the MM II.
Describe the software associated with the MM II.
Describe the MM II maintenance philosophy.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 157


CDMA-MM117NE: MM II Network Element Overview

158 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-MMG101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola Media
Gateway

Duration Practical/Lab Content


8 hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-MSSC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola
Soft Switch for CDMA
Audience
Technical personnel involved in the operations of the
MSS and the Media Gateway and who could benefit
from a description of M-MGW and its MSS-C
integration.

Features
An instructor-led course

Course Content
This course provides switch technicians and system engineers with an in-depth knowledge of the architecture
and functions the Motorola Media Gateway, along with managed objects, User Accounts, interfaces and
redundancy which will help in performing their daily operations and maintenance on the MMG. This class
includes hands-on labs to allow the class participants to gain familiarity with the GUI interface and managing
tools associated with the M-MGW.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Describe Architecture and Functionality
Review WMG_TL1 and Managed Objects
Review Tones, Announcements and User Accounts
Describe Interfaces and Redundancy
Login to MSS GUI Interface for the M-MGW
Manage the Media Gateway
Discuss Basic Troubleshooting
Describe basic Preventive Maintenance

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 159


CDMA-MSS100: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 Day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 None

Audience
Personnel wanting a technical overview of the
Motorola SoftSwitch for CDMA (MSS-C).

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with a basic understanding of the major components and subsystems of the
MSS-C switch, as well as the interaction of the subsystems.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Describe the various elements that make up the MSS-C switch including the hardware components.
Explain the interfaces employed in the MSS-C switch.
Navigate within the GUI used on the MSS-C.

160 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-MSS100A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Administration and
Provisioning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 Days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Have basic knowledge of IP technology and
experience in supporting the carriers network.
Audience 2 Be familiar with UNIX (basic commands) and have
Administration personnel involved in the configuration/ an understanding of how to establish a telnet
update of the Motorola SoftSwitch for CDMA (MSS-C). session.
3 Previous class work in VoIP would be helpful.
4 CDMA-MSS100: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Overview
Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course has been designed to assist switch technicians and system engineers in understanding the
administration and provisioning of an MSS-C switch.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Perform provisioning and configuration of the MSS-C database and its associated Media Gateway listed
below.
In this course, you will learn to;
Configure the MSS-C for operation as a serving MSC including:
Local Point Codes
Chassis Configuration
Announcement and Tones
Remote Network Elements
SS7 Ports and Links
Media Gateway Configuration
Sonus
Audio Code
MRS Media Gateway
Routing Configuration
Mobile Prefix and Number Portability
Visitor Location Register
Intergrated Home Location Register

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 161


CDMA-MSS100MI: MSS Troubleshooting

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 Days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-MSS100: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Overview
2 CDMA-MSS100A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA
Audience Administration and Provisioning
This course is designed for switch engineers and 3 CDMA-MSSC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola
technicians involved in maintenance and Soft Switch for CDMA
troubleshooting of a packet switched network, 4 CDMA-MSS200A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA
specifically the MSS-C. Translations

Features
An instructor-led course

Course Content
This course is comprised of multiple hands-on troubleshooting labs and paper-based case studies based on
real field issues. This course will cover the steps an engineer should take to deal with a particular fault, and the
preventive measures that should have been taken to possibly avoid the situation.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Troubleshoot and recover different packet switch faults implemented by the instructor. Faults include:
hardware, software, RF, call processing Case studies will be available for faults that could not be simulated in
a lab environment.
In this course you will learn to:
Duplicate the six-step method to the analysis of hardware, software and RF related faults.
Recognize trouble symptoms based on generated alarms.
Collect additional information to further define the fault.
Estimate the impact of various faults on call processing.
Isolate faulted hardware components or failed processes, based on prior analysis.
Apply corrective procedures to clear identified faults.

162 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-MSS100W: MSS-C Delta Workshop

Duration Practical/Lab Content


8 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Working knowledge and experience with MSS1.4
software platform (Preferred).
Audience
Technical personnel who will work with the MSS 2.0
System Release and who could benefit from a
description of MSS2.0 new features and
enhancements to the MSS software.

Features
Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course is identifies enhancements associated with MSS 2.0 as well as operator, administrator,
performance, and maintenance impacts to each MSS 2.0 feature.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Identify benefits of enhancements associated with the MSS2.0 release.
Describe MSS 2.0 new feature network enhancements, their requirements and related compatibility/
dependencies for operator, or administration impacts
Apply feature to TL1 or GUI application.

163 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-MSS200A: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Translations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 Days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Have basic knowledge of IP technology and
experience in supporting the carriers network.
Audience 2 Be familiar with UNIX (basic commands) and have
Administration personnel involved in the translations an understanding of how to establish a telnet
of a Motorola packet-based switch network, session.
specifically the Motorola SoftSwitch for CDMA (MSS- 3 Previous class work in VoIP would be helpful.
C). 4 Knowledge of PERL expressions would be helpful.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course has been designed to assist technicians and system engineers in performing the translations
functions of an MSS-C switch.
In order to perform these tasks the course will cover a number of topics which includes;
Overview of the MSS-C translations on the MSS-C system,
Sequence/flow of database tables found on the MSS-C switch,
The use of PERL expressions in the MSS-C translations,
Selecting variables used in the translations process on the MSS-C,
Translation of dialed digits in both a mobile and land originated call using the translations tables to determine
the proper trunk group routing listing and character string to outpulse for the various call delivery types
supported by the MSS-C switch.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Modify an existing translator.
Perform translations of dialed digits from an ANSI-41 and non-ANSI-41subscriber, in a mobile-to-land and
mobile-to-mobile call and determine routing and out-pulsing of digits or page to complete the call.
Perform translations of dialed digits from an in a land-to-mobile call and determine routing and out-pulsing of
digits or page to complete the call.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 164


CDMA-MSSC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola Soft
Switch for CDMA

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 Days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Have basic knowledge of IP technology and
experience in supporting the carriers network.
Audience 2 Be familiar with Unix (basic commands) and have
Operations personnel involved in the day-to-day an understanding of how to establish a telnet
operations and maintenance of a Motorola packet- session.
based switch network, specifically the Motorola 3 Previous class work in VoIP is recommended.
SoftSwitch for CDMA (MSS-C). 4 CDMA-MSS100: Motorola Soft Switch for CDMA Overview

Features
An instructor-led course

Course Content
This course provides operators with an in depth understanding of the major components and subsystems of the
MMS-C platform, as will as the interaction of the subsystems. Included are tasks related to the daily operation
and maintenance of the MSS-C switch. This class includes hands-on labs to allow the class participants to gain
familiarity with the MSS GUI as well as the CLI. (Provided terminals are available with connectivity to network).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Describe the various elements of the MSS-C and their function.
Explain the interconnectivity between the various elements of the MSS-C.
Demonstrate how to interface with the MSS-C using various methods.
Monitor Control Chassis and Gateway Alarm/Fault management indicators.
Analyze the call processing subsystem.
Describe the billing /accounting functions.
Demonstrate maintenance activities.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 165


CDMA-NET400A: 1X Network Administration (Unix)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview
2 CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview
Audience 3 CDMA-XC100NE: XC Network Element Overview
This course was designed for the following individuals 4 CDMA-MLS100NE: MLS Network Element Overview
Cellular System Engineers/Technicians Cellular 5 CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview
Network Administrators. 6 CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview
7 CDMA-SYS110A: 1X System Administration (Unix)
8 CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration
Features 9 Basic IP networking skills
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides technical personnel with the skills to maintain and administer the communications between
the Unix/Solaris based Network Elements in a 1X SC system. The Network Elements to be covered will be Sun
OMCR, Puma MM, XC, OMCIP Cisco WAN Manager and OMCIP Works 2000.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the different Network types in the 1X SC System.
Describe the different IP networking protocols and their implementation.
Discuss basic IP Planning with regards to the SC Network.
Configure the Unix/Solaris based Network Elements (OMC-R, MM, XC, OMC-IP) for intra- and inter-AN
communications.
Explain these configurations to the level of primary troubleshooting of connection issues.
Configure and verify Network Time Protocol (NTP) in the SC Network.
Configure and enable Domain Name Service (DNS) in the SC Network.

166 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-NET500A: SC Cisco Network Administration

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL120: Basic IP Fundamentals
2 CDMA-NET400A: 1X Network Administration (Unix)
Audience 3 CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration
This course was designed for the following individuals; 4 CDMA-OMCR120A: pBTS-OMCR Database Administration
Cellular System Engineers/Technicians, Cellular 5 CDMA-MLS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MLS
Network Engineers/Technicians, and Cellular Network 6 CDMA-AGN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: AGNODE
Administrators. 7 CDMA-OMCP100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMC-IP

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course was developed to assist the Cellular Network Administrator of the Cisco Networking devices in the
Motorola Access Network (AN). This includes the Multilayer Switch (MLS), Aggregation Node (AGNODE), Edge
Router (EDGERTR), and BTS Router (BTSRTR). This course concentrates on configuration management and
explains in detail the configuration files developed by the OMC-R for the AN devices. Other configuration
considerations are discussed such as deployment of Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) between ANs and other
configuration considerations not configured by the OMC-R. Where appropriate, AN Tools scripts for
configuration verification and Backhaul monitoring are discussed.

Course Objective
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Manage the configuration files of the Cisco devices in the SC network.
Describe the sections of the OMC-R configuration files for SC Cisco networking devices.
Use AN Tools to verify configurations and basic status.
Describe the steps to configure the MLS for AN to AN communications using BGP.
In this course the student will learn to:
Describe the Cisco devices under configuration control of the OMCRs Management Information Base (MIB).
List and perform the commands associated with Cisco device file management in the OMCRs CLI.
List the files the OMCR develops for Cisco devices, and their location on the OMCR or OMCIP.
Describe the file management of the Cisco devices in the SC Network
Examine the OMCRs MLS configuration file.
Display the configuration files of the MLS on the CW4MW.
Compare configuration files of the MLS on the CW4MW.
Examine EDGERTR configuration data from the OMCIP MWC.
Manage EDGERTR configuration files via the CW4MW.
Backup and restore the configuration from the AGNODE to the OMCIP CWM
Describe the difference between 16.0 and 16.1 configuration considerations for the AGNODE, EDGERTR,
and BTSRTR.
Describe the procedure for provisioning the AGNODE, EDGERTR, and BTSRTR using the Mobile Wireless
Center (MWC).
Describe the different topologies of a large, medium, and small MTSO.
Define the protocols used inside and outside the AN.
Describe the configuration of the routing protocols of the AN.
Describe the commands necessary to configure communications between two small-MTSO ANs using BGP.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 167


CDMA-NETRA104NE: Netra 20 Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 None

Audience
Wireless operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the Netra 20.

Features
An instructor-led course or virtual classroom.

Course Content
This self-paced eLearning course provides a detailed view of the Sun Netra 20 server, which will become
standard in SMAP, OMC-IP, OMC-R, and UNO platforms starting from the 16.1.1. release. The course will
include differences, benefits, hardware components, specification, interfaces and Power-on-Self Test (POST)
from multiple platforms and generic view.

Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:


Describe the Netra 20 Server differences for the SMAP, OMC-IP, OMC-R, and UNO platforms
Identify the Netra 20 Server benefits for each platform
Identify the Netra 20 hardware components and specifications for each platform
Describe the Netra 20 interfaces for each platform
Define the POST indications for the Netra 20
In this course you will learn to:
Define Netra 20 benefits and transition into the network
Identify the Netra 20 Server differences for the SMAP, OMC-IP, OMC-R, and UNO platforms
Identify the Netra 20 hardware components and specifications, including CPU and storage, standard
interfaces, power, software, and environmental considerations
Compare the Netra 20 OMC-IP, OMC-R, UNO, SMAP platform components similarities and differences
Describe the Netra 20 interfaces from a generic view and for the SMAP, OMC-IP, OMC-R and UNO platforms
Identify the LED status including the LOMLite2
Define the POST that indicate the Netra 20 is in an operational state
Describe the Sun VTS Diagnostic test functionality
List the OEM commands including OBP, LOM, UNIX

168 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-NETRA440NE: Netra 440 Network Element
Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 None

Audience
Wireless operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the Netra 440.

Features
An instructor-led course or virtual classroom.

Course Content
This self-paced eLearning course provides a detailed view of the Sun Netra 440 server, which will become
standard platform starting from the 16.5 release. The course will include differences, benefits, hardware
components, specification, interfaces and Power-on-Self Test (POST).

Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:


Describe the function and roles of the Netra440 in the Motorola System. In order to fully describe that role
the student will be able to review the hardware components
In this course you will learn to:
State the Netra440 function and role in the Motorola system.
Identify the Netra440 hardware components and specifications
Identify the Netra440 card slots
Recognize the Netra440 interfaces and cabling interconnects that support proper operation of the equipment
Recognize new / updated OEM commands that will be introduced in the Netra440
Recognize Netra440 displays generated from a good software load.
Classify the various critical outputs of the POST (Power on Self Test) from a properly operating Netra440 that
has been fully loaded with all software.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 169


CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
the Technical Training Direct link. 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Audience
Wireless operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the OMC-IP and work with the Ultra
60 and/or Ultra 450 platform.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

Course Content
This self-paced eLearning module provides a overview of the OMC-IP in the Network and its functions. Also,
covered is OMC-IP hardware, software, and interfaces specifications prior to 16.1.1. This course will also
present an overview of product roadmap for the future Cisco platforms.
Note: If you anticipate working with an OMC-P after release 16.1.1 review the course description for
OMCP104NE which will cover the Netra 20, CWM, and CW4MW in further detail.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Provide an overview of the OMC-IP.
State the purpose/functionality of the OMC-IP.
Locate the device in the network.
Describe the software components.
Describe the hardware components, which includes the Ultra 60 and Ultra 450.
Describe the 16.1 Product Roadmap.

170 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-OMCP104NE: OMC-IP with Netra 20 Network
Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience
Wireless operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the OMC-IP with Netra 20.

Features
An instructor-led course or virtual classroom.

Course Content
This self-paced eLearning module provides a overview of the OMC-IP from a system perspective, including the
OMC-IP functions and purpose, and theOMC-IP location in the network in relationship to other network
elements. The module will also provide a close-up view of the device, by providing a look at the hardware
specifications including the Netra 20 that was introduced in the 16.1.1 system release, and the software and
interface specifications. Also covered is the Power-on Self Test (POST), which will illustrate LEDs in the device.

Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:


State the purpose/functionality of the OMC-IP.
Locate the device in the network.
Describe the software components.
Describe the hardware components, which includes the Netra 20 sever introduced in the 16.1.1 release.
OMC-R and OMC-IP related commands being introduced.
Define the POST indications for the OMC-IP.
Define LEDs indicators located on the Netra 20.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 171


CDMA-OMCP100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMC-IP

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience or
Network operators responsible for the operations of CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Cisco and Switch Networks, specifically the eLearning
AGNODE and MLS. 3 CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview
4 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
Overview
Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of Operations and Maintenance Center - Internet
Protocol (OMC-IP); navigation of Cisco Works for Mobile Wireless (CW4MW), Cisco WAN Manager (CWM),
and Cisco Mobile Wireless Center (MWC) GUI.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Recognize the operations process through OMC-IP components and functions overview.
Navigate the CW4MW, CWM, and MWC GUI features to graphically display communication paths.
Monitor the Cisco device configurations in a network.
Track changes to the device configurations in the network.
Monitor and interpret operations event and alarm messages using lab simulations and reference
documentation.

172 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
the Technical Training Direct link. 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Audience
Wireless operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the OMC-R.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

Course Content

This module is designed to present an overview of the OMC-R in the Network and its function. This course will
also cover OMC-R hardware, software, interface specifications. This course will also present an overview of the
Power-on Self Test (POST) for the OMC-R.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify how the OMCR fits into the network.
Describe the purpose of the OMCR in the R16 network.
Identify hardware and software components, which includes the Sun E4500 processor.
Identify cabling and how it relates to other devices.
Describe Power on Self Test.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 173


CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
Audience CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
CDMA System Operators, Cellular Network 2 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
Administrators and System Administrators and other 3 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
technical personnel responsible for performing basic 4 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
administration at the CBSC, OMC-R and OMC-IP. 5 GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
6 Working knowledge of/or experience with Code
Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
Features technologies.
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide technical personnel the necessary skills needed to create a 1X
Cellular Network in the OMCR database. Motorola specific commands that support building out the database
that runs the on-line system will be used. Tasks that support the cellular database administrative procedures will
be covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform cellular database administration procedures for 1X devices.
In this course the student will learn to:
Execute MIB backup procedures using export MIB.
Execute MIB backup to DAT tape procedures.
Perform procedures to drop a MIB.
Perform procedures to generate data files for the network elements.
Perform installation and validation of CDF/CFG files.
Perform initialization of the MM and the activation of the XC.
Perform procedures to import a MIB to the Sun OMC-R.
Perform Access Network configuration procedures.
Perform 1X database procedures for CBSC setup.
Create a 1X Transcoder in the database.
Create 1X BTS in the database.
Add terrestrial circuits to the CBSC.

174 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and Overview
maintenance of a Motorola digital network utilizing the 4 CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview
Sun Operations and Maintenance Center Radio
(OMC-R).

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of Operations and Maintenance Center - Radio
(OMC-R); OEM and CLI commands for operations and maintenance.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Recognize the operations process through OMC-R components and functions overview
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance Sun-based OMC-R OEM, CLI commands and
reference documentation
Monitor the and interpret MIB database management, CDL log files, processor and disk utilization, and
configuration files audit using lab simulations and reference documentation
Implement device state management on the OMC-R in a hands-on lab activity.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 175


CDMA-OMCR104NE: OMCR with Netra 20 Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours self paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience
Wireless operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the OMC-R.

Features
e-learning.

Course Content
This self-paced eLearning module provides an overview of the OMC-R from a system perspective, including the
OMC-R functions and purpose, and the OMC-R location in the network in relationship to other network
elements. The module will also provide a close-up view of the device, by providing a look at the hardware
specifications including the Netra 20 that was introduced in the 16.1.1 system release and the software and
interface specifications. Also, covered is the Power-on Self Test (POST), which will illustrate LEDs in the device.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify how the OMCR fits into the network.
Describe the purpose of the OMCR in the R16.3 network.
Identify hardware and software components, which includes the Sun Netra 20 processor.
Identify cabling and how it relates to other devices.
Describe Power on Self Test.
Identify the LEDs in the device.

176 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-OMCR110A: SDU-OMCR Database Administration

Technical

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day instructor led or two 4 hour interwise sessions Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
Audience CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
CDMA System Operators, Cellular Network 2 CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview
Administrators and System Administrators and other 3 CDMA-SDU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: SDU
technical personnel responsible for performing basic 4 CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration
administration at the CBSC, OMC-R and OMC-IP.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide technical personnel the necessary skills needed to provision a SDU
in the OMCR database. Motorola specific commands that support building out the database that runs the on-line
system will be used. Tasks that support the cellular database administrative procedures will be covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Configure the SDU in the OMCR database.
In this course you will learn to:
Describe the SDU in the Network and its functions.
Configure the SDU in the OMCR database.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 177


CDMA-OMCR120A: pBTS-OMCR Database Administration

Technical

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
or
Audience CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
CDMA System Operators, Cellular Network 2 CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals
Administrators and System Administrators and other 3 CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration
technical personnel responsible for performing basic
administration at the CBSC, OMC-R and OMC-IP.

Features
An instructor-led course

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide technical personnel the necessary skills needed to provision a pBTS
in the OMCR database and to migrate a Circuit BTS to a Packet BTS. Motorola specific commands that support
building out the database that runs the on-line system will be used. Tasks that support the cellular database
administrative procedures will be covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Configure the pBTS in the OMCR database.
Migrate Circuit BTS to Packet BTS.
In this course you will learn to:
Describe the pBTS in the Network and its functions.
Describe new GLI3 cards.
Configure the pBTS in the OMCR database.
Migrate Circuit BTS to Packet BTS

178 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-OMCR140A: VPU-OMCR Database Administration

Technical

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL134: R16.3 Overview
or
Audience CDMA-VPU100NE: VPU Network Element Overview
CDMA System Operators, Cellular Network 2 CDMA-VPU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: VPU
Administrators and System Administrators and other 3 CDMA-OMCR100A : 1X Cellular Database Administration
technical personnel responsible for performing basic
administration at the CBSC, OMC-R and OMC-IP.

Features
An instructor-led course

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide technical personnel the necessary skills needed to provision a VPU
in the OMCR database. Motorola specific commands that support building out the database that runs the on-line
system will be used. Tasks that support the cellular database administrative procedures will be covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Configure the VPU in the OMCR database.
VPU Planning: Identify connections and associations; Determine VPU Parameters.
VPU System Setup: Provision VPU, links and spans, Edit VPU profile and parameters.
VPU Installation: Install VPU Platform; Verify VPU connections.
VPU Cut-into-Service: Cutover and unlock VPU; Generate VPU Datafiles; SPROC commissioning.
In this course you will learn to:
Plan the steps for provisioning a VPU.
Plan and commission a VPU in a 16.3 network.
Cut a VPU into Service.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 179


CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, virtual Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
classroom, or other premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview

Audience
CBSC, OMC-R, and pBTS personnel who want to
have the detailed knowledge of pBTS functions from
the CBSC perspective.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom.

Course Content
This course provides operators with an overview of the packet Base Transceiver Station (pBTS) and BTS router.
Common Network Element Operations and Maintenance Interface (CNEOMI); packet backhaul concept,
transport protocols and capture tools; resource management and allocation; and network management and call
flow will be discussed. Circuit backhaul has dedicated bandwidth allocated for each channel element so that the
capacity is pre-allocated. Packet backhaul is IP-based and improves the backhaul efficiency by using
compression and muxing techniques, partial span flexibility, daisy chain configurations with other pBTS to
enable greater span utilization.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this Module the student will be able to:
Identify the pBTS components and the BTS Router.
State the functions of the pBTS components and the BTS Router.
Define the CNEOMI platform and how it relates to the pBTS.
Detail the packet backhaul concept, transport protocols and capture tools.
Describe resource management and allocation.
Describe network management and call flow.

180 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-pBTS101OM: Operations and Maintenance: pBTS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview

Audience
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and
maintenance of a Motorola digital network.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
classroom.

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of packet Base Transceiver Station (pBTS) and BTS
router; event, particularly alarm management; device state management; configuration management; and
software load management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this Module the student will be able to:
Recognized the Operations Process through pBTS components, BTS router and functions overview.
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance of CLI commands and reference
documentation.
Monitor and Interpret Operations event and alarm messages using reference documentation and lab
simulations.
Implement device state and configuration management in a hands-on lab activity.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 181


CDMA-PDSN100NE: PDSN Cisco Network Element
Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
The audience for the 3 Com PDSN Network Element
Overview is wireless operators and other personnel
who require a technical view of the PDSN. This
overview will provide a look at the PDSN both
physically and logically. This includes the PDSN
function in the network, PDSN hardware component,
and PDSN software architecture, OEM commands
and post indications that will bring the PDSN to
operational state.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

Course Content
This self-paced module is designed to present an physical and logical overviews of the 3Com Packet Data
Service Node. It includes PDSN functionality in the R16.0, 16.1 and 16.3s Networks, hardware components and
the software architecture. In addition, OEM commands and post indications that will bring the PDSN to
operational state will be covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Describe the PDSN, its functions and the relationship with other network elements in the Network.
Describe PDSN components.
Describe 3 Com PDSN configuration and Power-On Self Test (POST).
Describe the Comworks Element Manager and Media Gateway Manager.
In this course you will learn to:
Define PDSN benefits and transition into the network
Identify the PDSN 3 Com hardware components and specifications, including CPU and storage, standard
interfaces, power, software, and environmental considerations
Describe the PDSN 3Comm interfaces
Identify the LED status
Define the POST that indicate the 3 Com PDSN is in an operational state
List the OEM commands including OBP, LOM, UNIX

182 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-PDSN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: Cisco
PDSN

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience or
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically eLearning
the Cisco PDSN. 3 CDMA-PDSN100NE: PDSN Cisco Network Element Overview
4 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
Overview
Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of Packet Data Service Node (PDSN); event,
particularly alarm management; and device state management. This lab based course focuses on all activities
required on a daily, weekly or per shift basis according to the operating procedures of the system. Furthermore,
course content provides the first level recovery efforts prior to entering a corrective maintenance phase, as well
as, the task and/or duties required to maintain equipment or system in a healthy state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Recognize the operations process through PDSN components and functions overview.
Explain simple IP and Mobile IP operations.
Describe PDSN cluster and redundancy.
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance of Cisco commands, CLI commands and
reference documentation.
Monitor and interpret operations event and alarm messages using lab simulations and reference
documentation.
Implement device state management and fault management in a hands-on lab activity.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 183


CDMA-PDSN101NE: PDSN 3Com Network Element
Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


6 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
the Technical Training Direct link. 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
or
Audience CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
eLearning
Wireless Operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the 3Com PDSN.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

Course Content
This module is designed to present an overview of the 3Com PDSN. This overview will provide a look at the
PDSN both physically and logically. This includes the PDSN function in the network, PDSN hardware
component, and PDSN software architecture, OEM command and post indications that will bring the PDSN to
operational state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Describe where PDSN appears in the network and the PDSN functions.
Identify the TC1000 chassis and card locations, specifications and functions.
Identify the critical references for the chassis power supply, and NIC, NAC, cabling.
Describe both Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) Server and Home Agent (HA)
relationship PDSN.
Identify the parameters involved in the configuration of the PDSN 3Com using CLI, CEM, and Gateway
interface.
Identify the Power-On Self Test indications for a working PDSN
Describe functionality of the Comworks Element Manager and review the CEM various elements and
parameters, as well as describe functionality of the Media Gateway Manager.
Identify the new CLI commands being introduced with the PDSN 16.0 and 16.1 release.

184 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-PDSN200OM: Operations and Maintenance: 3Com
PDSN

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience or
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically eLearning
the 3Com PDSN. 3 CDMA-PDSN100NE: PDSN Cisco Network Element Overview
4 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
Overview
Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This module provides operators with product knowledge on the 3Com PDSN and hands-on experience in their
critical on-site tasks relating to the 3Com PDSN.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Describe how the 3Com PDSN hardware fits into the G16.0 System Architecture.
Describe the basic hardware components of the 3Com Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN).
Navigate and operate the Total Control Manager (TCM).
Navigate and operate the Media Gateway Manager (MGM).
Utilize the PDSN to monitor system activity data for the PPP and RADIUS.
Set SNMP traps to capture alarms. Interpret alarms.
Generate PDSN logs and interpret.
Gather operating statistics.
Perform network management using TCM, UNO and CLI.
Monitor 3Com PDSN alarms.
Perform Device State Management on the 3Com PDSN.
Identify new 1X alarms that impact the 3Com PDSN.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 185


CDMA-PER040: IMS: IP Multimedia Subsystem Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 hours No

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 PoC100: Push-to-Talk over Cellular Overview
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking a detailed
understanding of IMS, its features, and capabilities.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

186 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-PER040: IMS: IP Multimedia Subsystem Overview

Course Content
This course details the IMS architecture, services, and technology. This includes the transition from circuit/
packet switch network to 3G IMS network as well as the hardware and software components in the IMS Server.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the 3G network architectures for packet switched and circuit switched services
Describe the basic sequence of operations to establish packet switched services in a 3G network
Detail the transition from circuit/packet switched service oriented networks to 3G IP Multimedia Subsystem
(IMS) networks.
Analyze the IP Multimedia Subsystem architecture
Illustrate the IMS network components and their functions
Walk through the different steps involved in setting up an IMS service session
Describe the message flow sequence for setting up and releasing an IMS session
Describe the steps executed at different IMS network components during session setup and release
List the different groups of services that may be offered under the umbrella of IMS
Describe Motorola's IMS Server and its place in the 3G IMS architecture
Describe different hardware and software components in Motorola's IMS Server
Illustrate a simple IMS call flow using Motorola's product based network architecture
In this course you will learn to:
Learn about the 3G network architecture
Describe the high level packet data operations in a 3G network
Learn about the 3G circuit switched and packet switched domain architecture
Describe the motivation to converge the packet and circuit switched domains in 3G network evolution
Express the basic IMS concepts, architecture and its relation to SIP networks
Discuss the overall architecture of the IMS network
Describe the functions supported by each node in the IMS network
Explain the interfaces between nodes in the IMS network and the protocols used across each of those
interfaces
Explain the sequence of steps involved in setting up an IMS service session
Describe the signalling path when a mobile station sends out a SIP session request to another mobile station
in the IMS network
Summarize the role of different nodes in the IMS network with respect to signalling
Identify the key application and service groups supported by IMS networks
Describe some services in each key group of services
Explain the functions supported by the Motorola IMS server
Learn about the MSS configuration options
Describe where different IMS functions such as CSCF are implemented in Motorola's IMS Server

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 187


CDMA-PER220: Message Register (MR)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
Audience CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
Personnel involved with the operation and and
maintenance of the Motorola Message Register. CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)
and
CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
Features 2 CDMA-PER640: S-Series Fundamentals
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom.

Course Content
This course has been designed to help technical personnel to operate the Motorola Message Register, perform
database updates, and complete routine maintenance tasks.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Operate the Motorola Message Register, perform database updates, and complete routine maintenance
tasks.
In this course, you will learn to:
Use and maintain database screens and command line mode utility.
Identify the MR Process Description records, MR Assign records and Parameter records.
Determine MR-EMX switch link status.
Configure Intelligent Peripheral Devices (IPD)/Voice Mail Boxes.
Use the CWS to display ERADS, then interpret them.
Interpret alarms, then identify repair procedures.
Conduct alarm/ERAD-specific searches.
Identify the MR statistics and related registers and messages.
Use the report-generating utility.
Configure SS7/C7 links.
Verify that SS7 links are operational.
Decode the three types of signaling units.
Describe the Over the Air Activation Feature and use the associated tools and utilities.

188 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-PER235: SMS Gateway Server

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1day Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
other premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-PER640: S-Series Fundamentals
2 CDMA-PER220: Message Register (MR)
Audience
Operators involved with the day to day operations of
the message register

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides training on the Motorola SMS Gateway server application for the Compaq's Himalaya S-
Series Servers which provides short message routing services using TCP/IP-based SMPP Protocol. This
course provides hands-on training in the operation of the SMS Gateway

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Configure and maintain the SMS Gateway

In this course, you will learn to:


Configure and operate the user friendly SMS Gateway web interface

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 189


CDMA-PER240: OMC-IP SYSLOG Analysis

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 None

Audience
Engineers who utilizing the Cisco SYSLOG tool to
analyze Cisco router performance and troubleshoot
issues indicated by system error messages

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is designed to assist personnel in routine log based troubleshooting of Cisco devices using the
Syslog Analysis OMC-IP application (a component of CW4MW).

This workshop provides an overview of the Syslog Analysis OMC-IP application and the process of collecting
alerts and messages from Cisco devices to the CW4MW server. This course will also provide practice in
monitoring Syslog central logs and system error messages along with learning to analyze the daily Syslog
central logs and system error message in order to identify potential problems that may occur in the network.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Learn how to use Syslog Analysis
Create new custom reports
Utilize Syslog analysis for daily monitoring of the network devices

In this course, you will learn to:


Identify Syslog Messages, Flow, Daemon, Message Structure, and facility codes
Create Useful Syslog Reports
Define Custom Reports

190 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-PER250: System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
People involved in the analysis and day-to-day 4 GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
monitoring of CDMA call processing activity. Recommended Courses:
5 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
Features or
CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
An instructor-led course.
6 CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
7 Familiarity with IS-95 A/B and IS-2000 Messages

Course Content
This course is designed to familiarize students with SMAP operational features and configuration menus and
displays. SMAP is a real-time data collection, logging, and display tool that gathers call processing and physical
layer information from the CBSC and BTS. This course provides students with hands-on training in the setup
and use of SMAP to monitor call processing for effective diagnosis and troubleshooting of system malfunctions.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Use SMAP as a system monitoring and diagnostic tool.
In this course, you will learn to:
Invoke SMAP.
Identify the main screen displays of SMAP.
Select required supporting files for the operation of SMAP.
Modify and create a configuration file.
Monitor call activity for diagnosis and troubleshooting.
Replay call activity using log files.
Gather data from various components of the SC architecture upon user demand.

191 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-PER450: UNO Element Manager

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
Personnel involved with the day to day operation of a 4 GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
Motorola digital network.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides hands-on training on the use of the UNO Element Manager. An UNO Element Manager
(UNO_EM) is designed to replace one SC-UNO/AP, and can run on the same (or slightly upgraded)
hardware. An UNO Element Manager (EM) provides AP/SC UNO equivalent features. It is sized for connection
to a single OMC-R only. This course provides hands-on training on the use of the UNO Element Manager

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Manage a Motorola digital network, using the UNO Element Manager.
In this course, you will learn to:
Explain the purpose and features of the UNO Manager.
Describe the standards and protocols used by UNO.
Launch the UNO Application Launcher.
Navigate and use UNO Help screens.
Manage a Motorola digital network, using the Command Center.
Setup cell groups, cell names, cell types, and toy cells in the Command Center.
Create an alarm filter to be used with the Alarm Manager and Alarm Browser.
Use the Alarm Manager to acknowledge and clear an alarm, view alarm details, and zoom into the
Command Center.
Schedule and display Performance Management Reports.
Create a device independent performance measurement threshold.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 192


CDMA-PER460: UNO Market Manager

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
Personnel involved with the day to day operation of a 4 GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
Motorola digital network. 5 CDMA-PER450: UNO Element Manager

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is designed to communicate with several agents simultaneously. Besides providing the features of
an Element Manager, a Market Manager has additional features and options available to the UNO user. This
course provides hands-on training on the use of the UNO Market Manager.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Manage a Motorola digital network with multiple agents, using the UNO Market Manager.
In this course, you will learn to:
Explain the purpose and features of the UNO Market Manager.
Run RFDS tests from the Command Center.
Explain the UNO RFDS applications and prerequisites.
Create RFDS Test Requests.
Launch and navigate User Defined Alarms application.
Create a Translation Rule, a Relay Definition, and a Deleted Alarm Rule.
Launch and navigate the Software Download Manager, view available software versions, and create and
view Software Download Reports.
Launch and navigate the Remedy ARS application.
List ways to open a trouble ticket, create a trouble ticket, then close it.
Create defaults for, and customize the Help Desk schema.
Create an UNO user.
Send a test TelAlert message.
Launch and navigate the CBSC Processor Utilization tool, and then create reports using the CBSC
Processor Utilization tool.
Launch and navigate the CFC Monitoring tool and then create reports using the CFC Monitoring tool.
Launch and navigate the PM Statistics Graphs tool and then create reports using the PM Statistics Graphs
tool.
Define measures for long-term storage using the UDM screens.
Add manager to Large Scale Manager (LSM) System configuration.
Create, modify, and manage Large Scale filters.
Connect to multiple UNO hosts.
Retrieve alarm information via the internet.
Activate Central Alarm Acknowledgement.
Synchronize all alarms.
Launch and navigate ArcView GIS.

193 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-PER500: Access Network Tools

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL120: Basic IP Fundamentals
2 CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview
Audience 3 CDMA-AGN100NE: AGNODE Network Element Overview
Operators, AN Maintenance Technicians, 4 Optional: CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul
Troubleshooters, BTS Technicians, System Fundamentals
Administrators who are responsible for Access
Network (MLS, EDGERTR, AGNODE, BTSRTR)
Operation and Maintenance.

Features
An instructor-led course or virtual classroom.

Course Content
This course introduces the set of Access Network Tools. These tools are designed for day-to-day operations
monitoring and maintaining of the Packet Backhaul. The tool set includes functions such as Packet Backhaul
Span Outage Reports (current and historical); RALINK outage reports; Span Configuration reports; MLS,
EDGERTR and BTSRTR Configuration Verification; and Long Outage Detection and Paging.
Note: It is desirable (but not required) for students to install the AN Tools scripts locally on their system. This
allows the student to execute the scripts locally on their system at the same time the instructor is executing them
on the TIPS lab system. Contact a Motorola Account Team member to obtain the AN Tools scripts.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Monitor and Maintain Packet Backhaul Spans using the Access Network Tools.
In this course, you will learn to:
Gather and verify general configuration information.
Describe the flow of the data supporting the tools reports.
Verify that all configured Spans are actively carrying data.
Display link quality information for a Span.
Create a report (including Availability %) of Span Outages for a given time period.
Perform a simple, automated Root Cause Analysis of Span Outages.
Verify MLS, EDGERTR, and BTS Router Configurations against the OMC-R MIB/MWC MIB and against
Golden configurations.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 194


CDMA-PoC100: Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC) Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Attendees are excepted to have a basic knowledge of IP
technology and experience in supporting the carriers network.
Audience
Personnel wanting a technical overview of a Motorola
packet-based switch network, specifically the Push-
To-Talk over Cellular (PoC) Application Server.

Features
Virtual Classroom.

Course Content
This course provides operators with an in depth understanding of the major components and subsystems of the
PoC platform, as well as the interaction of the subsystems.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the various elements of the PoC Hardware Architecture.
Explain the interconnectivity and IP Protocols needed of the PoC server.
Detail the PoC Mobile Operating System (MOBIOS).
Interpret Call processing.
Describe the EMS Software Architecture.

195 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-PoC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Push To Talk

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 Days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement.
Attendees are expected to have a basic knowledge of
IP technology and experience in supporting the car-
Audience riers network. Attendees should also be familiar with
Operations personnel involved in the day-to-day oper- Unix (basic commands) and have an understanding of
ations and maintenance of a Motorola packet-based how to establish a telnet session. Some previous class
switch network, specifically the Motorola Push-to-Talk work in VoIP / SIP would be helpful.
over Cellular (PoC) Server.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with an in depth understanding of the major components and subsystems of the
PoC platform, as well as the interaction of the subsystems. Included are tasks related to the daily operation and
maintenance of the PoC server. This class will include hands-on labs via the GUI and TL1 to allow the class par-
ticipants to gain familiarity with the PoC application (provided terminals are available with connectivity to net-
work).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Describe the various elements of the PoC Hardware Architecture.
Explain the interconnectivity and IP Protocols needed of the PoC server.
Detail the PoC Mobile Operation System (MOBIOS).
Monitor Alarm/Fault/Performance/Security Management indicators.
Analyze call processing subsystem.
Configure and Operate the PoC Control Switch and Active Directories.
Describe preventative maintenance activities needed of the PoC server.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 196


CDMA-REL164: R16.4/R16.4.1 Delta Workshop

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on Knowledge of basic network administration
the Technical Training Direct link. (including IP fundamentals)
Working experience with Knowledge of CDMA
Audience technology
Working knowledge and experience with R16,
Technical personnel who will work with the R16.4/
R16.1, R16.2, R16.3 (Preferred)
R16.4.1 System Release and who could benefit from a CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
description of R16.4/R16.4.1 enhancements and the CDMA-GNL136: R16.4/R16.4.1 Overview
network architecture.

Features
Instructor led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course is designed to help technical personnel identify enhancements and Network Elements associated
with 16.4/16.4.1. It compares 16.3 and 16.4/16.4.1 Network Elements and identifies specific requirements, com-
patibility issues, dependencies associated with software, hardware and/or mobiles. The course examines the
benefits of dynamic multi-carrier PA control and the BBX to PA relationship. Low capacity intergrated router,
Evolved Data Only (EV-DO) for circuit and packet BTSs, associated network elements, and support for Cisco
Network Elements are presented. Another portion of the course addresses the SC 480 microcite BTS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify benefits of the enhancements associated with the R16.4/16.4.1 Release.
Describe 16.4/16.4.1 network enhancements, their requirements and related compatibility/dependencies for
software and hardware.

197 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-REL165: R16.5 Delta Workshop

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. Knowledge of basic network administration
(including IP fundamentals)
Audience Working experience with Knowledge of CDMA
Technical personnel who will work with the R16.5 technology
System Release and who could benefit from a Working knowledge and experience with R16,
description of R16.5 enhancements and the network R16.1, R16.2, R16.3 (Preferred)
architecture. CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
CDMA-GNL136: R16.4/R16.4.1 Overview
Features
Instructor led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course is designed to help technical personnel identify enhancements and Network Elements associated
with R16.5. It compares R 16.4/16.4.1and R16.5 Network Elements and identifies specific requirements,
compatibility issues and dependencies associated with software, hardware and/or mobiles. The course
examines the benefits of software based idle mobile hard handoff support; increased call success rates through
dual band overflow and dual band overflow verification; Short Message Service (SMS) smart paging and
associated privacy protection; implementation of location based services; the capability to run OMC-IP software
on two hardware platforms; and the introduction of new services and improved performance including always on
(IS-835B)and prepaid data support. Also, software associated with the release incorporates easier integration of
new applications, push type data services, 1X authentication and billing. Hardware improves performance by
implementing the 1.9 GHz SC 480 BTS, Sun Netra 440 Platform, new AN IP MLS Chassis and Cards and a 4-
Way Puma CPU upgrade. 1xEV-DO hardware and software enhancements associated with the release include
introduction of the 1.9 GHz SC 480 BTS, cdma2000 1xEV-DO Support for 1.9 GHz SC4812T and the
1xEV-DO Software Upgrade.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify benefits of enhancements associated with R16.5.
Describe R16.5 network enhancements, their requirements and related compatibility/dependencies for
software and hardware.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 198


CDMA-S2K320: 3G CDMA 2000 Implementation and Operational Issues

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
Managers engineers and technicians with a detailed
understanding of the IS-95 standard.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course describes the CDMA2000 Radio Transmission Technology (RTT), a wide-band, spread spectrum
radio interface that uses Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology to meet the needs for third
generation (3G) wireless communications systems. The course focuses on the description of the OSI layers
(e.g., physical layer and part of link layer) for ITU IMT-2000 requirements. We will also view the Forward Link
and the Reverse Link.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the Migration Path from GSM to GPRS to 3G, use of PN and Walsh Codes in CDMA2000, Protocol
Stack and Link Layer Model, Signaling, Voice and Data Integration, Forward and Reverse Link.
In this course, you will learn to:
Identify the Migration Path from GSM to GPRS to 3G.
Identify the use of PN and Walsh Codes in CDMA2000.
Identify the Protocol Stack and Link Layer Model.
Identify Signaling, Voice and Data Integration.
Identify the Forward and Reverse Link.

199 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-S2K400: WCDMA for UMTS: Guided Tour of the Physical Layer

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
Technical personnel of the Cellular and PCS Industry
who need a clear understanding of the 3G wireless
systems. Ideally suited for Managers, planning
engineers, design engineers, system performance
staff, system operation and field personnel.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course describes in a step-by-step, easy-to understand manner, the foundations of the WCDMA standard.
The focus is placed on the implementation and operational considerations of the Physical Layer. The course
begins with a quick review of spread spectrum and CDMA concepts and principles. Then, a background and
global trends on UMTS is presented, followed by a contrast of the leading 3G standards (WCDMA versus
CDMA200).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe CDMA and Spread Spectrum Principles.
Describe UMTS and W-CDMA.
Describe PN Sequences and Gold Codes.
Describe Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factors.
Describe Hybrid Phase Shift Keying.
Describe Forward link or Downlink.
Describe Reverse Link or Uplink.
Describe Power Control and Handoff Strategies in WCDMA.
Describe the 3G system Capacity Model.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 200


CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


6 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
the Technical Training Direct link. 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
or
Audience CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
eLearning
Wireless operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the SDU.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

Course Content
This module is designed to cover the SDU components description and installation in relationship to a 1X sys-
tem.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Describe where SDU appears in the Network and the SDU functions.
Identify the SDU frame components and card information, specifications and functions.
Define the software architecture, OEM commands and post indictions that will bring the SDU to operational
state.
In this course you will learn to:
Describe the SDU in the Network.
Describe the SDU functions within the Network.
Identify the SDU frame components and specifications.
Identify board layout.
Verify the Interface cables.
Describe the software platform on which the SDU runs.
Describe the details of the HAP platform Functional areas.
Explain the external, logical and external physical IP addresses along with other LAN configuration
information to allow external communications.
Explain Data Management configuration.
Identify the high level steps needed to bring a SDU into service.
Describe how Quick Boot Software upgrade is performed.
Explain logical units that can be assigned to a BPP.
Identify CLI commands being introduced into the SDU.
Define the post indications that the SDU is in operational state.

201 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-SDU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: SDU

Duration Practical/Lab Content


8 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview

Audience
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically
the SDU.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of Selection and Distribution Unit (SDU); event, partic-
ularly alarm management; and device state management. This lab based course focuses on all activities
required on a daily, weekly or per shift basis according to the operating procedures of the system. Furthermore,
course content provides the first level recovery efforts prior to entering a corrective maintenance phase, as well
as, the task and/or duties required to maintain equipment or system in a healthy state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Recognize the operations process through SDU components and functions overview.
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance of CLI commands and reference
documentation.
Monitor and interpret operations event and alarm messages using lab simulations and reference
documentation.
Implement device state management and fault management in a hands-on lab activity.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 202


CDMA-SWT060: Nortel MTX Overview (Web-based)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 60 minutes No

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 NONE
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel requiring a basic understanding of the
major components and subsystems of the MTX.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course is has been designed to introduce individuals to the MTX Platform as it is integrated into the
Motorola CDMA Network. Included in this overview will be a description of the hardware operating system. It will
also provide a network view of the MTS in the CDMA system.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the major functions, components, and subsystems of the MTX switching system.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the MTX as it is used in the CDMA System.
Describe the CDMA Network elements.
Describe the MTX connections to the PSTN.
Describe the MTX connections to the CBSC.
Describe basic call processing.

203 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-SWT070: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals

Duration Practical/Lab Content


6 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 CDMA-SWT060: Nortel MTX Overview (Web-based)
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
People who require an understanding of the major
components and subsystems of the MTX.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to introduce individuals to the MTX Platform as it is integrated into the Motorola
CDMA Network. Included in this overview will be a description of the hardware operating system. It will also
provide a network view of the MTX in the CDMA system. The MTX course is a elearning, self pace course that
includes simulation exercise.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the MTX as it is used in the CDMA System
Describe the CDMA Network elements
Describe the MTX connections to the PSTN
Describe the MTX connections to the CBSC
Describe basic call processing
Perform the log on and off steps to the DMS
Navigate through the MAPCI. This includes the menu, level and basic information available in each field.
Interpret DMS alarms

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 204


CDMA-SWT080: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals Advanced

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
This course is designed for personnel requiring a
basic understanding of the major components and
subsystems of the MTX
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide information concerning procedures relating to: system access and
navigation. Also, provides commands and rules needed to accomplish specific tasks.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Operate and maintain the Hardware components of the MTX.
In this course, you will learn to:
Access system and navigation, Commands and rules needed to accomplish specific task:
Identify CDMA and the Interconnect system.
Identify major components that make up the system.
Perform Troubleshooting and testing procedures.
Recognize recovery types and their cause and effect on the system.
Explain utilities and the type of maintenance that should be performed on a routine basis.

205 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-SYSEV001: 1XEV-DO Operations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


16 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Knowledge of basic network administration
(including IP fundamentals).
Audience 2 Working experience with/knowledge of CDMA
Technical personnel responsible for the configuration, technology.
optimization, performance, and troubleshooting of the 3 Working knowledge/experience with CDMA R16/
1xEV-DO system. R16.1/R16.3 (preferred).
4 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
or CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Features eLearning
An instructor-led course. 5 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
6 CDMA-GNL136: R16.4/R16.4.1 Overview
7 CDMA-GNL035: 1X EV-DO Overview

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system,
particularly alarm management; and device state management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the operations process through system components and functions overview, network management,
and CDMA call flow.
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance of CLI commands launch, structure and
reference documentation.
Monitor and interpret operations though event reports, filters, criteria and log files.
Monitor and interpret operations though alarm messages using lab simulation and reference documentation.
Implement device state management and fault management in a hands-on lab activity.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 206


CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically
new CDMA System Operators.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system,
particularly alarm management; and device state management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the operations process through system components and functions overview, network management,
and CDMA call flow.
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance of CLI commands launch, structure and
reference documentation.
Monitor and interpret operations though event reports, filters, criteria and log files.
Monitor and interpret operations though alarm messages using lab simulation and reference documentation.
Implement device state management and fault management in a hands-on lab activity.

207 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-SYS110A: 1X System Administration (Unix)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-OMCR100NE: OMC-R Network Element Overview
2 CDMA-MM100NE: MM Network Element Overview
Audience 3 CDMA-OMCP100NE: OMC-IP Network Element Overview
The course is designed for Network, UNIX system, 4 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview or equivalent experience/
Cellular System Engineers, Cellular Technicians and knowledge of a R16 system.
Operators with administration duties.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides operators with the skills to administrate the user accounts and hardware management on
the UNIX-based platforms in the CDMA system including OMC-R, OMC-IP, UNO and MM.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform basic administration duties required to maintain various UNIX based platforms in the Motorola
SuperCell architecture.
The student will be able, through hands-on lab application and reference documentation, repeat the following
administration tasks:
Add, modify, and delete users on UNIX platform.
Add, modify, and delete users on Solaris platform.
Add, modify, and delete users on OMC-IPs.
Add, and delete users on UNO platform.
Execute System Security Management commands.
Back up file system, database, and transfer files.
Administrate the disk.
Administrate the OMC-R and MM hardware.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 208


CDMA-SYS150: Alarm Handling and System
Documentation

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
eLearning
Audience or
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operation of a CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Motorola SC CDMA system.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides hands-on training on the alarm handling of a Motorola SC CDMA system and the use of
System Documentation.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform command procedures from the System Alarms Manual to determine the cause and appropriate
actions for alarms received.
Determine the CFCs associated with specific alarms.
Perform alarm condition recovery steps from the BTS Troubleshooting Guide.
Determine proper CLI commands on the OMC-R using the proper syntax and prerequisites.

209 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-SYS230: CDMA RF Planning Course

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days No

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL136: R16.4/R16.4.1 Overview

Audience
Engineers and technicians involved in designing,
planning and maintaining RF side of the RAN System

Features
Instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course covers propagation basics and its design philosophy association, link budget analysis, clutter
classification model tuning, preliminary RF Design, RF Survey Capacity Coverage Analysis. This course also
covers Pilot Pollution Problem analysis along with antenna specifications, PN offset planning. CDMA 1X Link
Budget, CDMA 1X planning and CDMA RF optimization.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
State propagation basics and its design philosophy, link budget analysis, the clutter classification model
tuning, preliminary RF design, RF survey capacity coverage analysis.
Analyze Pilot Pollution Problem
Identify Antenna specifications, PN Offset planning. CDMA 1X Link Budget, CDMA 1X Planning and CDMA
RF optimization.

In this course you will learn to:


State propagation models for different clutter category
Differentiate the phases of CDMA RF Design
Identify link budget parameters and the associated Design Tool inputs for coverage estimates
Discuss enhancement of predicted path loss through the utilization of satellite clutter data
List the importance and procedure for Model Tuning of Clutter
Define the path Loss prediction and effect of Path Loss Calculation in CDMA RF Design
Explain the importance of RF field survey for RF design
Explain the use of signal strength and best server images in verifying cover-age, evaluating site placements,
and identifying problem areas
Discuss the images and process used to detect and eliminate pilot pollution
Differentiate the different type of antennas and the advantages of different types of Antenna
Differentiate the Different methods of PN Offset planning
Recognize CDMA 1X link budget parameters
Recognize different call Models used in CDMA 1X
Describe the procedure and processes used while optimizing the CDMA network

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 210


CDMA-SYS250: Optimization using SMAP

Duration Practical/Lab Content


8 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 CDMA-PER250: System Monitoring Application Processor
the Technical Training Direct link. (SMAP)

Audience
This course was designed for System Engineers and
Performance Engineers.

Features
Instructor Led or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course is designed to give optimization scenarios using the SMAP tool providing details on monitoring spe-
cific performance issues. In addition the course outlines troubleshooting tips relating to CDMA and optimization
processes. Scenarios are explored and optimization suggestions are made.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Use SMAP as a tool for diagnostic monitoring and hence a network optimizing tool identifying performance
issues.
In this course you will learn to:
Perform Spectrum Interference Analysis.
Identify RFER Trouble spots.
Perform Pilot Pollution Detection.
Analyze Call Performance.
Analyze Channel Power.
Analyze Call Signaling.

211 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-SYS300: CDMA System Optimization of the RF Link

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 Knowledge of call processing
Primary audience System engineers responsible for 4 Knowledge of the CBSC and associated Super Cell
testing, troubleshooting, and benchmarking the RF CLI commands
link of a CDMA system.
Secondary audience Cellular Field Engineers,
product managers, market managers, and sales
personnel who meet the prerequisites

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course presents the basic concepts, measurements and messages that are needed to analyze common
problems found through testing the RF Link of an existing CDMA system during call processing. Testing is done
by making calls.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify and make recommendations for resolving
common problems found on CDMA systems, by analyzing data collected over the RF link, with assistance from
some other tools.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify the importance of good system design as part of CDMA system optimization.
Describe the basic concepts and the key CDMA system parameters useful to optimization, and practice the
associated Super Cell CLI display commands.
Describe the basic tests, measurements and types of test equipment that are basic to analyzing problems:
(some of these tests will be simulated in the lab)
Describe the basic plots and messaging that are basic to analyzing post-processed data. (Presently students
will not post-process data)
Analyze messages and plots that have already been post-processed from the field, in order to identify
common traffic channel problems: related to neighbor lists, pilot pollution, coverage holes, window sizes, and
pilot surprise.
Explain how equipment, signal path, call flow, CFCs, and access window sizes relate to access problems.
Explain how caution should be taken in making database changes, or changes to the system design, since
solving one problem may create several others.
Troubleshoot unknown problems in the lab using the active displays and replay mode of the mobile
diagnostic monitor and System Monitoring Application Processor. (may also include problems that test basic
knowledge of equipment, signal paths, call flow, call detail logs, call final class, and key CMDA parameters)
Perform edit commands in the lab.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 212


CDMA-SYS330MI: Advanced Troubleshooting Workshop

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL134: R16.3 Overview
2 CDMA-AGN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: AGNODEr
Audience 3 CDMA-MLS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MLS
This course is designed for Engineers and technicians 4 CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM
involved in operations, maintenance and 5 CDMA-OMCP100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMC-IP
troubleshooting for CDMA RAN. 6 CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
7 CDMA-pBTS101OM: Operations and Maintenance: pBTS
8 CDMA-PDSN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: Cisco
Features PDSN
An instructor-led course. 9 CDMA-PDSN200OM: Operations and Maintenance: 3Com
PDSN
10 CDMA-SDU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: SDU
11 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
Overview
12 CDMA-XC100OM: Operations and Maintenance: XC

Course Content
This course comprises of multiple practical troubleshooting labs and paper-based case studies based on real
field issues. Also covered are the steps an engineer should take to deal with a particular fault, and the
preventive measures that should be taken to avoid the problems in the system.
A High-level outline of the workshop includes:
Scenario Based Case Studies: This module consists of case studies for different fault situations. Part of the
learning experience consists of scenarios based group discussions on possible reasons for the origination of
the fault and the effective ways to eliminate it.
High-level troubleshooting of faults: This module consists of hands-on troubleshooting faults that are
introduced on the RAN system in order to allow the students to troubleshoot and rectify the faults in a safe
classroom environment.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Duplicate the six-step method to the analysis of hardware, software and RF related faults.
Recognize trouble symptoms based on generated alarms.
Collect additional information to further define the fault.
Estimate the impact of various faults on call processing.
Isolate faulted hardware components or failed processes, based on prior analysis.
Apply corrective procedures to clear identified faults.

213 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


CDMA-SYS340MI: OMCR-BTS Troubleshooting Workshop

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL136: R16.4/R16.4.1 Overview
2 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
Audience Overview
This course is designed for Engineers and technicians 3 CDMA-AGN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: AGNODEr
involved in operations, maintenance and 4 CDMA-MLS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MLS
troubleshooting of CDMA BTS system both from RF 5 CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM
and OMCR perspective. 6 CDMA-OMCP100OM : Operations and Maintenance: OMC-IP
7 CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
8 CDMA-pBTS101OM: Operations and Maintenance: pBTS
Features 9 CDMA-PDSN100OM: Operations and Maintenance: Cisco
An instructor-led course. PDSN
10 CDMA-PDSN200OM: Operations and Maintenance: 3Com
PDSN
11 CDMA-SDU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: SDU
12 CDMA-XC100OM: Operations and Maintenance: XC

Course Content
This course is designed to assist system technicians and engineers in understanding the functionality and
troubleshooting of the BTS system from the OMCR/CBSC perspective as wells as from the RF perspective. This
workshop consists of a real field issues which comprises of troubleshooting labs and paper based labs as Case
Studies based on the following sections:
BTS Hardware related faults.
BTS Software related faults.
BTS RF faults.
This workshop covers multiple hands on labs on BTS Router, GLI3 cards, BTS Overhead channels, NECF files,
BTS Span related issues, MWC software faults etc. This workshop also covers the steps an engineer/technician
should take while dealing with a particular fault, and the preventive measures he should have taken to possibly
avoid the situation.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Analyze BTS Hardware related faults.
Analyze BTS Software related faults.
Analyze BTS RF related faults.
Review case studies of those faults that could not be simulated in a lab environment.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 214


CDMA-SYS360: RAN Equipment Planning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview

Audience
Engineers who would like to have knowledge of RAN
subsystem planning parameters and thus calculate
the hardware requirement for RAN Network.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is designed to teach an engineer to identify the hardware requirements for a RAN system. The
major topics include BTS, MCC-1X sizing, CBSC, Access Node, SDU, and VPU planning. The material provides
an overview of RAN planning parameters, including traffic model, capacity calculations, and the methods for
calculating the requirements of a system based on a given call model. Two appendices are included which
provide a Macro and System Architecture view of the CDMA system, as well as the general process for design
and implementation of the data network. This latter includes some of the options available for the data
implementation. Paper based labs help familiarize the student with the calculations required for network
planning.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the parameters required for RAN subsystem planning
List the functions, hardware, deployment information, ordering process, dimensioning rules for Radio Access
Network.
Learn how to develop an appropriate call model, that could be used to generate the lists of equipment
needed to support that call model.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify the items and components required to build a 3-sector, 2-carrier (non-adjacent) SC 4812T starter
packet BTS.
Determine the number and type of MCC-1X required to satisfy the sizing requirements for an SC 4812T
BTS.
Perform PSI sizing for a VPU/SDU-based system.
Perform PSI sizing for an XC-based system.
Size the appropriate number and type of pBIBs (pBIB-ES or pBIB-E) required to support the PSI cards in an
XC.
Perform AGNODE sizing procedures for a T1 FRSM.
Perform AGNODE sizing procedures for a T3 FRSM.
Perform MLS sizing procedures.
Design hardware requirements for an SDU that will support a given load.
Determine the number of VPUs required to support a given load.

215 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-SYS370: CDMA RAN IP Planning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL120: Basic IP Fundamentals

Audience
Technical personnel who require the skills necessary
for planning and maintaining the IP configuration of
the CDMA Radio Access Network (RAN).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides guidelines to plan the topology, IP addresses, and routing configuration of the RAN in the
1X CDMA Wireless network. This course also covers recommendations on what IP addressing schemes to use
during deployment of the packet-based Radio Access Network in the 1X CDMA Wireless network. This course
focuses primarily on the IP addressing of the CDMA RAN.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
List and define CDMA Federation topologies
Layout the guidelines for planning of IP address allocation for the Radio Access Network and their interfaces

In this course you will learn to:


List CDMA Federation topologies
Define the topology within a Mobile Telephone Switching Office (MTSO) for the CDMA Network
List the concepts of CDMA Federation and its IP Address requirements
Layout the guidelines for partitioning the IP addresses for the different CDMA RAN components

216 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-SYS401: Performance Fundamentals

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Instructor Led - 1 day Yes
Virtual Classroom - Two - 4 hour sessions
Prerequisite Motorola Courses
Location Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other 1 None
premises by arrangement.

Audience
Personnel who require the basic skills necessary for
performance management of the CDMA cellular
system.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course is designed for personnel involved with performance monitoring of the Motorola CDMA cellular
system. It provides an introduction to the basic skills necessary for performance monitoring of the CDMA RAN.
The importance of determining the utilization of each key processor in the network is examined thus allowing the
prediction of network bottlenecks. In addition, the use of peg counts, CDLs, and performance tools (UNO-
SEPMR) to predict system capacity and system growth requirements are explored.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Evaluate a Six Step Performance Method that can be utilized to evaluate each network element.
Collect the current traffic and network element processor utilization data.
Determine present network element status.
Forecast Utilization for each network element.
Identify system bottlenecks.
Evaluate bottleneck relief alternatives.
Implement appropriate relief alternatives.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 217


CDMA-SYS500: CDMA2000 Call Flow

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
Audience
This course was designed for System Engineers,
Operations Managers, Maintenance Personnel,
Network Engineers, Call Center Personnel, and Field
Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is designed for technical personnel who require an understanding of system level call flows in the
Motorola Radio Access Network. The course will consist of information that will lay a foundation and address
some prerequisites. It will contain an overview of the Network Elements as it pertains to call processing,
Interfaces of all the major NEs, Timers, Service Options, Handoffs and SCH (Supplemental Channel). The final
section will tie in the 3 tier diagram for the Call Flows.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to correctly locate the key call flow steps on the
Motorola System.
In this course you will learn to:
Trace the Network Elements Call Processing.
Identify the relationships within the interfaces.
Explain Service Options and Timers.
Identify Handoffs and SCH.
Describe the system level call flows in the Motorola Radio Access Network.

218 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-VPU100NE: VPU Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Wireless operators, or other personnel, who require a
technical view of the Vocoder Processing Unit (VPU).

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

Course Content
This module is designed to present an overview of the VPU being introduced in 16.3. This overview will provide
a look at the VPU both physically and logically. This includes the VPU function in the network, VPU hardware
component, and VPU software architecture, OEM command and POST indications that will bring the VPU to
operational state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe where the VPU appears in the Network and the VPU functions.
Identify the VPU frame components and card information, specifications and functions.
Define the software architecture, OEM commands and POST indications that will bring the VPU to
operational state.
In this course you will learn to:
Describe the VPU in the Network.
Describe the VPU functions within the Network.
Identify the VPU frame components and specifications.
Identify board layout.
Verify the Interface cables.
Describe the software platform on which the VPU runs.
Describe the details of the HAP platform functional areas.
Explain the logical and external physical IP addresses along with other LAN configuration information to
allow external communication.
Explain Data Management Configuration.
Identify the high level steps needed to bring a VPU into service.
Describe how Quick Boot Software upgrade is performed.
Explain logical units that can be assigned to a BPP.
Identify CLI Commands being introduced into the VPU.
Define the POST indications that indicate the VPU is in an operational state.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 219


CDMA-VPU101OM: Operations and Maintenance: VPU

Duration Practical/Lab Content


.4 Hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience or
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and CDMA-GNL071: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically eLearning
the Vocoder Processing Unit (VPU). 3 CDMA-VPU100NE: VPU Network Element Overview
or
Features CDMA-GNL134: R16.3 Overview
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of Vocoder Processing Unit (VPU); event, particularly
alarm management; and device state management. These labs based course focuses on all activities required
on a daily, weekly or per shift basis according to the operating procedures of the system. Furthermore, course
content provides the first level recovery efforts prior to entering a corrective maintenance phase, as well as, the
task and/or duties required to maintain equipment or system in a healthy state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Recognize the operations process through VPU components and functions overview.
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance of CLI commands and reference
documentation.
Monitor and interpret operations event and alarm messages using lab simulations and reference
documentation.
Implement device state management and fault management flow in a hands-on lab activity.

220 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-XC100NE: XC Network Element Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Wireless operators and other personnel who
require a technical view of the Transcoder.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course or Virtual
Classroom

Course Content
This overview will provide a look at the Transcoder both physically and logically. This includes the purpose and
location of the Transcoder device in the network, its hardware components, its software architecture, OEM CLI
commands, and post indications that will bring the Transcoder to an operational state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the purpose of the device
Locate the device on the network
Describe frame and card slot components
Explain the basic interfaces/cables for proper configuration
Recognize main OEM CLI commands
Identify LEDs display output indicators
In this course you will learn to:
Locate the XC function in the Network
Describe the XC functions within the network
Identify the XC frame components and specifications
Identify board layout on the XC shelf
Describe the function of specific XC card modules
Verify the physical Interfaces in the XC modules
Recognize OEM CLI commands
Recognize LED indicators for XC modules

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 221


CDMA-XC100OM: Operations and Maintenance: XC

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 hours Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
Personnel involved in the day-to-day operations and 4 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
maintenance of a Motorola digital network, specifically Overview
the Transcoder (XC). 5 CDMA-XC100NE: XC Network Element Overview

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with a high level overview of transcoder (XC); event, particularly alarm
management; and device state management. This lab based course focuses on all activities required on a daily,
weekly or per shift basis according to the operating procedures of the system. Furthermore, course content
provides the first level recovery efforts prior to entering a corrective maintenance phase, as well as, the task
and/or duties required to maintain equipment or system in a healthy state.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Recognize the operations process through XC components and functions overview.
Repeat operations activities through reviews of performance of CLI commands and reference
documentation.
Monitor and interpret operations event and alarm messages using lab simulations and reference
documentation.
Implement device state management in a hands-on lab activity.

222 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


GSM Courses

GSM Technology courses equip the student with the knowledge required to commission, maintain, monitor and
optimize GSM networks. It is imperative that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each student
and to ensure that all prerequisite training is completed.

GSM-BSS07: Advanced BSS Field Support........................................................................................................ 224


GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory ............................................................................................................... 225
GSM-BSS12: BSS Operations and Maintenance ................................................................................................ 226
GSM-BSS15: BSS Installer.................................................................................................................................. 227
GSM-ENG941: Understanding GSM ................................................................................................................... 228
GSM-GSR7: (1760 Load) Delta Course .............................................................................................................. 229
GSM-H11WKS Horizon II Macro Workshop ..................................................................................................... 230
GSM-HLS/EIS101: Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................................. 231
GSM-MSS-G100 Motorola Soft Switch GSM.................................................................................................... 232
GSM-MSS-G100A: Motorola SoftSwitch for GSM Administration and Provisioning............................................ 233
GSM-MSS-G101OM: Motorola SoftSwitch for GSM Operation and Maintenance .............................................. 234
GSM-MSS-G200A: Motorola SoftSwitch Translations......................................................................................... 235
GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations ......................................................................................................... 236
GSM-NET02: OMC-R Advanced Network Operations ........................................................................................ 237
GSM-NET03: Network Performance.................................................................................................................... 238
GSM-NET04: Cell Optimization Product (COP)................................................................................................... 239
GSM-NET05: Network Health Analyst ................................................................................................................. 240
GSM-NET06: Datagen Operations ...................................................................................................................... 241
GSM-OMC03: OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform) ........................................................................ 242
GSM-OMC04: OMC-R System Administration Workshop (Sun Fire 4800, Sun Netra 20, Sun Blade 150) ........ 243
GSM-SYS01: GSM Interfaces and Protocols ...................................................................................................... 244
GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database....................................................................................................... 245
GSM-SYS03: Advanced BSS Database.............................................................................................................. 246
GSM-SYS04: Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning........................................................................... 247
GSM-SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered Systems ....................................................... 248
GSM-WKS01: 3G/2G handover, 2G/3G cell reselection feature workshop Circuit switched............................. 249
GSM-WKS03: HDPC Workshop .......................................................................................................................... 250
GSM-WKS04: HDPC2 Workshop ........................................................................................................................ 251

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 223


GSM-BSS07: Advanced BSS Field Support

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience 3 GSM-BSS12: BSS Operations and Maintenance
Experienced Field Support Engineers. Training is only 4 GSM-SYS01: GSM Interfaces and Protocols
recommended for specialized personnel who need 5 GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
knowledge of BSS Level 3 tools to further enhance
field support procedures.

Features
Instructor Led course providing an in-depth insight into
both the InCell and M-Cell/Horizon software
functionality and onboard debugging tools. The course
provides an understanding of Level 3 tools,
considered useful to investigate field problems using
M-Cell/ Horizon specific Level 3 commands.The
course also provides a useful manual for field use,
containing many commonly used filters and IIR masks

Course Content
Previously know as BSS07E. This course describes BSS software processes and the level 3 EMON command
set. Topics include: Internal message routing, system memory, filters, generation of internal information reports,
software fault management, performance analysis and the use of EMON commands to interrogate MCAP and
M-Cell/Horizon specific devices.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the function and location of all software processes.
Describe how internal messages are constructed, interpreted and transferred internally within the BSS.
Describe and safely use commands available from the RAM EMON prompt.
Describe the use of filters and the full suite of masks provided for the iir-mod command.
Describe and safely use messages to interrogate various internal components within the BSS.
Interpret SWFMs.
Use the tools available within EMON for performance analysis.

224 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular

Audience
BSS Installation, Commissioning & Maintenance
Engineers, OMC Engineers, BSS Database and
Planning Engineers, BSS System Optimization
Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course describing the operation and
function of the current Motorola Transcoder, Base
Station Controller and Base Transceiver Station
products.

Course Content
This course covers the operational theory of the BSC, Transcoder Horizon 11, Horizonmacro, Horizonmicro2
and Horizoncompact2. The course also provides an overview of BSS software and the customer MMI.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the generic function and configuration of the major components of the RXCDR, BSC and current
BTS products.
Identify and state the function of signaling and interconnections within the BSS.
State the function and describe the simplified principles of operation of field replaceable units within all
current BSS subsystem products.
State the function of the major component parts of all current BSS subsystem products.
Name the major sections of the BSS software system and describe the function of selected processes.
Note: This course is designed to replace BSS08, MC09 and the theoretical objectives of MC01. BSS12 has
replaced the practical objectives of MC01. Delegates who have previously attended BSS08/MC09 or BSS08/
MC01 should not attend BSS11.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 225


GSM-BSS12: BSS Operations and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience
BSS Installation, Commissioning and Maintenance
Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course describing the procedures
required for BSS site integration, optimization and
maintenance. This course also includes a number of
practical exercises.

Course Content
This course covers the practical aspects of BSS site configuration, integration and maintenance.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Monitor and describe the BSS initialization processes and perform an MMI command exercise.
Display and describe the content of the site code object lists and the procedure for loading BSS code objects
using Lanload.
Describe and demonstrate the procedure for loading or changing a site configuration management database
using MMI sysgen mode.
Install and connect sub-assemblies to produce specified site hardware configurations, and perform BSS site
calibration/optimization procedures.

226 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-BSS15: BSS Installer

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Dependant on the customer requirements for the Yes
course content.
Prerequisite Motorola Courses
Location Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
The course is available globally at any location where 1 There is no pre-requisite training for this course but
access to non-live equipment of the type specified by it is assumed that students are capable of
the customer is available for training. terminating both electrical and RF cables in
The course is modular by equipment type and may be accordance with the relevant regulations.
tailored to suit customer requirements.

Audience
This course is intended for installers, potential field
engineers or those new to Motorola BSS equipment.

Features
An instructor-led course in two parts - theory and
practical over five consecutive days, the actual content
being tailored to the needs of the customer and the
type of equipment to be installed.

Course Content
The purpose of the course is to train nominated personnel in the installation and commissioning of supported
Motorola BSS equipment. The course includes both theoretical and practical elements and can, if requested lead
to participation in the Certification Program: BSS (GSM) Installer. The installation phase includes unpacking,
fitting and connecting the equipment at a specified location. The commissioning phase includes pre-power up
checks and powering up the equipment both with and without code-load.
(Note. The software load used must be capable of supporting the designated equipment types).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the engineer will be capable of installing and commissioning Motorola BSS
equipment at a pre-prepared site to Motorola published standards, including being able to:
Describe the various components that make up the Public Land Mobile Network and explain their role with in
the network.
Describe the generic function of the Transcoder, Base Station Controller and Base Transceiver Station.
Identify and state the functions of the XCDR,BSC and BTS signaling interconnections.
Describe and identify the function of the hardware to be installed.
Describe the Motorola recommended procedures to be adopted before, during and after installation of BSS
components.
Commission and optimize the equipment.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 227


GSM-ENG941: Understanding GSM

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is intended for people who want an
understanding of the breadth of technical concepts
behind GSM, as well as how GSM fits into the wireless
industry.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide students with an understanding of the many technologies used in GSM
based systems. students will also learn the digital processes used for signal reliability, control of the air
interface, GSM's main network characteristics, and the differences among competing technologies.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will:
Be familiar with GSM's network characteristics, Quality of Service mechanisms, and system capacity.
Understand how GSM fits into the global wireless picture and provides the information students need to
make informed, knowledgeable decisions about how to use GSM's capabilities and features in today's
wireless marketplace.

228 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-GSR7: (1760 Load) Delta Course

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 day Theory 3 day Theory - No requirement
4/5 day Theory/Practical - Negotiation on practical
Location content and equipment required.
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Note: The training can be tailored to include only
premises by arrangement. customer purchased features, negotiation on content
required.
Audience
All Engineers engaged in GSR7 (1760 Load). Prerequisite Motorola Courses
Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
Features Engineers should have previously followed and
completed the training from a curriculum path at
An instructor-led course designed to enable students
GSR6. This course covers the differences between
to understand the new parameters, features and
the previous release of our training courses and
messages involved in GSR7 (1760 Load).
the current version. For Engineers new to Motorola
products, they should refer to the curriculum paths
for their training requirements.

Course Content
The course provides a detailed introduction to GSR7 (1760 Load). Explanations of database, statistics, planning
formulae and OMC features of GSR7 (1760 Load). The course covers the changes in BSS, GPRS, OMC-R, and
EGPRS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the new and modified BSS features.
State the new and modified BSS MMI commands and statistics.
Describe the planning impacts for the GSR7 features in the BSS.
Describe the new and modified GPRS features.
State the new and modified GPRS MMI commands and statistics.
Describe the new and modified OMC-R features.
Describe the new EGPRS features.
Demonstrate new and modified parameters in the OMC-R, PCU and BSS as part of the GSR7 features
(Practical course only).

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 229


GSM-H11WKS Horizon II Macro Workshop

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CP02,
2 BSS11,
Audience 3 BSS12
BSS Installation, Commissioning and Maintenance
Engineers with practical experience of the Horizon
family of BTS's

Features
An instructor led course describing the new features
and upgraded feature pack in Horizon 11 BTS.Driven
by the audience and supported by 1.5 days of
practical exercises, this course is intended to answer
questions and explore related topics the student may
have about the new features and the changes and
benefits to the Network of the Hardware software and
options.

Course Content
This course is in two parts. Theory where the new hardware and software will be discussed. Practical exercises
include strip and rebuild, installation and optimization tasks.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the Hardware features of the Horizon 11 macro and its field replaceable units.
Describe the software features of the Horizon 11 macro.
Describe the feature enhancements and options of the Horizon 11 macro.
Describe and demonstrate the differences in installation and optimization of the Horizon 11 macro from
MCell and Horizon products.

230 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-HLS/EIS101: Operation and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days Exercises on configuring and administering HLS / EIS

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM MAP call processing
2 Working knowledge of GSM HLR
Audience
This course is intended technical staff requiring
operations and maintenance expertise on HLS / EIS.

Features
An instructor-led course providing introduction to the
hardware architecture, directory concepts and the
operations and administration of HLS / EIS.

Course Content
This course give a generic review of the GSM Network explaining where the HLS / EIS is positioned and discuss
the advantages of HLS over legacy HLR. Also explained are the architecture, functions and administration of the
Home Location Server and Equipment Identity Server.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the role of HLR in GSM networks.
Describe Basic call handling involving HLR.
Explain the concept of HLS.
Describe how the HLS replaces legacy HLR.
Describe advantages of the HLS system.
Describe the hardware of HLS system.
Describe the software and middleware components of HLS.
Describe the Directory concepts.
Explain the features of Motorola SDF (Service Data Function) / Directory Server.
Describe the Software features.
Describe the configuration details of Directory Server.
Describe the various directory functions and features.
Describe the system administration commands.
Execute maintenance utilities, alarms and log file monitoring.
Describe the HLS configuration and provisioning data.
Describe the function of EIR.
Describe the Motorola EIS components and functions.
Describe the Management Server.
Troubleshoot the Directory Server and call failures

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 231


GSM-MSS-G100 Motorola Soft Switch GSM

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 Day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 None

Audience
Personnel who require an overview the Motorola
SoftSwitch for GSM (MSS-G)

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with a basic understanding of the major components and subsystems of
the MSS-G switch, as well as the interaction of the subsystems.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the various elements that make up the MSS-G switch including the hardware components
Describe the Mobile Operating System
Explain the man-machine interfaces employed in the MSS-G switch
Navigate within the MSS-G GUI and view existing MSS-G configurations
Describe MSS-G Start Up and Shutdown Procedures
Describe Alarm Monitoring
Describe the Sonus Media Gateway including the hardware components

232 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-MSS-G100A: Motorola SoftSwitch for GSM Administration and
Provisioning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Have basic knowledge of IP technology and experience in
supporting the carriers network
Audience 2 Be familiar with UNIX (basic commands) and have an
understanding of how to establish a telnet session
Administration personnel involved in configura- 3 Previous class work in VoIP would be helpful
tion/update of the Motorola SoftSwitch for GSM 4 GSM-MSS-G100 Motorola Soft Switch GSM
(MSS-G).

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course has been designed to assist switch technicians and system engineers in administration and
provisioning of a MSS-G switch.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Configure the MSS-G for operation as a serving MSC including:
Local Point Code configuration
Hardware configuration
Applications configuration
Serving MSC Feature Settings
Announcements and Tones configuration
Remote Network Entities configuration
SS7 configuration
Media Gateway configuration
Routing configuration
Mobile Prefix and Roaming configuration
Visitor Location Register (VLR) configuration
Lawful Intercept (LI) Configuration

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 233


GSM-MSS-G101OM: Motorola SoftSwitch for GSM Operation and
Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Have basic knowledge of IP technology and experience in
supporting the carriers network
Audience 2 Be familiar with UNIX (basic commands) and have an
Operations personnel involved in the day-to-day understanding of how to establish a telnet session
operations and maintenance of a Motorola packet- 3 Previous class work in VoIP would be helpful
based switch network, specifically the Motorola 4 GSM-MSS-G100 Motorola Soft Switch GSM
SoftSwitch for GSM (MSS-G).

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides operators with an in depth understanding of the major components and sub-
systems of the MSS-G platform, as will as the interaction of the subsystems.
Included are tasks related to the daily operation and maintenance of the MSS-G switch.
This class includes hands-on labs to allow the class participants to gain familiarity with the MSS GUI
as well as the CLI. (Provided terminals are available with connectivity to network).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the various elements of the MSS-G and their function
Explain the interconnectivity between the various elements of the MSS-G
Demonstrate how to interface with the MSS-G using various methods
Monitor Control Chassis and Gateway Alarm/Fault management indicators
Analyze the call processing subsystem
Describe the billing /accounting functions
Demonstrate maintenance activities.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 234


GSM-MSS-G200A: Motorola SoftSwitch Translations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 5 GSM-MSS-G101OM: Motorola SoftSwitch for GSM Operation
and Maintenance
Audience 6 GSM-MSS-G200A: Motorola SoftSwitch Translations
Switch Administration personnel involved in the
process of the translations in Motorola SoftSwitch
for GSM (MSS-G).

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course is designed to assist system engineers and technicians to understand and modify transla-
tions functions of MSS-G. The course comprises of principles of operation for MSSG translator, trans-
lation database analysis of a typical MSSG implementation, and procedures and practices during
various stages of call processing of typical call scenarios.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe implementation details of translations for Mobile to Mobile, Mobile to PSTN, PSTN to
Mobile, Prepaid calls
Discuss the principles of operation of MSSG Translator
Discuss concepts involved in an MSSG Translator
Perform analysis of translation database of a typical MSSG implementation that details procedures
and practices followed during various stages of call processing of typical call scenarios
Modify an existing translator
Modify the database to implement a change in dial plan and/or add new feature

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 235


GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience
Network Operators, Administrators and System
Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led practical course designed to train
personnel in the daily tasks of network operations.

Course Content
The course is designed to introduce personnel to the hardware and software associated with an OMC-R
system. It covers the interaction of the OMC-R with other network entities and details how the OMC-R can be
used to load software objects and databases to control a network configuration. It also provides instruction on
the use of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) to display alarms and events, how to interact with the displayed
alarms and how to access statistics gathered from all network entities for analysis purposes.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Learn to use the OMC-R to operate a network of BSSs and remote transcoders.
Learn to use the OMC-R GUI to manage the processing of network element events/alarms and to instigate
suitable remedial actions.
Learn to use the OMC-R GUI to monitor the network data and generate reports.
Learn to use OMC-R to change the states of devices in the network
Learn to use Remote Login feature to interrogate the status and configuration of Network elements.
Use the OMC-R to perform Fault Management /Load Management tasks and troubleshoot the network.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 236


GSM-NET02: OMC-R Advanced Network Operations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience 3 GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations
OMC-R Operators, System Engineers, Optimizers and 4 GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
Network Administrators.

Features
An instructor-led practical course designed to train
Network Operators in system configuration techniques
from the OMC-R.

Course Content
The course is designed to enable personnel to understand the theory associated with communications links,
Packet Switches, Multiplexers and Routers used in a network. It explains the fundamentals of the Navigation
Tree, Audits and how to add BSCs, Network Elements, Sites, Commslinks, Cells (Ordinary, Proxy & Neighbour)
DRIs and RTFs. The basics of cmutil and reassigning of devices is also covered along with the methods used to
daisy chain sites.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the complexities of the OMC Navigation tree and use it to its full potential to make most network
configuration changes.
Explain the operation of X.25 links, Packet Switches, Multiplexers and Routers.
Explain the basics of the cmutil feature and use it to perform designated tasks.
Carry out assigned tasks without supervision such as site audits, adding NEs to the MIB, configuring
CommsLinks on the map, populating the MIB with all the NE database objects.
Carry out the basic programming of the Motorola 6560MP Router.
Add new BTS sites in to the BSS using the OMC GUI and add/reassign devices to the network.

237 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-NET03: Network Performance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience 3 GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
BSS (GSM Network Operators, BSS (GSM) Network
Planners, BSS (GSM) Engineers and BSS (GSM)
Configuration/Optimization Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course providing students with a
detailed description of BSS statistics.

Course Content
This course describes BSS statistics used in Motorola BSS systems. Included are, statistical data types, all
individual statistics.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the signaling links within the BSS Sub-system infrastructure.
Describe the variants of HDLC which are used in GSM.
Describe how each of the Statistical Data Types collect and report data.
Describe the five key statistics groups.
Explain the meaning of each statistic pegged in the BSS.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 238


GSM-NET04: Cell Optimization Product (COP)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


At customer premises (OMC-R site) or access to Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
customer live data. The course is currently not The Optimizer delegate will require experience of using database
available in Swindon due to the requirement of real parameters and statistics in a working environment, plus
time data access. knowledge of the Air Interface and messaging protocols. In
addition, completion of courses:
Audience 1 GSM-SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayered
OMC-R operational staff performing day-to-day Systems
activities that focus on Cell performance and 2 GSM-NET03: Network Performance
optimization. Systems engineers requiring knowledge The OMC-R Operations delegate will require experience of using
of a front-end tool in order to perform RF optimization. database parameters and statistics in a working environment. In
addition, attendance of course:
Features 1 GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations
An instructor led course designed to train personnel in
the installation, operation and maintenance of the Cell
Optimization Product.

Course Content
This course is aimed at network personnel requiring knowledge of installation, operation and maintenance of the
Cell Optimization Product in order to perform RF optimization of the Motorola radio equipment.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the purpose of the Cell Optimization Product (COP).
List the components of COP and their individual use (ECT - GLU - CTP - CAT).
Identify the installation procedure for the complete product.
Use GLU in order to locate network configuration data.
Perform a Call Trace set up for a Cell.
Analyze Call Trace data that has been collected on the OMC-R in the form of call trace files.
Use the CTP Graphical Decode window to analyze call output.
Use ECT to provide graphical or spreadsheet reports regarding number and type of events/alarms
generated.
Use CAT in order to locate Cells with potential problems.
Use the CAT ranking value in order to check for the ten worst performing cells.
Use complete product to analyze dropped calls on a cell.
Use complete product to analyze cells with poor path balance.
Use complete product to identify interference problems associated with handovers
Use frequency clash reports to identify co-channel and adjacent channel interference.
Identify interference problems caused by frequency re-use and use COP to optimize coverage.
Examine neighbour lists in order to improve cell coverage area.

239 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-NET05: Network Health Analyst

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience 3 GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations
OMC-R Network Operators, Administrators and 4 GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
System Engineers. 5 GSM-NET02: OMC-R Advanced Network Operations

Features
An instructor-led practical course designed to train
personnel in the operation of NHA.

Course Content
The course explains the theory behind NHA and covers in detail the operation of all the NHA modules. It also
explains the setting up of the NHA and its usage in relation to the OMC-R during the practical sessions.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the role of the Network Health Analyst (NHA) in relation to the OMC-R and describe the NHA hardware
and software.
State the different detection mechanisms used by the NHA and identify the detection process for specific
NHA problems.
Apply Permissions and Security settings, use the Cell grouping scripts and Create & modify cell groups.
View INSM reports, statistics history for a cell and Blacklist a device on the network display.
Explain the NHA directory structures and how to perform NHA performance checks.
Use the practical knowledge gained to perform NHA functions in relation to a GSM network.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 240


GSM-NET06: Datagen Operations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience 3 GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations
Network Operators, Administrators, System Engineers 4 GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
and Network Planners. 5 GSM-NET02: OMC-R Advanced Network Operations

Features
An instructor-led practical course designed to train
personnel in the operation of Datagen and OLM.

Course Content
The course explains the theory behind DataGen and the Off Line MIB (OLM) and covers in detail the operation
of all the DataGen and OLM modules. The students are able to gain experience in the importing of GSM
databases to the DataGen platform the upgrading, modifying and exporting of the resultant Databases back to
the GSM network.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the role of DataGen and the OLM in relation to OMC-R in controlling a network.
State the different modules contained in the DataGen platform and use them to manipulate GSM Databases.
Learn how to use DataGen to produce Database script files from the compiled Database objects imported
from the GSM Network.
Demonstrate how DataGen can support every customer for 'n-2' software loads.
Explain the DataGen and OLM directory structures and how DataGen interfaces to the OMC-R platform.
Use the practical knowledge gained to perform Database import, upgrade, modification, and export back to
the GSM OMC-R platform.

241 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-OMC03: OMC-R System Administration (E3x00 Platform)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-CP04: UNIX for OMC Users
and/or its equivalent SUN Microsystems system
Audience administration for Solaris users course.
OMC-R System Administrators, Advanced OMC-R
operators, Network Administrators who use OMC-R
extensively. All other engineers with good UNIX
knowledge.

Features
An instructor-led course designed to train personnel in
the system administration of the OMC-R platform.

Course Content
The course includes all tasks and procedures needed to keep the OMC-R running at peak performance. Also
included are setting up accounts, networking, peripheral management, file system backups and troubleshooting.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe and identify the OMC-R hardware, software and relevant documentation.
Perform backups of file systems and relational databases.
Describe different types of restore procedures.
Identify and implement OMC-R system troubleshooting procedures.
Maintain the OMC-R file systems and Relational Database Management Systems.
Identify the operational states of the OMC-R.
Manage the OMC-R X.25 link connectivity.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 242


GSM-OMC04: OMC-R System Administration Workshop (Sun Fire 4800,
Sun Netra 20, Sun Blade 150)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-OMC03: OMC-R System Administration (E3x00
Platform)
Audience
OMC-R System Administrators.

Features
An instructor-led course providing practical training in
the system administration of the OMC-R Sun Fire
4800 Server, Sun Netra 20 Server, Sun Blade 150 GUI
Server and Sun Blade 150 GUI Client. It is assumed
that prospective students have already attended
OMC03 training course.

Course Content
The course focuses on the configuration and installation of the aforementioned hardware platforms as used in a
GSM OMC-R system. Also included are disaster recovery procedures (using file system and INFORMIX
Relational Database Management System backups), and troubleshooting.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify, configure and maintain the OMC-R Sun Fire 4800 Server.
Identify, configure and maintain the OMC-R Sun Netra 20 Server.
Identify, configure and maintain the OMC-R Sun Blade 150 GUI Server and GUI Client.

243 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-SYS01: GSM Interfaces and Protocols

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience
Engineers requiring greater appreciation of interface
structures and formats. Engineers carrying out
protocol analysis.

Features
An instructor-led course providing detailed
information/written exercises associated with the BSS
Terrestrial/Air Interfaces.

Course Content
This course describes the interfaces used in GSM. The course covers an in-depth look at the air interface and
its structure including LAPDm. The Abis and A interfaces are covered along with LAPD and SS7 protocols. The
student will find this course useful for field protocol analysis as the student will see how messages are created
at bit level. By the end of the course the student will be able to navigate the ETSI layer 1, 2 and 3 specifications.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the format of the different burst types and logical channel frame structures on the air interface.
State the format and structure of the Layer 1 connectivity of the Abis, A and OMC-R interfaces.
State the format and structure of Layer 2 and 3 for the air, Abis and A interfaces.
Explain the difference between the Motorola Abis and GSM defined Abis.
State the operation of the GSM protocol stack
Identify ITU-TS Signalling System No. 7, MTP, SCCP, BSSAP.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 244


GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience
System Engineers, BSS Maintenance, Optimization,
Database Engineers, Network Planners. Network
Operator and Administrator Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course introducing the commands of
the BSS database using theory and written exercises.

Course Content
This course describes the elements and construction of the BSS database. Included are parameters required to
configure and add a cell to a Motorola Base site, device and function equipage. students will conduct theoretical
exercises to build an elementary BSS database.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the Air interface including BCCH/CCCH/DCCH
Populate the database fields to create and configure a cell
State the operation of the commands and parameters for Power Control
State the operation of the commands and parameters for basic handovers
State the operation of cell re-selection and associated parameters for C1 and C2 criteria
State the device and function interdependency and equipage within the database structure.

245 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-SYS03: Advanced BSS Database

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience 3 GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
BSS (GSM Network Operators, BSS (GSM) Network Students should review the SYS02 course manual
Planners, BSS (GSM) Engineers and BSS (GSM) prior to attending this course.
Configuration/Optimization Engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course familiarizing students in
practical database building.

Course Content
This course includes theoretical and practical script building for RXCDR, BSC, BTS, PATH and frequency
hopping. Detailed description of Handover and Power Control algorithms are also included.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State and effectively utilize parameters used within the RXCDR, BSC, BTS, PATH and frequency hopping
database script.
Build a RXCDR, BSC, BTS, PATH and frequency hopping database script.
Describe the Power Control, Power Budget and Handover assessment procedures.
Describe criteria 1 & 2 and the use of Quality Flags.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 246


GSM-SYS04: Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience 3 GSM-CP15: Principles of RF Planning
System Engineers, BSS Maintenance, Optimization,
Database Engineers, Network Planners.

Features
An instructor-led course providing detailed information
and written exercises associated with cell and
equipment planning calculations.

Course Content
This course describes all aspects dealing with BSS subsystem planning. Material includes propagation
prediction, interference sources, equalization and air interface planning. Calculating hardware requirements for
all BSS elements is also included in this course.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Carry out power budget calculations to balance a cellular system.
Explain network topology, RXCDR/BSC hardware and CCCH/TCH requirements for a given GSM network.
State the rules for BSS dimensioning.
Carry out the calculations required for BSS dimensioning

247 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-
layered Systems

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience 3 GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
BSS Database, Optimization and Systems Engineers. 4 GSM-SYS03: Advanced BSS Database

Features
An instructor-led course providing detailed information
on Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multi-layered
Systems.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide detailed information on the techniques currently available for increasing the
capacity of a network including microcellular and multi-layer methods.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Provide an overview of all the capacity enhancing and microcellular features available
Describe frequency hopping benefits and principles including the strategies to implement both baseband and
synthesizer frequency hopping
Explain the deployment of microcells including implementation of an in-building solution
Describe the planning required to implement a microcellular/in-building solution including frequency
planning, link budgets and hardware currently available
Explain the microcellular database with the aid of worked exercises. This section includes the seven power
budget algorithms and adaptive handovers
Explain the other capacity enhancing database parameters including congestion relief, concentric cells,
multiband, single BCCH for dual band cells, co-incident multiband and extended range cells.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 248


GSM-WKS01: 3G/2G handover, 2G/3G cell reselection feature workshop
Circuit switched

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day Theory Yes
2 day Theory/Practical
Prerequisite Motorola Courses
Location Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other 1 No prerequisite for course, but aimed at experienced BSS
premises by arrangement. engineers

Audience
BSS (GSM) Network Operators. BSS (GSM) Network
Administrators. BSS (GSM) Engineers and BSS
(GSM) Configuration/ Optimization Engineers

Features
An instructor-led course designed to enable students
to understand the new parameters and massages
involved in the new 3G/2G handover and 2G/3G cell
reselection feature.

Course Content
The course provides a detailed introduction to the 3G/2G handover, 2G/3G cell reselection feature.
Explanations and demonstrations of database and monitoring features of the 3G/2G handover, 2G/3G cell
reselection with student interaction on all aspects and analysis of recorded log files.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the relevant 3GPP TSG standard specifications and Change requests.
State the functionalities of the 3G/2G handover, 2G/3G cell reselection feature as part of GSR6.
State the new and modified MMI commands.
State the new and modified messages.
Decode the new System Info 2quater message.
Describe the message sequence and messages for 3G to 2G handover.
Describe monitoring for troubleshooting for the 3G/2G handover.
Describe monitoring for troubleshooting for the 2G/3G cell reselection.
Demonstrate monitoring for troubleshooting for the 3G/2G handover, 2G/3G cell reselection feature
(Practical course only).

249 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-WKS03: HDPC Workshop

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days 5-Day Theory/Practical with an approximate 30/70
split respectively.
Location
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Prerequisite Motorola Courses
premises by arrangement. Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
1 GSM CP02 Introduction to GSM
Audience 2 GSM BSS11 BSS Operational Theory
BSS (GSM) Network Operators, BSS (GSM) 3 GSM SYS02 Introduction to BSS Database
Engineers, BSS (GSM) Configuration/ Optimization 4 GSM SYS03 Advanced BSS Database
Engineers, BSS(GSM) Network Planner 5 GSM NET01 OMC-R Network Operations
6 GSM NET02 OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
Features
A mainly student-led course, designed to enable
students to reach a thorough understanding of the
standard handover detection and power control
(HDPC) algorithms by practical investigation.
Instructor-led presentation of under-pinning
knowledge is also provided covering all the material
featured in the workshop content.

Course Content
The course provides 19 exercises for the student to complete with the course trainer acting as a facilitator.
These provide the student the opportunity to examine all the database parameters involved with the HDPC
algorithms. This is managed with the aid of TEMs, MDTT and CTP-NT.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Investigate the properties of the measurement report
Investigate the effect of the uplink/downlink maximum power database algorithms
Investigate power control for receive level mechanism
Investigate the power control for downlink quality mechanism
Investigate the DL quality power control weighting algorithm
Investigate the downlink quality handover mechanism
Investigate the handover only maximum power mechanism
Investigate the quality handover bounce protection mechanism
Investigate the quality adaptive handover mechanism
Investigate the interference/intra-cell handover mechanism
Investigate the downlink receive level handover mechanism
Investigate the worse neighbour handover database parameter
Investigate the uplink receive level handover mechanism
Investigate the power budget handover per neighbour and per cell hreqave database algorithms
Investigate the effect of the ms_txpwr_max element of the power budget algorithm
Investigate the power budget adaptive handover mechanism
Investigate the derived handover power level algorithm.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 250


GSM-WKS04: HDPC2 Workshop

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days 5-Day Theory/Practical with an approximate 30/70
split respectively.
Location
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Prerequisite Motorola Courses
premises by arrangement. Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
1 GSM CP02 Introduction to GSM
Audience 2 GSM BSS11 BSS Operational Theory
RF and Database Optimisation Engineers or anyone 3 GSM SYS02 Introduction to BSS Database
wanting a thorough understanding of the optional 4 GSM SYS03 Advanced BSS Database
HDPC mechanisms. The course is also open to engi- or
neers with relevant field experience. 5 GSM NET01 OMC-R Network Operations
6 GSM NET02 OMC-R Advanced Network Operations
7 GSM-WKS03: HDPC Workshop
Features
A mainly student-led course, designed to enable
students to reach a thorough understanding of the
standard handover detection and power control
(HDPC) algorithms by practical investigation.
Instructor-led presentation of under-pinning
knowledge is also provided covering all the material
featured in the workshop content.

Course Content
The course provides 18 exercises for the student to complete with the course trainer acting as a facilitator.
These provide the student the opportunity to examine all the database parameters involved with the HDPC
algorithms. This is managed with the aid of TEMs, MDTT and CTP-NT.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Investigate the directed retry handover mechanism
Investigate the congestion relief type 1 mechanism
Investigate the congestion relief type 2mechanism
Review the PBGT type 1 algorithm mechanism
Investigate the PBGT type 2 algorithm mechanism
Investigate the PBGT type 3 algorithm mechanism
Investigate the PBGT type 4 algorithm mechanism
Investigate the PBGT type 5 algorithm mechanism
Investigate the PBGT type 6 algorithm mechanism
Investigate the PBGT type 7 algorithm mechanism
Investigate the adjacent channel interference avoidance test algorithm mechanism
Investigate the micro-micro quality cause value handover algorithm mechanism
Investigate the power based concentric cells mechanism
Investigate the interference based concentric cells mechanism
Investigate the multiband handover algorithm mechanism
Investigate the advanced load management multiband handover mechanism
Investigate the coincident multiband handover algorithm mechanism
Investigate the single BCCH handover mechanism

251 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GPRS Courses

GPRS Technology courses equip the student with the knowledge required to commission, maintain, monitor and
optimize GPRS networks. It is imperative that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each student
and to ensure that all prerequisite training is completed.

GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory ........................................................................................................... 253


GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS..................................................................................................................... 254
GPRS-CP07A: GPRS Overview (Non -Technical) .............................................................................................. 255
GPRS-GNL140: Overview of GPRS.................................................................................................................... 256
GPRS-GNL141: GPRS Air interface.................................................................................................................... 257
GPRS-GNL142: GPRS Mobility........................................................................................................................... 258
GPRS-GNL143: GPRS Packet Data Operations................................................................................................. 259
GPRS-GSN103: Gateway GPRS Support Node ................................................................................................. 260
GPRS-GSN203: Gateway GPRS Support Node - Advanced .............................................................................. 261
GPRS-PoC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Push To Talk ....................................................................... 263
GPRS-SYS101: GPRS Interfaces and Protocols R99......................................................................................... 264
GPRS-SYS102: BSS (GPRS) Database ............................................................................................................. 265
GPRS-SYS104: BSS (GPRS) Planning............................................................................................................... 266
GPRS-SYS105: Introduction to EGPRS .............................................................................................................. 267

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 252


GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
Audience 3 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
BSS (GPRS) Installation, Commissioning and
Maintenance Engineers. Any GPRS engineer
interested to know the PCU functionality.

Features
An instructor-led course describing the installation and
operation of the Packet Control Unit.

Course Content
A technical introduction indicating where the PCU and SGSN fit into the Motorola GPRS solution. This course
describes the Peripheral Component Connect (PCI) bus principles and operation leading into the operation and
functionality of the Compact PCI (CPCI) chassis in the Motorola GPRS solution. This course also covers the
operation and functionality of the digital cards found in the CPCI chassis, including installation, maintenance and
description of the PCU. The operation and function of the digital cards found in the PCU Chassis and description
of the software processes of the PCU are also explained on this course.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the function of the PCU within GPRS.
Describe the operation of the CPCI chassis.
State the function of each digital module within the PCU.
State the functionality of software processes in a PCU.

253 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 hours - WBT, Instructor Led 2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular.
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
All Engineers engaged in GPRS.

Features
A Self-paced, Web Based Training course designed to
enable students to understand the key concepts,
techniques and protocols that make up the General
Packet Radio Service.

Course Content
The course provides a detailed technical introduction to the General Packet Radio Service (GPRS). The course
describes how GPRS fits into GSM and the advantages of GPRS future enhancements such as EDGE and how
GPRS is a bearer service for WAP. The GPRS network architecture, terrestrial interfaces and air interface are
explained in detail within the course.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the operation of GPRS in relation to a GSM network
State the advantages of GPRS and why increased data rates are required
State the GPRS network architecture, services and quality of service
State the operation of GPRS terrestrial and air interfaces including signalling channels
State GPRS internetworking.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 254


GPRS-CP07A: GPRS Overview (Non -Technical)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 Hours - WBT, 1 day - Instructor Led None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 GSM-CP02A: GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical)
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
The course is intended for non-technical staff requiring
an appreciation of GPRS.

Features
A Self-paced, Web Based Training course providing
non-technical overview information on GPRS.

Course Content
This course covers the principles of a GPRS network and describes the features and network components of a
GPRS network. A short review of GSM is included but GSM-CP02A: GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical) should be
taken as a pre-requisite to GSM-CP07A. A general description of the GPRS air interface is included.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the difference between GSM data calls and GPRS data calls
Identify the elements that create a GPRS network.
State the purpose of the GPRS network elements
State the basic function of the GPRS air interface

255 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GPRS-GNL140: Overview of GPRS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel who seek an overview of GPRS, its
features, and capabilities.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course is an overview of GPRS, its features, and capabilities. This includes those in a design, test, systems
engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, and verification role.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the difference between circuit switched voice and packet data
Understand the limitations of using a circuit to support packet data
Understand the types of applications that will be used in GPRS
Understand why a separate network is needed for data
Understand the new GPRS components
Understand the components that were changed to support data
Understand the key differences between supporting voice and data from the mobile's perspective
Understand the deployment needs in the GSM network to support GPRS
Understand the evolution strategy to UMTS

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 256


GPRS-GNL141: GPRS Air interface

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed
understanding of the GPRS Air Interface. This
includes those in a design, test, systems engineering,
sales engineering, network engineering, and
verification role.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course provides a detailed understanding of the GPRS Air Interface.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the GPRS radio technology
Understand the GPRS spectrum and its relationship to GSM
Understand the channel structure in GPRS
Understand how the GPRS service might be provided using GSM channels
Understand the various radio interface protocols
Understand how multiple users are multiplexed into resources as well as how one user may use multiple
channels
Understand how the "Always Connected" paradigm is supported in GPRS

257 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GPRS-GNL142: GPRS Mobility

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking a detailed understanding of the
processes of signaling and mobility management call
or packet session.This includes those in a design, test,
systems engineering, sales engineering, network
engineering, and verification role.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course details the processes of signaling and mobility management call or packet session.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the radio mobility aspects in GPRS
Understand the requirements of location management within the GPRS network
Understand the mobility management messaging to support mobility in GPRS
Understand the signaling and security requirements of inter-operator roaming
Understand the GPRS Roaming eXchange (GRX) and its use in the GPRS network

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 258


GPRS-GNL143: GPRS Packet Data Operations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking a detailed understanding of the
processes of signaling, call establishment and packet
session establishment.This includes those in a design,
test, systems engineering, sales engineering network
engineering, and verification role.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course details the processes of signaling, call establishment and packet session establishment.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the purpose of the Attach Procedure
Understand the requirements of the Packet Mobility Management layer
Understand the purpose of the Packet Data Protocol context activation procedure
Understand the requirements of the Session Management layer
Understand what GTP is and why it is required
Understand the basics of mobility with a data session activated
Understand the use and procedure of the Packet Data Protocol context for the sake of using a specific
service

259 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GPRS-GSN103: Gateway GPRS Support Node

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-ENG945: Understanding TCP/IP
2 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
Audience 3 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
Optimization engineers, System Engineers, Network 4 GPRS-GSN101: Cisco ICND
Administrators and Network Planners, GPRS
Optimization Engineers, GPRS System Engineers,
GPRS Network Administrators, and GPRS Network
Planners.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a GPRS engineer
with the knowledge to be able to configure and
maintain the GGSN.

Course Content
This course describes the installation, maintenance and troubleshooting of Cisco 7200 Series Routers. The
course includes using Cisco operating system messages and commands. How the LAN and WAN interface
processors function including connection to an Internet Service Provider (ISP) will also be described.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Install, maintain and troubleshoot Cisco GGSN routers.
Describe the GGSN in relation to the GPRS network.
Explain Access Point Names to configure access to networks.
Describe the operation of BGP router.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 260


GPRS-GSN203: Gateway GPRS Support Node - Advanced

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-ENG945: Understanding TCP/IP
2 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
Audience 3 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
Optimisation engineers, Systems Engineers, Network 4 GPRS-GSN101: Cisco ICND
Administrators, and Network Planners. 5 GPRS-GSN103: Gateway GPRS Support Node

Features
An instructor-led course, providing a GPRS engineer
with the knowledge to configure and maintain further
features of the Cisco GGSN (which are not covered in
the GSN103 course).

Course Content
The course considers some of the advanced features of using Cisco GGSN 7200 series routers in a GSN
complex. In addition this course reviews the UMTS architecture and feature support for a 2G to 3G transitional
environment. The course has particular emphasis on features such as Server Load Balancing, Route
Aggregation, and PPP Sessions, which contributes significantly to the optimisation of data traffic through the
GGSN.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the role of the GGSN within UMTS architecture
Understand the requirement, set-up and configuration of Cisco Server Load Balancing for a GGSN group
Provision Dynamic Feedback Protocol in association with Server Load Balancing
Detail the use of PPP for VPN support from the GGSN to a packet switched network
Understand and configure the use of route aggregation
Appreciate features relating to 2G-3G handover and interoperability, where relevant to the function of the
GGSN.

261 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GPRS-PoC100: Push to Talk over Cellular (PoC) Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Attendees are excepted to have a basic knowledge of IP
technology and experience in supporting the carriers network.
Audience
Personnel wanting a technical overview of a Motorola
packet-based switch network, specifically the Push-
To-Talk over Cellular (PoC) Application Server.

Features
Virtual Classroom.

Course Content
This course provides an in depth understanding of the major components and subsystems of the PoC platform,
as well as the interaction of the subsystems.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the various elements of the PoC Hardware Architecture.
Explain the interconnectivity and IP Protocols needed of the PoC server.
Detail the PoC Mobile Operating System (MOBIOS).
Interpret Call processing.
Describe the EMS Software Architecture.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 262


GPRS-PoC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Push To Talk

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 Days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. Attendees are expected to have a basic knowledge of
IP technology and experience in supporting the car-
Audience riers network. Attendees should also be familiar with
Operations personnel involved in the day-to-day oper- Unix (basic commands) and have an understanding of
ations and maintenance of a Motorola packet-based how to establish a telnet session. Some previous class
switch network, specifically the Motorola Push-to-Talk work in VoIP / SIP would be helpful.
over Cellular (PoC) Server.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This module provides an in depth understanding of the major components and subsystems of the PoC platform,
as well as the interaction of the subsystems. Included are tasks related to the daily operation and maintenance
of the PoC server. This class will include hands-on labs to allow the class participants to gain familiarity with the
PoC application (provided terminals are available with connectivity to network).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this module, the student will be able to:
Describe the various elements of the PoC Hardware Architecture.
Explain the interconnectivity and IP Protocols needed of the PoC server
Detail the PoC Mobile Operating System (MOBIOS).
Monitor Alarm/Fault/Performance/Security Management indicators
Analyze call processing subsystem
Configure and Operate the PoC Control Switch and Active Directories.
Describe maintenance activities needed of the PoC server

263 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


GPRS-SYS101: GPRS Interfaces and Protocols R99

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
2 GSM-SYS01: GSM Interfaces and Protocols
Audience 3 GEN-CP08: Frame Relay
BSS (GPRS) Network Operators, BSS (GPRS) 4 GPRS-SYS105: Introduction to EGPRS
Engineers, BSS (GPRS) Configuration/ Optimization
Engineers, BSS (GPRS) Network Planner

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
introduction to (E)GPRS interfaces and protocols at
software release R99.

Course Content
This course covers the protocols, interaction between applications and the different layers of (E)GPRS in
particular (E)GPRS mobility management, air interface, Gb Interface and RLC/MAC.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the (E) GPRS interfaces and protocols.
Illustrate the major functionality of the (E) GPRS Protocols.
Describe the interactions between the RLC/MAC and LLC Protocols.
Describe the interactions between the RLC/MAC and LLC Protocols for EGPRS (R99).
Describe the SNDCP inter-working with the LLC
Describe GTP and GTP' and the operation between GSNs.
Describe GTP-C, GTP-U and GTP' and the operation between GSNs (R99)

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 264


GPRS-SYS102: BSS (GPRS) Database

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
Audience 3 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
BSS (GSM) Network Operators, BSS (GSM) 4 GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory
Engineers, BSS (GSM) Configuration/Optimization 5 GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations
Engineers, and BSS (GSM) Network Planner. 6 GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
7 GPRS-SYS105: Introduction to EGPRS
Features
The course will identify and describe the commands
and parameters for configuration of GPRS/EGPRS in
the BSS system. Detailed within the course will be
equipage of the PCU and the commands and
parameters necessary to configure the GPRS/EGPRS
air interface.

Course Content
BSS (GPRS) network overview. Review of GPRS/EGPRS packet data transfer, protocols and air interface.
Review of PCU hardware/software. Equipping and explaining database commands associated with the PCU, to
enable GPRS/EGPRS in a BSS, including power control.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the air interface structure and the protocol layers for GPRS/EGPRS.
Describe the hardware, software, and communication protocols used in the BSS (GPRS) network and the
device and function interdependency for GPRS/EGPRS in the BSS.
Describe typical BSS (GPRS) configuration, terrestrial traffic and signaling links.
Equip and explain the database fields associated with PCU site configuration.
Equip and describe the parameters associated with equipping GPRS in a BSS (including PBCCH/PCCCH).
Equip and explain the parameters associated with GPRS/EGPRS power control and coding scheme
selection.
Equip and explain the parameters associated with EGPRS power control and Modulation Coding Scheme
Selection.

265 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GPRS-SYS104: BSS (GPRS) Planning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
Audience 3 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
BSS ((E)GPRS) Network Operators, BSS ((E)GPRS) 4 GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory
Engineers, BSS ((E)GPRS) Configuration/ 5 GSM-SYS04: Introduction to BSS Planning and Dimensioning
Optimization Engineers, BSS ((E)GPRS) Network 6 GPRS-SYS105: Introduction to EGPRS
Planner

Features
An instructor-led course providing a description of the
Motorola recommended planning guidelines for the
BSS elements of a (E) GPRS network.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide an overview of the BSS planning parameters, including traffic model and
capacity calculations, category of service and site planning. Description of the BSS features that Support
EGPRS.A description of all the steps required for a EGPRS network plan. Explanation of cell plans versus mean
BLER and percentage of time that CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4 and MCS 1-9 are utilized. Explanation of the
calculations to determine the number of PDTCHs, PBCCH, PCCCH and the file transfer size between mobile
and SGSN. Description of the interaction of the PCU statistic collection process with the BSC for statistic
reporting detailing: PSSP, CSP, Local DPROC statistics collection, GGL, accessibility, and throughput statistics.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the parameters required for BSS planning.
Describe the (E) GPRS Features and planning processes supported by a Motorola BSS.
Describe the Motorola products and interfaces supported by the (E) GPRS BSS.
State the recommended steps used to plan a (E) GPRS network, estimate network traffic and choose a cell
plan to determine the expected BLock Error Rate (BLER).
Determine how long it takes to transfer a file of an arbitrary size over the Um to Gi interface.
State the PCU provisioning rules used to determine the type and number of DPROC boards to populate the
PCUs.
State the rules and calculate the signalling link requirements for the BSC and PCU in support of (E)GPRS.
State the rules and calculate the PBCCH and PCCCH requirements for the BSC and PCU in support of
EGPRS.
Describe the interaction of the PCU in relation to the BSC for statistics.
Revise the six statistical data types how each type collects and reports data.
Describe the GBL statistics how the statistics measure data throughput.
State the Accessibility Statistics and where they are incremented given related ladder diagrams.
Set bin ranges for distribution statistics.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 266


GPRS-SYS105: Introduction to EGPRS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
Audience
BSS (GPRS) Network Operators, BSS (GPRS)
Engineers, BSS (GPRS) Configuration/ Optimization
Engineers, BSS(GPRS) Network Planner

Features
An instructor-led course designed to enable students
to understand the new modulation methods and
coding schemes used in EGPRS, also explaining the
development from EDGE to the emergence of
EGPRS, describing the new block formats and
Protocol stack changes feature.

Course Content
The course provides a detailed introduction to the evolution of EGPRS and the new modulation methods
involved with it, it also explains the new RLC/MAC block formats used and the different effects that this has on
the retransmission of data. The course also provides detailed explanation of the new data encoding methods
used and the family association inherent with the new encoding. The access method of EGPRS and
acknowledged operation are also covered introducing the network operator with the new implementation of the
high data rates EGPRS offers.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the evolution from EDGE to the development of EGPRS
Explain the changes in the lower layers of the protocol stack in GRPS.
Describe the new physical layer in EGPRS.
State the new and modified messages used in EGPRS.
Explain the new modulation scheme 8-MSK.
Describe the higher through put rates over the air interface with EGPRS.
Describe the function of puncturing schemes and their role in retransmission.
Explain the new modulation and coding schemes used in EGPRS.
State the function of acknowledged operation and the different functions in ARQ 1 and ARQ 2.

267 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GPRS-SYS105: Introduction to EGPRS

268 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS Courses

The UMTS Technology courses are currently under development, fundamental courses are
available now as advertised on the following pages, with all product specific courses being
advertised when available.

UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS..................................................................................................................... 270


UMTS-GNL144: Overview of UMTS .................................................................................................................... 271
UMTS-GNL145: UMTS/W-CDMA Air Interface Fundamentals............................................................................ 272
UMTS-GSN207: Sun Enterprise Cluster 3 Administration................................................................................... 273
UMTS-GSN208: Sun StorEdge Volume Manager Administration ....................................................................... 274
UMTS-GSN209: Charging Gateway .................................................................................................................... 275
UMTS-GSN212: C-SGSN Hardware System and Installation ............................................................................. 276
UMTS-v2.0 HLR01: Motorola v2.0 HLR Hardware Structure and System Overview .......................................... 277
UMTS-v2.0 HLR02: Motorola v2.0 HLR Provisioning .......................................................................................... 278
UMTS-v2.0 HLR03: Motorola v2.0 HLR Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 279
UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure ............................................................................................. 280
UMTS-MTS-U02: Motorola MTS-U Operations and Maintenance....................................................................... 281
UMTS-MTS-U03: MTS-U Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 282
UMTS-MTS-U MGW 01: MTS-U MGW Hardware and Structure and System Overview .................................... 283
UMTS-MTS-U MGW 02: MTS-U MGW Provisioning........................................................................................... 284
UMTS-MTS-U MGW 03: Motorola MTS-U MGW Troubleshooting...................................................................... 285
UMTS-NET201: OMCu Network Operations ....................................................................................................... 286
UMTS-NET203: UTRAN Network Performance .................................................................................................. 287
UMTS-NET211: OMC-T Network Operations...................................................................................................... 288
UMTS-OMCu-S 01: Motorola OMCu-S Network Operations............................................................................... 289
UMTS-RNS01: RNS Operational Overview......................................................................................................... 290
UMTS-RNS02: RNS Operations and Maintenance ............................................................................................. 291
UMTS-SYS201 M1: UTRAN Air-Interface Protocols ........................................................................................... 292
UMTS-SYS201 M2: UTRAN Terrestrial Protocols............................................................................................... 294
UMTS-SYS202 Module 1: UTRAN RNS Basic Database Parameters................................................................ 296
UMTS-SYS202 Module 2: UTRAN RNS Database Radio Resource Management Parameters......................... 297
UMTS-SYS204: UMTS Radio Planning............................................................................................................... 298
UMTS-SYS205: HSDPA System Engineering and Protocols.............................................................................. 300
UMTS-SYS206: UMTS Rel. 4, 5 and 6 Core Network Architecture & Signaling - BICC, VoIP, PoC, IMS & SIP 302
UMTS-SYS212: C-SGSN Data Interface Configuration ...................................................................................... 303
UMTS-SYS213: C-SGSN Context Interfaces Configuration................................................................................ 304
UMTS-TEL1226: Understanding UMTS .............................................................................................................. 305

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 269


UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-CP06: Asynchronous Transfer Mode
2 GEN-CP09: TCP/IP
Audience
This course is intended for technical staff requiring a
detailed appreciation of UMTS technology and its
applications

Features
An instructor-led course providing an introduction to
UMTS technology including network architecture,
UMTS protocols, the principles of W-CDMA, the
UMTS air interface and Radio Management functions

Course Content
This course gives a generic overview of UMTS principles. It gives an outline of the evolution paths from GSM to
3G, describes the basic UMTS network architecture and services and gives descriptions of the functions of the
Network Elements. Details of the protocol structures, terrestrial interfaces, radio physical layer and radio
management functions are also covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the evolution of UMTS from GSM systems and the services it plans to deliver
Describe the architecture of a UMTS network and state the purpose of the major network components
Describe the general protocol model for UMTS and state the interface specific protocol structures
Describe the transport mechanisms to be used for the UMTS Transport Network
Describe the W-CDMA Spreading and Scrambling Procedures
Describe the procedures performed by the air interface physical layer and state the UMTS channel structure
Describe the Radio Resource and Mobility Management functions

270 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-GNL144: Overview of UMTS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking an overview of UMTS, its features,
and capabilities.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of UMTS, its features, and capabilities.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Enumerate some of the applications that are envisioned for mobile phones of the future
Provide a summary of the limitations of the current wireless network, the 2nd generation system
Explain the key characteristics of 3rd generation systems and the genesis of UMTS
Highlight key characteristics of UMTS including QoS
Outline the path for UMTS standards release structure and timeline
Understand the 2G GSM and 2.5G EDGE/GPRS networks and their evolution to the UMTS architecture
Explain the traffic flow process in a GPRS network
Identify the elements of the UMTS architecture and understand their interfaces
Explain how the roles of network components have changed from 2G and 2.5G architectures to those of the
UMTS architecture
Describe traffic delivery of circuit switched and packet switched information within the UTMS network

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 271


UMTS-GNL145: UMTS/W-CDMA Air Interface Fundamentals

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
( http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
Personnel seeking a detailed understanding of the W-
CDMA air interface that is used in UMTS.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the W-CDMA air interface that is used in
UMTS. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, and
verification role.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the basics of W-CDMA
Discuss spreading factor codes in UMTS W-CDMA
Understand the use of scrambling codes for source identification in both the uplink and downlink in W-CDMA
Describe power control operations in the UMTS W-CDMA system
Understand the basics of soft handoff processing from the perspective of the physical layer
Describe the features designed into the W-CDMA system which enable high data rates
Describe the features designed into the W-CDMA system which enable high data rates
Describe the types of channels found in the UMTS radio interface and their purpose
Describe how concurrent services are supported by UMTS radio interface

272 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-GSN207: Sun Enterprise Cluster 3 Administration

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. These courses are available from Sun Educational Services, or
alternatively may be booked through Motorola Training as a
Audience buyout option.
This training is aimed at Solaris System 1 Sun Solaris System Administration parts 1 and 2.
Administrators who will be responsible for maintaining 2 UMTS-GSN208: Sun StorEdge Volume Manager
the USP1 Charging Gateway. The Motorola training Administration
center should be contacted to discuss arrangement of
this training course.

Features
A training course providing the in-depth knowledge
allowing students to administer the Sun Enterprise
Cluster. Students will gain the understanding of the
hardware and software that comprise the Sun Cluster,
the use of Sun Cluster administration tools,
commands and disk space management.

Course Content
The course includes Sun Enterprise Cluster hardware and software installation, configuration and operation.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Install the hardware and software for the Sun Enterprise Cluster platform.
Interpret the Cluster status
Configure the Terminal Concentrator
Configure Resource Groups
Explain the need for Public Network Management
List the events that can trigger a cluster reconfiguration

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 273


UMTS-GSN208: Sun StorEdge Volume Manager Administration

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Sun Solaris System Administration parts 1 and 2. These courses
are available from Sun Educational Services, or alternatively may
Audience be booked through Motorola Training as a buyout option.
This training is aimed at Solaris System
Administrators who will be responsible for maintaining
the USP1 Charging Gateway. The Motorola training
center should be contacted to discuss arrangement of
this training course.

Features
This is the generic Veritas Volume Manager training
course available from Sun. This training course
provides the in-depth knowledge allowing students to
administer the Veritas Volume Manager software.

Course Content
This course provides students with the essential knowledge and skills needed to install, configure, and
administer Veritas Volume Manager software.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to explain:
Sun Storage Devices
RAID overview
Veritas Volume Manager installation
Veritas Volume Manager operations

274 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-GSN209: Charging Gateway

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Proposed 2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
Audience 3 GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles
This training is aimed at USP1 engineers responsible 4 GEN-CP09: TCP/IP
for maintaining the Charging Gateway. 5 GPRS-GSN101: Cisco ICND
6 Sun Solaris System Administration parts 1 and 2.
7 GPRS-GSN108: Sun StorEdge Volume Manager
Features Administration
An instructor lead course enabling Sun Enterprise 8 GPRS-GSN107: Sun Cluster 3 Administration
Cluster trained engineers to configure the GSN3/
USP1 CG equipment.

Course Content
This course provides a comprehensive description of the Charging Gateway application resident on Sun Cluster
3 with Sun StorEdge Volume Manager software.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the hardware elements of the Charging Gateway
Describe the software elements of the Charging Gateway
State the function of the Charging Gateway within the PLMN
Describe the various operations available for the Charging Gateway
Describe the interaction between the Charging Gateway and all other PLMN elements
State the content of all Call Data Records
Describe the alarms raised by the Charging Gateway platform
Describe the installation stages of Sun Solaris, Sun Cluster, and the Charging Gateway application

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 275


UMTS-GSN212: C-SGSN Hardware System and Installation

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
2 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
Audience 3 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
GSN Installation Commissioning and Maintenance
Engineers. GSN Network Operators. GSN Network
Administrators. GSN Network Planners and GSN
Optimization Engineers

Features
This course provides an overview of the C-SGSN
USP1/GSN3 complex hardware, software functional
areas and LMT. It covers the physical installation
requirements of the C-SGSN.

Course Content
The hardware structure of the C-SGSN including cabinets, shelves and cards.
The Installation of C-SGSN component parts
The operation of the Local Maintenance terminal

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the structure BNET Cabinet and shelf
Describe the operation of the board function of the PSM shelf
Describe the C-SGSN logical subsystems
Describe the different boards of the BNET and PSM and the functions that they provide
Describe the different boards of the power distribution box and fan frame and the functions they provide
Outline the steps for hardware installation
Describe the process of cabinet installation on anti static and cement floors
Describe the process for shockproof mounting and connection of cabinets
Describe the installation of the LAN switch, shelf and boards in the cabinet
Describe the installation of the cabinet cables
Describe and carry out the Hardware installation check
Describe the concept and function of the LMT
Describe the interconnection of LMT and SGSN
Use the LMT to create commands and parameters
Identify the different modes of operation of the LMT and available functionality

276 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-v2.0 HLR01: Motorola v2.0 HLR Hardware Structure and System
Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
2 UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure
Audience 3 UMTS-MTS-U MGW 01: MTS-U MGW Hardware and
The target audience for the course is personnel to be Structure and System Overview
employed in one of the following job sets:
The O&M (Operation and Maintenance) staff of the
Motorola v2.0 HLR.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an overview of the
Motorola v2.0 HLR Hardware and system structure.

Course Content
The aim of this course is to train customers in Motorola v2.0 HLR Hardware and System Structure.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the architecture of the Motorola v2.0 HLR, including Motorola v2.0 HLR system structure, protocol
introduction, communication flow, code and decode technology.
System overview, description of the software structure and the hardware structure. Introduction to the
hardware of Motorola v2.0 HLR, and general knowledge of wire distribution. The principle of the hardware
configuration.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 277


UMTS-v2.0 HLR02: Motorola v2.0 HLR Provisioning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


7 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
2 UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure
Audience 3 UMTS-MTS-U MGW 01: MTS-U MGW Hardware and
The target audience for the course is O&M (Operation Structure and System Overview
and Maintenance) staff of the Motorola v2.0 HLR. 4 UMTS-v2.0 HLR01: Motorola v2.0 HLR Hardware Structure
and System Overview
Features
An instructor-led course

Course Content
The aim of this course is to train customers in Motorola v2.0 HLR Provisioning. The first part is Motorola v2.0
HLR data configuration. Including hardware data configuration, local office configuration, interfaces data
configuration, service data configuration, charging data configuration, software commissioning. The second
part is Motorola v2.0 HLR daily maintenance. Including operation of LMT, hardware management, trace
management, alarm management, performance management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain Motorola v2.0 HLR data configuration, including hardware data configuration, local office
configuration, interfaces data configuration, service data configuration, charging data configuration, software
commissioning.
Explain Motorola v2.0 HLR daily maintenance, including operation of LMT, hardware management, trace
management, alarm management, performance management.

278 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-v2.0 HLR03: Motorola v2.0 HLR Troubleshooting

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
2 UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure
Audience 3 UMTS-MTS-U MGW 01: MTS-U MGW Hardware and
The target audience for the course is personnel to be Structure and System Overview
employed in one of the following job sets: 4 UMTS-v2.0 HLR01: Motorola v2.0 HLR Hardware Structure
and System Overview
The O&M (Operation and Maintenance) staff of the
5 UMTS-v2.0 HLR02: Motorola v2.0 HLR Provisioning
Motorola v2.0 HLR.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an overview of the
Motorola v2.0 HLR troubleshooting techniques.

Course Content
The aim of this course is to train customers in Motorola v2.0 HLR troubleshooting techniques.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Basic troubleshooting methods and process, typical case study, and simulated troubleshooting exercises.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 279


UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2.5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Motorola Beijing training facility, or other premises by Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
arrangement. 1 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling

Audience
The target audience for the course is personnel to be
employed in one of the following job sets:
The O&M (Operation and Maintenance) staff of the
Motorola MTS-U.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
description of the Motorola MTS-U.

Course Content
The aim of this course is to train customers in the hardware and system overview of the Motorola MTS-U.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the function, architecture and structure of the Motorola MTS-U.
Including MTS-U network structure, communication flow, protocol introduction, data-communication
technology, service introduction.
System overview, description of the software structure and the hardware structure. Introduction to the
hardware of MTS-U, and general knowledge of wire distribution. The principle of the hardware configuration.

280 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-MTS-U02: Motorola MTS-U Operations and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


8 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Motorola Beijing training facility, or other premises by Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
arrangement. 1 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling

Audience
The target audience for the course is O&M (Operation
and Maintenance) staff of the Motorola MTS-U.

Features
An instructor-led course providing procedures to
perform the routine operation and maintenance of the
Motorola MTS-U.

Course Content
This course provides the Operations and Maintenance procedures of the MTS-U. The first part is MTS-U
data configuration, including local office data configuration, hardware data configuration, interfaces data
configuration, service data configuration, software commissioning.The second part is MTS-U daily
maintenance, including operation of LMT, hardware management, billing management, trace management,
alarm management, performance management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform MTS-U data configuration, including local office data configuration, hardware data configuration,
interfaces data configuration, service data configuration, software commissioning.
Perform MTS-U daily maintenance, including operation of LMT, hardware management, billing management,
trace management, alarm management, performance management.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 281


UMTS-MTS-U03: MTS-U Troubleshooting

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1.5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Motorola Beijing training facility, or other premises by Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
arrangement. 1 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
2 UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure
Audience 3 UMTS-MTS-U02: Motorola MTS-U Operations and
The target audience for the course is personnel to be Maintenance
employed in one of the following job sets:
The O&M (Operation and Maintenance) staff of the
Motorola MTS-U.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an overview of the
Motorola MTS-U troubleshooting techniques.

Course Content
The aim of this course is to train customers in Motorola MTS-U troubleshooting techniques.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform basic troubleshooting methods and process, typical case study, and simulated troubleshooting
exercises.

282 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-MTS-U MGW 01: MTS-U MGW Hardware and Structure and
System Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Motorola Beijing training facility, or other premises by Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
arrangement. 1 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
2 UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure
Audience
The target audience for the course is O&M (Operation
and Maintenance) staff of the Motorola MTS-U MGW.

Features
Instructor-led course providing an overview of the
Motorola MTS-U MGW Hardware and system
structure.

Course Content
The aim of this course is to train customers in Motorola MTS-U MGW Hardware and Structure.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain Motorola MTS-U MGW system structure, protocol introduction, communication flow, code and
decode technology
Discuss the System overview including the software and the hardware structure
Identify the hardware of Motorola MTS-U MGW, including general wire distribution.
Discuss the principle of the hardware configuration

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 283


UMTS-MTS-U MGW 02: MTS-U MGW Provisioning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Motorola Beijing training facility, or other premises by Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
arrangement. 1 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
2 UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure
Audience 3 UMTS-MTS-U MGW 01: MTS-U MGW Hardware and
The target audience for the course is personnel to be Structure and System Overview
employed in one of the following job sets:
The O&M (Operation and Maintenance) staff of the
Motorola MTS-U MGW.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an overview of the
provisioning of a Motorola MTS-U MGW

Course Content
The aim of this course is to train customers in Motorola MTS-U MGW Provisioning. The first part is Motorola
MTS-U MGW data configuration, including hardware data configuration, local office configuration, interfaces
data configuration, service data configuration, charging data configuration, software commissioning. The
second part is Motorola MTS-U MGW daily maintenance, including operation of LMT, hardware
management, trace management, alarm management, performance management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain Motorola MTS-U MGW data configuration, including hardware data configuration, local office
configuration, interfaces data configuration, service data configuration, charging data configuration, software
commissioning.
Explain Motorola MTS-U MGW daily maintenance, including operation of LMT, hardware management, trace
management, alarm management, performance management.

284 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-MTS-U MGW 03: Motorola MTS-U MGW Troubleshooting

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Motorola Beijing training facility, or other premises by Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
arrangement. 1 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
2 UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure
Audience 3 UMTS-MTS-U MGW 01: MTS-U MGW Hardware and
The target audience for the course is personnel to be Structure and System Overview
employed in one of the following job sets: 4 UMTS-MTS-U MGW 02: MTS-U MGW Provisioning
The O&M (Operation and Maintenance) staff of the
Motorola MTS-U.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an overview of the
Motorola MTS-U MGW troubleshooting techniques.

Course Content
This course provides an overview in Motorola MTS-U MGW troubleshooting techniques.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Preform basic troubleshooting methods and process on typical case study and simulated troubleshooting
exercises

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 285


UMTS-NET201: OMCu Network Operations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
2 RNS01: RNS Operational Theory
Audience
The course is intended for Motorola OMCu Network
Operators and Motorola OMCu Network
Administrators.

Features
An instructor-led practical course designed to train
personnel in the daily tasks of network operation.
students will learn to use the OMCu to carry out tasks
such as alarm, configuration, load, and performance
management.

Course Content
This course introduces UMTS engineers to the Motorola OMCu as a tool for maintaining network Quality of
Service, covering all the functional areas of the OMCu including Fault Management, Configuration
Management, Load Management and Performance Management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the principal hardware, software and protocols used in the OMCu.
Explain Fault Management techniques, alarm handling and tools available.
View and change UTRAN parameters, including the use of parameter propagation, and creation of Network
Elements.
Perform software and database updates using the OMCu.
Generate on-line statistics via the OMCu and examine background statistics using Business Objects.

286 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-NET203: UTRAN Network Performance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days No

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
2 RNS01: RNS Operational Theory
Audience 3 SYS202: RNS Database Parameters
Optimization engineers, System Engineers, Network
Administrators and Network Planners.

Features
An instructor-led course designed to enable the
student to understand the origin of statistics generated
by the Motorola UTRAN.

Course Content
This course covers the statistics that are to be monitored on the Motorola UTRAN.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the Network elements that will provide statistical information on the UTRAN system.
State the benefits of gathering statistics and the principle equipment used to implement statistical reporting.
Explain the procedure in the event of a Network element reset during a statistical interval.
State the main UTRAN procedures that are monitored by using statistics.
Describe the four methods of gathering statistical information.
Explain the function of each method of gathering statistical information.
State the function of the UTRAN Transport Layer.
State the Statistics used for GTP-U Measurements.
Describe the Function of the GTP-U Statistics.
State the Statistics used by SCCP
Describe the function of the SCCP Statistics
State the Statistics used by SAAL
Describe the function of the SAAL Statistics
Describe the Function of the logical O&M.
State the statistics used by the logical O&M
Describe the Function of the Logical O&M Statistics
State the Function of the Radio Network Connection Management
State the Purpose of the Radio Network Connection Management
State the Statistics used for Radio Network Connection Management.
Describe the Function of the Radio Network Connection Management Statistics.
State the Statistics used for Call Management.
Describe the Function of the Call Management Statistics.
State the Statistics used for Radio Resource Management.
Describe the Function of the Radio Resource Management Statistics.
State the function of the UTRAN KEY Statistics
State the Purpose of the KEY Statistics
State the Key Statistics Available and the function of each key statistic.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 287


UMTS-NET211: OMC-T Network Operations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Proposed 3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
Audience 3 UMTS-GSN212: C-SGSN Hardware System and Installation
The course is intended for Network Operators and
Network Administrators.

Features
An instructor led practical course designed to train
personnel in the daily tasks of network operation.
students will learn to use the OMC-T to carry out tasks
such as alarm, configuration, load, and performance
management.

Course Content
This course introduces engineers to the Motorola OMC-T as a tool for maintaining network Quality of Service,
covering all the functional areas of the OMC-T including Fault Management, Configuration Management, Load
Management and Performance Management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the principal hardware, software and protocols used in the OMC-T.
Explain Fault Management techniques, alarm handling and tools available.
View and change GSN parameters, including the use of parameter propagation, and creation of Network
Elements.
Perform software and database updates using the OMC-T.
Generate on-line statistics via the OMC-T and examine background statistics.
Describe the principle function of all Interfaces to the OMC-T.

288 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-OMCu-S 01: Motorola OMCu-S Network Operations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Motorola Beijing training facility, or other premises by Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
arrangement. 1 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
2 UMTS-MTS-U01: System and Hardware Structure
Audience 3 UMTS-MTS-U MGW 01: MTS-U MGW Hardware and
The target audience for the course is personnel to be Structure and System Overview
employed in one of the following job sets: 4 UMTS-v2.0 HLR01: Motorola v2.0 HLR Hardware Structure
and System Overview
The O&M (Operation and Maintenance) staff of the
Motorola OMCu-S 01.

Features
An instructor-led course providing procedures to
perform the routine operation and maintenance of the
Motorola 3G circuit core using the OMCu-S.

Course Content
The aim of this course is to train selected engineers in the Operations and Maintenance procedures of the
Motorola 3G circuit core using the OMCu-S.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform all Network Operations on MTS-U, MTS-U MGW and v2.0 HLR using the OMCu-S.
Perform installation and troubleshooting techniques.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 289


UMTS-RNS01: RNS Operational Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS

Audience
This course is intended technical staff requiring a very
detailed description of the RNC and Node B UTRAN
equipment.

Features
An instructor-led course providing introduction to the
architecture of the RNC and Node B, including
descriptions of Cabinet and Processor boards.

Course Content
This course give a generic review of the UMTS Network explaining where the RNC and Node B are situated and
stating the functions of each node within the UMTS Network. Also, explained are the functions and architecture
of the RNC and Node B equipment (including the outdoor Node B).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the functions and architecture of the Radio Network Controller (RNC).
Describe the RNC service processing functions and applications.
Describe the RNC External Interfaces.
Describe the Available RNC Cabinet configurations.
Name the component parts of the RNC Cabinets and state their purpose.
Describe the functional structure of the RNC5000.
Describe the RNC5000 system signalling and data flows.
Describe the structure of the RNC5000 sub-systems.
Describe the structure and basic operation of the Switch Unit circuit boards.
Describe the structure and basic operation of the System Unit circuit boards.
Describe the RNC5000 power sub-system.
Describe the RNC5000 fan subrack.
Describe the structure and functions of the RNC5000 OA&M subsystem.
Describe the structure and basic operation of the RNC5000 O&M subsystem component parts.
Describe the function and basic operation of the Local Manager
Describe the functions and architecture of the Motorola Node B.
Describe the Motorola Node B Internal Interfaces.
Describe the Motorola Node B Software Architecture.
Describe the Motorola Node B chassis and Identify its component parts.
Describe the operation of the Motorola Node B cabinet power supply and temperature control system.
Describe the simplified operation of the Motorola Node B Digital and Radio Frequency (RF) modules.
Describe the Node B outdoor cabinets and identify its component parts.
Identify and Describe the basic operation of the Node B outdoor enclosure power system components.
Identify and Describe the basic operation of the Node B outdoor enclosure Heat Management System (HMS)
components.
Identify and Describe the basic operation of the Node B outdoor enclosure Alarm system components.

290 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-RNS02: RNS Operations and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
2 RNS01: RNS Operational Theory
Audience
The target audience for the course is personnel to be
employed in one of the following job sets: a. UTRAN
Installation and Maintenance Engineers

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
description of the Installation and Maintenance of the
Motorola RNC and Node B.

Course Content
The aim of this course is to train selected engineers in the installation and commissioning of the Motorola RNS
products.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the generic site planning requirements and considerations for a radio network sub-system (RNS)
installation
Describe the generic procedures that should be adopted when visiting an RNS site for installation/
commissioning
Describe the RNC cabinet installation procedures
Describe the RNC power up and verification procedures
Describe the RNC5000 software installation procedure
Describe the procedures to prepare a node B indoor cabinet for installation
Describe the node B cabinet installation procedures
Describe the node B indoor power up and verification procedures
Describe the node B staging process
Perform node B ATP
Describe the procedures to instal the node B outdoor enclosure

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 291


UMTS-SYS201 M1: UTRAN Air-Interface Protocols

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
2 Good understanding of protocols.
Audience
This course is intended technical staff requiring a very
detailed description of the UMTS UTRAN Terrestrial
Protocols.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
description of the RRC, RLC/MAC and Layer 1
protocols used on the Air Interface for WCDMA.

292 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-SYS201 M1: UTRAN Air-Interface Protocols

Course Content
This course provides comprehensive description of RRC, RLC/MAC and Layer 1 used between the RNS and
the UE in a WCDMA UMTS System. Also, the course covers BMC and PDCP protocols together with signalling
flows to explain how the protocols communicate for different signalling procedures.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the main features of the UMTS structure and component interfaces.
State the main principles of CDMA.
State the main functions of the UMTS channels.
Describe the General Protocol Model for UMTS.
Describe the interface specific protocol structure for the following interfaces: IuCS, IuPS, lub, lur, UU
Describe the Specification Numbering Structure.
State the main principles of UE identification and operating modes.
Describe the location, functions and different states of RRC.
Describe the logical and physical structures for RRC.
Describe all messages, their purpose and message categories.
Describe the functions and services of the RLC protocol.
Acknowledge the primitive and primitive parameters used in RLC.
Describe the RLC protocol states.
Describe the logical and physical structure for RLC.
Describe the working of the state variables.
Describe the usage of the MAC Protocol.
Describe the primitive and primitive parameters used in MAC.
Describe the logical and physical structure for MAC.
Describe the relationship between RLC and MAC protocols.
Explain what modes are used for different channels.
Describe the location of PDCP and BMC.
Describe the functions of PDCP and BMC.
Describe the primitives used for PDCP and BMC.
Describe the logical and physical structure for PDCP and BMC.
State the Functions of the Iu UP Protocol
Describe the Information Elements of the Iu UP Frame
State the format and contents of the GTP U Header
State the Functions of the GTP U message header elements
Describe the Message formats relative to GTP U
State the purpose of the Messages relevant to GTP U

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 293


UMTS-SYS201 M2: UTRAN Terrestrial Protocols

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
2 Good understanding of protocols.
Audience
This course is intended technical staff requiring a very
detailed description of the UMTS UTRAN Terrestrial
Protocols.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
description of the NBAP, RANAP, RNSAP, IuFP, GTP-
U and Air Interface Framing Protocols.

294 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-SYS201 M2: UTRAN Terrestrial Protocols

Course Content
This course provides comprehensive description of NBAP, RANAP, RNSAP, Protocols used in a WCDMA UMTS
System. Also, the course covers IuFP, GTP-U and IuB Framing protocols together with signalling flows to
explain how the protocols communicate for different signalling procedures.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the different interfaces used in the UTRAN
State the protocol software locations in the UTRAN
Describe the basic roles of the RNC
Describe the basic connection and call establishment procedure in the UTRAN
Describe the Services offered by NBAP
Describe the functions offered by NBAP
Describe the elementary procedures of NBAP
Explain the Differences between Class 1 and Class 2 messages
State the purpose of the fields that make up a NBAP Message.
Describe the message layout of a NBAP Message.
Describe the Allocation/Retention process for a NBAP Message.
Describe the Preemption process for a NBAP Message.
Describe the protocol error handling procedure for a NBAP Message.
Describe the Services offered by RANAP
Describe the functions offered by RANAP
Describe the elementary procedures of RANAP
Explain the Differences between Class 1 Class 2 and Class 3 messages
Describe the Services offered by RNSAP
Describe the functions offered by RNSAP
Describe the elementary procedures of RNSAP
Explain the Differences between Class 1 and Class 2 messages
Describe the Services offered by the DCH Framing Protocol
Describe the Frame structure and coding of the DCH Framing Protocol.
Describe the Information elements of the DCH Framing Protocol.
Describe the Services offered by the CCCH Framing Protocol.
Describe the Frame structure and coding of the CCCH Framing Protocol.
Describe the Information elements of the CCCH Framing Protocol.
State the General aspects of the Iu UP Protocol
State the Modes of Operation of the Iu UP Protocol
Describe the Frame Formats used by the Iu UP Protocol
State the Functions of the Iu UP Protocol
Describe the Information Elements of the Iu UP Frame
State the format and contents of the GTP U Header
State the Functions of the GTP U message header elements
Describe the Message formats relative to GTP U
State the purpose of the Messages relevant to GTP U

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 295


UMTS-SYS202 Module 1: UTRAN RNS Basic Database Parameters

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days 20% :Database script production and execution
exercises.
Location
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Prerequisite Motorola Courses
premises by arrangement. Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
Audience 2 UMTS-RNS01: RNS Operational Overview
This course is intended for technical staff requiring a
very detailed description of the UMTS UTRAN RNS
Database parameters.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
description of the RNC database configuration
(Excluding Radio Resource Management Algorithm
parameter configuration).

Course Content
This course provides a comprehensive description of RNC database configurations, including Cabinet, sub-rack
and board configuration, together with Transport Network Layer and Radio Network Layer configuration
(excluding Radio Resource Management algorithm parameter configuration).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe for the RNC5000;
Data configuration procedure
Configuration state management procedures
Load management procedures
System configuration procedures
Sub-rack configuration procedures
Board configuration procedures
Original signalling point configuration procedures
Iub interface configuration process
Physical layer configuration process for atm over e1 or e1 over sdh
Atm layer configuration process
Saal layer configuration process
Iub port configuration process
Q.aal2 layer configuration process
Aal2 path configuration process
Mc location information configuration procedures
Local and logical cell configuration process
Logical cell add basic cell information procedure
Pcpich, pccpch, bch, psch and ssch configuration procedure
Sccpch configuration procedure
Prach configuration procedure
Cell ura configuration procedure
Cell system information configuration procedure
Neighbour cell configuration process
Neighboring rnc cell basic information configuration procedure

296 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-SYS202 Module 2: UTRAN RNS Database Radio Resource
Management Parameters

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days 20% :Database script production and execution
exercises.
Location
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Prerequisite Motorola Courses
premises by arrangement. Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
Audience 2 UMTS-RNS01: RNS Operational Overview
This course is intended for technical staff requiring a 3 UMTS-SYS202 Module 1: UTRAN RNS Basic Database
very detailed description of the UMTS UTRAN RNS Parameters
Database parameters.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
description of the RNC database Radio Resource
Management Algorithm parameter configuration.

Course Content
Designed to be a follow on course to SYS202 Module 1, this course provides a comprehensive description of
RNC database, Radio Resource Management algorithm parameter configuration.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe for the RNC5000:
Selection of RRM functions
Call Admission Control (CAC) configuration procedures
Load and Congestion Control (LCC) configuration procedures
Potential User Control (PUC) configuration procedures
Inter-carrier Load Balancing (LDB) configuration procedures
Handover Control configuration procedures
Compressed Mode Configuration procedures
Power Control configuration procedures
Adaptive Multi-rate (AMR) Rate Control configuration procedures
Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC) configuration procedures

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 297


UMTS-SYS204: UMTS Radio Planning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
2 GSM-CP15: Principles of RF Planning
Audience 3 Good background in radio planning.
This course is intended personnel to be employed in
one of the following jobset: UTRAN Network Planner,
UTRAN Optimization Engineer, and UTRAN Network
Operator.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an introduction to
UMTS technology including network architecture,
UMTS protocol, the principles of W-CDMA, the UMTS
air interface and radio management functions.

298 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-SYS204: UMTS Radio Planning

Course Content
This course gives a detailed understanding of all parameters that need to be considered for Radio Planning a
UMTS WCDMA network and what procedures need to be followed. Also, taking into account all factors that
need to be considered with planning.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the inputs required to plan a UMTS radio network.
State how the number of channel elements needed per cell are calculated.
State how the Transmission Line requirements and capacities are determined.
State how the number of Network elements required are determined.
State and describe the possible frequency re-use schemes to include, One to One frequency re-use,
Hierarchical Cell Structures (HCS) and Site Sectorization.
State and describe the inputs required to estimate the capacity of a cell and number of cells required in a
geographical area, to include: Population in a given area, traffic per user, Number of wireless users, Wireless
user busy hour, Offered traffic, cell range, and Type of Subscriber.
Name and describe the four Quality of Service profiles used in UMTS.
State the importance of planning a network with a guaranteed quality of service.
State the use of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) in respect to Network Planning.
State the extra planning requirement to deal with Soft and Softer handovers.
Describe the advantages provided by using Soft and Hard handovers.
State and describe the tow methods of limiting access to a UMTS radio network.
Describe the main factors to be considered when calculating Link Budgets including the following:
Interference Margin, Fast Fading Margin, Soft handover gain, Propagation environment losses, Antenna
Gain, Receiver Sensitivity, Transmit Power, and Link Budget losses.
Describe what is meant by the term Reliability in UTRAN network.
State and describe the losses incurred in radio path planning.
Describe the two types of power control and different codes used in the UMTS network.
Describe processing gain.
Describe the meaning of the terms, Eb/No, Pole Capacity, F Factor as used in UTRAN network.
State the reasons for asymmetrical throughput on the air interface.
State the different coverage and capacity limitations for different speed mobiles.
State the meaning of the terms soft capacity and hard capacity.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 299


UMTS-SYS205: HSDPA System Engineering and Protocols

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Very good understanding of WCDMA networks,
protocols, operation and parameters.
Audience 2 UMTS-SYS201 M1: UTRAN Air-Interface Protocols
This course is targeted for all engineers and
technicians who need to gain an expert knowledge
about the key functions of HSDPA like AMC (Adaptive
Modulation and Coding) or HARQ (Hybrid Automatic
Repeat Request). This would also include operators
who need a detailed explanation of the HSDPA and
test engineers who will be integrating HSDPA
equipment and UEs.

Features
An instructor-led course comprising of theory and
written exercises.

Course Content
This course provides expert knowledge about the key functions of HSDPA like AMC (Adaptive Modulation and
Coding) or HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request). The course focuses on the necessary extensions of the
UTRAN architecture in NodeB and UE which are required for HSDPA. Another focus is on the protocol
enhancements, such as MAC-hs or on the frame protocols on lub/lur interface. Special emphasis is put on
NodeBs and UEs physical layer aspects, which allow a higher user data throughput far beyond conventional
384kbits/s.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the advantages for the subscriber using HSDPA capable UEs
State the implications of using 16QAM-modulation
Describe the HARQ and Packet Scheduling processs
State the differences between IR and Chase Combining
Describe AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding)

300 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-SYS205: HSDPA System Engineering and Protocols

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 301


UMTS-SYS206: UMTS Rel. 4, 5 and 6 Core Network
Architecture & Signaling - BICC, VoIP, PoC, IMS & SIP

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Good understanding of legacy mobile network
operation within the core area is required.
Audience 2 Some knowledge of the IP-environment.
Technical personal who requires detailed knowledge
of the UMTS Release 4, 5 and 6 core network
architecture and protocols, specifically engineers and
technicians who perform operations of SIP and SDP
within the environment of the IMS and PoC (Push-to-
talk over Cellular).

Features
An instructor-led course comprising of theory and
written exercises.

Course Content
This course focuses on the detailed description of the UMTS core network architecture release 4 and
particularly with release 5 and 6. The course provides a details analysis of the new call control and mobility
management protocols such as SIP or BICC. Most importantly the analysis ties into all-IP core network
architecture in release 4 and 5 allowing easy comprehension of the necessity and advantages of the new
network architecture in UMTS release 4, 5 and 6, as well as, the new protocol procedures with SIP and SDP.
The analysis will include PoC-operation within the 3GSM-environment and conclude with the IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS) and its various components.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the implications of implementing the new UMTS network architecture with release 4, 5 and 6
Explain and understand the new IP Multimedia Subsystem architecture and the related procedures

302 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-SYS212: C-SGSN Data Interface Configuration

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 Days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
2 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
Audience 3 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
GSN Installation Commissioning and Maintenance 4 UMTS-GSN212: C-SGSN Hardware System and Installation
Engineers. GSN Network Operators. GSN Network 5 GEN-CP06: Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Administrators. GSN Network Planners and GSN 6 GEN-CP09: TCP/IP
Optimization Engineers

Features
Instructor Led

Course Content
This course provides the information required to Configure the C-SGSN USP1/GSN3 hardware, GMM/PMM
and Gb Gn Gp and Ga interfaces. This course also explains: the configuration commands for System
configuration, the configuration of the slots of the BNET and PSM, the configuration commands for hardware
configuration, the configuration commands for Gb interface configuration, the configuration commands for MM
and SM configuration, and the configuration commands for Charging Interface Configuration.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe and Explain the different kinds of data configuration and the data configuration procedure.
Describe the modes of data configuration, cabinet and shelf configuration.
Explain UOMU/UCDR Port Information configuration.
Discuss the parameters for board configuration.
Describe hardware configuration and explain data configuration.
Explain the features of the Gb interface.
Describe the principles behind Gb interface configuration and the configuration of the Gb interface.
Describe the features of the Gn/Gp interface.
Explain the Internet Protocol (IP) route configuration process.
Detail the configuration process for the UGTP parameter, and the GPRS Tunnelling Protocol (GTP) common
configuration table.
Describe the process of configuring the UHPU parameter, the Internet Protocol SECure (IPSec) parameter
configuration, and mobility management.
Discuss the process for 2.5G and 3G mobile management parameter configuration.
Detail the SDB timer configuration process.
Explain how to modify the 3G paging configuration table, the connected PLMNs control table, the peer PLMN
list, and the authentication failure configuration table.
Detail the process of RAI and VLR correspondence configuration.
Explain the VLR configuration process.
Describe how to modify the NULL RA Information Table.
Discuss the process for configuring the BSSAPP timer.
Describe session management parameter configuration.
Describe the C-SGSN charging system, CDR formats, and negotiation data.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 303


UMTS-SYS213: C-SGSN Context Interfaces Configuration

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes.

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
Audience 3 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
GPRS Installation Commissioning and Maintenance 4 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
Engineers. GSN Network Operators. GSN Network 5 UMTS-GSN212: C-SGSN Hardware System and Installation
Administrators. GSN Network Planners and GSN 6 UMTS-SYS212: C-SGSN Data Interface Configuration
Optimization Engineers.

Features
Instructor Led

Course Content
This course provides the information required to Configure the C-SGSN USP1/GSN3 Gr/Gs/Gd/Ge/Gf/Lg/Iu
interfaces and set-up for CAMEL LCS and SMS. This course also explains:
How to configure the SS7 type interfaces from the SGSN, namely the Gr/Gs/Gd/Ge/Gf/Lg/Iu interfaces
How to configure the C-SGSN for CAMEL LCS and SMS and Lawful Intercept

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Discuss the SS7 protocol hierarchy.
Describe the Gr/Gs/Gd/Ge/Gf/Lg interface negotiation data.
Describe original signalling point information configuration.
Identify the commands used for MTP configuration.
Discuss MTP3 signalling data configuration.
Identify the commands used to configure SCCP data.
Describe the Iu interface.
Describe the configuration of the Iu interface.
Describe the sequence of configuration and the negotiation data.
Explain how to configure the user and control plane data.
Configure the C-SGSN for Short Message Service (SMS)
Configure the C-SGSN for CAMEL
Configure the C-SGSN for LCS
Configure the C-SGSN for Lawful intercept

304 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-TEL1226: Understanding UMTS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 12 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
( http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 A basic understanding of Second Generation
the Technical Training Direct link. digital wireless technologies and systems,
including CDMA and GSM, as well as a basic
Audience understanding of fundamental Internet
technologies, including TCP/IP, is recommended.
This course is intended for account representatives,
2 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
programmers, communications or operations
3 GSM-ENG941: Understanding GSM
managers, and system engineers.
4 ENG946

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to provide a profile of services to the world of untethered and mobile communications.
UMTS will support a wide range of applications and seamless services in multiple mobility environments. It
takes an evolutionary phased approach, moving toward an all IP network with strong roots developed from
second generation GSM and GPRS network designs and CDMA access technologies.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain what UMTS is all about and how it meets the requirements of Third Generation wireless systems and
networks.
Identify the capabilities, market potential and release timeline of UMTS.
Describe the UMTS's Core Network and Terrestrial Radio Access Network architectures including their
components, interfaces, and protocols.
Explain UMTS's open services architecture including its structure, service capabilities and its Application
Programming Interface.
Identify and explain the major characteristics of the UMTS air interface, including its various modes of
operation and channel types and the detailed characteristics of its Wideband CDMA technology in both
uplink and downlink directions.
Describe how mobility in UMTS is managed, and explain how calls and data sessions are handled in the
circuit-switched and packet-switched domains.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 305


306 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005
TDMA Courses

TDMA Technology courses equip the student with the knowledge required to commission, maintain, monitor and
optimize GPRS networks. It is imperative that course descriptions are read to confirm suitability for each student
and to ensure that all prerequisite training is completed.

TDMA-ENG932: Understanding TDMA ............................................................................................................... 308

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 307


TDMA-ENG932: Understanding TDMA

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced, approximately 16 hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
( http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 An understanding of the basics of wireless
the Technical Training Direct link. communications.

Audience
This course is intended for people who want an
understanding of the breadth of technical concepts
behind TDMA, as well as how TDMA fits into the
wireless industry.

Features
Self-paced, Web Based Training course.

Course Content
This module is designed to present an overview TDMA, including:
Introduction to TDMA
Principles of Cellular and Digital Radio
TDMA Network Aspects
Digital Traffic Channel: Step-by-Step
TDMA Logical and Physical Channels
TDMA Services and TDMA Evolution

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Compare the various network and radio technologies used for all TDMA call types, such as voice calls and
packet data sessions.

308 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


On Demand Courses

The courses in this section are available on demand, please contact your local training specialist for further
details.

GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling........................................................................................................... 311


GEN-CP04: UNIX for OMC Users ....................................................................................................................... 312
GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles ........................................................................................................................ 313
GEN-CP06: Asynchronous Transfer Mode.......................................................................................................... 314
GEN-CP08: Frame Relay .................................................................................................................................... 315
GEN-CP09: TCP/IP ............................................................................................................................................. 316
GEN-CP10: Voice Over IP................................................................................................................................... 317
GEN-CP11: WAP Overview................................................................................................................................. 318
GEN-OMC-G103: Windows NT4.0 Core Technologies ....................................................................................... 319
CDMA-BTS720: SC 4812T Lite Base Transceiver Station .............................................................................. 320
CDMA-BTS930: SC 300 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA) ........................................................................... 321
CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA) .................................................................................. 322
CDMA-GNL090: CNEOMI Fundamentals............................................................................................................ 323
CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling........................................................................................ 324
CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview ............................................................................................................................. 325
CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 326
CDMA-GNL134: R16.3 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 327
CDMA-GNL135: 1X Non-Technical Overview ..................................................................................................... 328
CDMA-GNL136: R16.4/R16.4.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 329
CDMA-GNL800: IS-95 CDMA Technology .......................................................................................................... 330
CDMA-GNL810: CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT................................................................................................................ 331
CDMA-GNL820: IS-95 & CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT................................................................................................... 332
CDMA-OMCR101: SUN OMC-R (CDMA)........................................................................................................ 333
CDMA-PER200: K-Series Fundamentals ............................................................................................................ 334
CDMA-PER210: IS-41 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 335
CDMA-PER270: Compaq HLR41/AC .................................................................................................................. 336
CDMA-PER290: CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance ........................................................... 337
CDMA-PER350: NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA.......................................................................................... 338
CDMA-PER360: NetPlan CDMA RF System Design .......................................................................................... 339
CDMA-PER390: Multimedia Message Service Center ........................................................................................ 340
CDMA-PER470: UNO Software Installation ........................................................................................................ 341
CDMA-PER640: S-Series Fundamentals ............................................................................................................ 342
CDMA-REL163: 16.3 Delta Workshop................................................................................................................. 343
CDMA-SAO110: IOS ........................................................................................................................................... 344
CDMA-SAO190: Performance Management ....................................................................................................... 346
CDMA-SON101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Sonus Gateway .................................................................. 347
CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1) ............................................................................. 348
CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2) ............................................................................. 349
CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 3) ............................................................................. 350
CDMA-SWT150: EMX Advanced...................................................................................................................... 351
CDMA-SWT160: DMX ......................................................................................................................................... 352
CDMA-SWT180: Managing Switch Performance and Growth............................................................................. 353
CDMA-SWT240: EMX Translations (International)........................................................................................... 354

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 309


On Demand Courses

CDMA-SWT260: CCS/SS7 Implementation ........................................................................................................ 355


CDMA-SWT270: CCS/C7 Implementation........................................................................................................... 356
CDMA-SWT280: Split Mode Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................... 357
CDMA-SWT281: SLIC II Operations.................................................................................................................... 359
CDMA-SWT340: EMX Overview....................................................................................................................... 358
CDMA-SWT370: EMX-V Provisioning............................................................................................................... 360
CDMA-SWT440: EMX-V Translations............................................................................................................... 361
CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance.......................................................................................... 362
CDMA-SYS102: NOCC Monitoring...................................................................................................................... 363
CDMA-SYS200: CBSC/RFDS Operations........................................................................................................... 364
GSM-BSS05: BTS Theory and Equipment Operation ......................................................................................... 365
GSM-BSS11A: BSS Overview (Non-Technical) .................................................................................................. 366
GSM-BSS14: BSS Technical Overview ............................................................................................................... 367
GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular............................................................................................................ 368
GSM-CP02A: GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical) ...................................................................................... 369
GSM-CP15: Principles of RF Planning ................................................................................................................ 370
GSM-GSR6: Delta Course ................................................................................................................................... 371
GSM-HLR01: Hardware System Structure .......................................................................................................... 372
GSM-HLR02: SPU Operation and Maintenance.................................................................................................. 373
GSM-HLR03: SMU Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................................. 374
GSM-MTSG01: Hardware System Structure ....................................................................................................... 375
GSM-MTSG02: Operation and Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 376
GSM-MTSG03: Motorola MTSG Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 377
GSM-OMC01: OMC-R Overview ......................................................................................................................... 378
GSM-OMC01A: OMC-R Overview (Non-Technical) ............................................................................................ 379
GSM-OMCS/T 01: Motorola OMC-S/T System Structure .................................................................................... 380
GSM-OMCS/T 02: Motorola OMC-S/T Introduction to Operation System and Database................................. 381
GSM-OMCS/T 03: Motorola OMC-S/T Operation and Maintenance ................................................................ 382
GSM-PER300: NetPlan........................................................................................................................................ 383
GPRS-BSS102: PCU Installation and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 384
GPRS-GSN101: Cisco ICND ............................................................................................................................... 385
GPRS-NET103: BSS (GPRS) Network Performance .......................................................................................... 386
GPRS-SYS116: SF Database and SGSN Signaling Interfaces........................................................................... 387
UMTS-CP13A: UMTS Overview (Non-Technical)................................................................................................ 388
UMTS-PER560: NetPlan UMTS Static Simulator ................................................................................................ 389
UMTS-PER570: NetPlan Fundamentals Plus UMTS........................................................................................... 390

310 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None.
However a good understanding of telecommunication
Audience networks is desirable.
Technical staff requiring a detailed appreciation of the
SS7 Signaling protocols and network.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
introduction to SS7 signaling protocols and network.

Course Content
This course introduces the principles of Signaling System Number 7. It covers all protocols and interaction
between applications and different layers. There is also comparison between the OSI 7 layer model and the SS7
4 level model. The course explains the interoperation of the SCCP, TCAP and MAP layers.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the main layers in the OSI protocol Stack.
Illustrate the major functionality of the SS7 protocol stack and its operation in a GSM network
To explain the function of the MTP layers 1-3 and the operation of the SS7 network within the GSM network
and the expanding function of databases in the network.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 311


GEN-CP04: UNIX for OMC Users

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 None

Audience
Operational staff performing routine UNIX activities on
either the GSM OMC-R or the GPRS OMC-G or the
UMTS OMC-U systems.
Systems engineers requiring knowledge of UNIX
particularly biased towards an OMC.

Features
An instructor-led course designed to train personnel in
the UNIX operating system of the Motorola OMC
platforms previously described.

Course Content
CP04 is aimed particularly at OMC operational staff requiring knowledge of the UNIX operating system, file
systems, use of commands and shell scripts.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State what UNIX provides and categorize the main features.
Use keyboard, mouse and window controls to login and logout of a UNIX computer.
Use popular UNIX commands particularly relevant to the OMC platform.
Describe and identify typical OMC hardware and software.
Identify typical OMC file systems, their structure and associated commands.
Use editors to create and manage text files.
Create Shell scripts useful on the OMC platform.
Identify and control processes.
Use distributive processing commands.
Explain the need for a backup strategy and use backup commands.

312 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Telecommunications background is essential.

Audience
Technical staff requiring an overview of Data-
Communications and Networking principles.

Features
An instructor led course designed to provide an in
depth technical introduction to Data Communication
and Networking principles.

Course Content
This course covers generic LAN/WAN principles including an overview of Data Communications, LAN/WAN
architecture and internetworking including Gateways, Bridges and Routers.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the concept of the OSI seven layer model.
Explain the origins of Local Area Networks.
Explain physical and datalink LAN architectures.
Describe LAN network protocol suites.
Explain Wide Area Network Services.
Describe Gateways, Bridges and Routers.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 313


GEN-CP06: Asynchronous Transfer Mode

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles

Audience
Technical staff requiring an overview of Asynchronous
Transfer Mode (ATM) technology.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an in depth
introduction of ATM technology.

Course Content
The course covers generic ATM technology including protocol layers, system switching and usage.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe ATM in comparison to traditional WAN technologies.
Describe and explain the ATM layers.
Describe the ATM network hardware.
Explain ATM LANs.
Explain Traffic Management.

314 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GEN-CP08: Frame Relay

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles

Audience
Technical staff requiring an overview of Frame Relay
technology.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an in depth
introduction of Frame Relay technology.

Course Content
This course covers generic frame relay principles including an overview of WANS, Packet Switching and Frame
Relay architecture/features and management.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Review the concept of Circuit and Packet Switching.
Explain the origins of Frame Relay.
Explain the principles of Frame Relay.
State the Frame Relay Structure.
Explain the concepts of Virtual Circuits.
Describe Frame Relay Management.
Explain Committed Information Rate.
Local Management Interface Procedures.
Consolidated Link Layer Management (CLLM).
Describe the operation of SNMP.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 315


GEN-CP09: TCP/IP

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles

Audience
Technical staff requiring an overview of the TCP/IP
Protocol suite.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an in depth
introduction of the TCP/IP Protocol suite.

Course Content
This course covers generic TCP/IP principles.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the structure of TCP/IP protocols and its general principles.
Describe the datagram structure, addressing, subnetting and mapping IP addresses to physical network
address.
Explain the function of routers and gateways.
Describe routing protocols including Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF),
Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).
Describe the operation of TCP and User Datagram Protocol (UDP).
Describe and explain the Application protocols including telnet, FTP, Domain Name Service (DNS), Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

316 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GEN-CP10: Voice Over IP

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles

Audience
Technical staff requiring a technical overview of Voice
over IP technology.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an in depth
introduction to Voice over IP technology.

Course Content
The course provides generic Voice Over IP (VoIP) principles training including a Review of IP and the benefits of
VoIP. Also included are a description of the VoIP Architecture and how voice is processed in IP Networks.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the TCP/IP protocol suite including IP Addressing and Subnetting.
Explain benefits of implementing VoIP.
Explain the VoIP architecture including Interworking between IP and PSTN.
Describe how Voice Quality and IP Network Performance are monitored.
Explain how voice is supported in IP networks with H.323, SIP and RSVP.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 317


GEN-CP11: WAP Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles
2 GEN-CP09: TCP/IP
Audience
Technical staff requiring a detailed appreciation of
WAP and E-commerce in a mobile environment.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
description of Wireless Application Protocol.

Course Content
The course covers generic principles of WAP including WAP architecture, protocols and interfaces. Also
included is the integration of WAP into telecom systems and networks.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the functions and architecture of Wireless Application Protocol and its relationship to the internet.
Describe and explain the WAP protocols and standards.
Describe Wireless Mark-up Language, WML Script and the WAP interfaces.
Explain the benefits of using WAP over wireless networks.
Describe E-commerce within the WAP environment.

318 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GEN-OMC-G103: Windows NT4.0 Core Technologies

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


This course is available ONLY as a buyout, which may Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
be delivered globally at a recognized Motorola training 1 No Motorola courses; however, an operational
facility, or other premises by arrangement. Please understanding of computers is essential.
contact Motorola Training to arrange this course.

Audience
This training is aimed at potential OMC-G system
administrators so that they may gain the fundamental
Windows NT4.0 knowledge.

Features
An instructor-led course with practical exercises
designed to train staff in the system administration of
Windows NT4.0.

Course Content
This course includes the Windows NT architecture, file systems supported by Windows NT, Redundant Array of
Inexpensive Data (RAID) variations, networking environments, and partitioning.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the Windows NT system architecture components.
Explain the differences between domains and workgroups
Install Windows NT
Describe the purpose of the Windows NT registry
Describe how system policy works
Explain the difference between the FAT and NTFS file systems
Describe the types of partitions available in Windows NT

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 319


CDMA-BTS720: SC 4812T Lite Base Transceiver Station

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 Working knowledge of/experience with Code
Personnel involved with the optimization and Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
maintenance of the SC 4812T Base Transceiver technologies.
Station (BTS).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides a high-level view of the network elements (NEs) that make up the Motorola CDMA network
in relationship to the BTS. The course also identifies the subsystems and functionality of the BTS within the
network. Additionally, the operation of the BTS is fully explored with hands-on lab exercises that cover all tasks
required for calibration, optimization and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs). Troubleshooting is included as
part of the class discussion as well as the lab process.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform calibration, optimization, Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) and troubleshooting on the SC4812T
Series BTS.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify SC4812T Series frames to include major functional areas.
Locate the modules within the major functional areas of the BTS and explain the function.
Discuss the CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) in terms of functionality, interconnection, directories/
files, command usage and connectivity.
Create test equipment connection and accomplish calibration.
Demonstrate LMF procedures (such as module download) for the SC4812T Series BTS.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS optimization procedures.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs).
Execute SC4812T Series BTS fault isolation and repair procedures.
Execute SC4812T Series BTS procedures prior to leaving the site.

320 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-BTS930: SC 300 Base Transceiver Station (CDMA)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 Working knowledge of/experience with Code
People involved with the optimization and Division Multiple Access (CDMA) or cellular system
maintenance of the SC 300 Base Transceiver technologies.
Station (BTS).

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This module describes the subsystems, functionality, and operation of the SC 300 Base Transceiver Station
(BTS). Hands on laboratory activities allow the student to perform optimization, calibration and Acceptance Test
Procedures (ATPs) on the SC 300.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform optimization, calibration, ATPs and troubleshooting on the SC 300 BTS.
In this course you will learn to:
Identify SC 300 frame to include major functional areas and module locations.
Describe the CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) in terms of functionality, interconnection, directories/
files, command usage and connectivity.
Describe test equipment associated with the LMF and SC 300 in terms of functionality and
interconnection.
Perform test equipment calibration and connectivity.
Perform LMF procedures for the SC 300 BTS.
Describe SC 300 ancillary test equipment requirements.
Download software into the SC 300
Describe SC 300 BTS optimization procedures.
Perform SC 300 BTS optimization procedures.
Describe SC 300 Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs).
Perform Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) for the SC 300 BTS.
Perform SC 300 fault isolation and repair procedures.
Perform SC 300 procedures prior to leaving the site procedures.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 321


CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days. None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 Working experience/knowledge of cellular
Audience systems.
Personnel who require a technical overview and
functional description of the Motorola SC Product
Family Overview (CDMA).

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides an overview of the SC product family describing the features and network elements of
the Motorola SC CDMA digital cellular system (including subsystems and their functions). This includes
Motorolas product migration to Third Generation Mobile Telecommunications (3G). The 3G technology provides
high-speed packet data rates (Mbps) and IP. The SC product family covers: OMC-R, AN, CBSC (MM & XC),
BTS, IWU, OMC-IP and the network components required for accessing the Internet or a company Intranet.
Additional network operations (UNO), planning (NetPlan) and optimization (SMAP) products are presented. The
course is comprised of 8 modules and 4 supporting appendices.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify the subsystems of a Motorola SC CDMA network and describe the functionality of this architecture.
In this course, you will learn to:
Identify the major and ancillary subsystems of the Motorola SCTM CDMA digital cellular system as well as the
1X IP-based architecture.
Describe the major components of a cellular network and state the different BTS types.
Illustrate the major components of a CDMA2000 network, including IP-RAN, and 1X packet data, identifying
system interconnections and interfaces.

322 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-GNL090: CNEOMI Fundamentals

Duration Practical/Lab Content


Self-paced None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)
2 CDMA-pBTS101: pBTS Packet Backhaul Fundamentals
Audience 3 CDMA-SDU100NE: SDU Network Element Overview
Engineers who would like to have knowledge of
CNEOMI platform. Technical personnel responsible
for provisioning, operations and optimization of the
self managed network elements.

Features
Virtual classroom

Course Content
.This course is designed for engineers to identify and list the Platform Management for the CNEOMI compliant
Network Elements and CNEOMI related CLI commands.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
Identify and list the Platform Management for the CNEOMI compliant NEs.
Identify the CNEOMI related CLI commands.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 323


CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days in the Schaumburg facility; 5 days in the Brazil None
facility
Prerequisite Motorola Courses
Location Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
premises by arrangement. 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)

Audience
People who require a basic level of SS7/C7 protocol.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling deals with basic understanding of SS7 and C7 signaling and its associated
protocols.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
apply basic understanding of SS7 and C7 signaling.
In this course, you will learn to:
Explain the purpose of SS7/C7 signaling system.
Identify the elements and structure of the SS7/C7 network.
Define the format and purpose the SS7/C7 signaling messages, Message Transfer Points, and addressing/
routing.
Analyze a Signaling Network Management messages, and network/ link manager scenario.
Identify user applications within the SS7/C7 network

324 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
2 Knowledge of basic network administration
Audience (including IP fundamentals)
All personnel who will work with Motorolas R16.0- 3 Working experience with/knowledge of Code
R16.4.1 CDMA release and who could benefit from an Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology
overview of R16.0-R16.4.1 architecture, connections, 4 Working knowledge and experience with R15
and call path. (Preferred)

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides a high-level overview of CDMA 1X with an emphasis on the R16.0-R16.4.1 releases and
Motorolas CDMA network migration plan.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Define Motorolas CDMA Network Evolution Strategy and phases.
Identify the 1X architecture and connections.
Discuss the Motorolas CDMA 1X Release and 1X network migration plan.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe Motorolas CDMA Network Evolution Strategy.
Describe the phases of Motorolas Network Evolution.
Describe the 1X architecture and connections.
Identify the call path for a 1X voice call, 1X IS-95-B data call, and 1X data call.
Describe the R16.1 architecture and connections.
Identify the R16.1 voice and data call paths with both a circuit and packet BTS.
Identify the platform changes between R15 and 1X that impact deployment.
Describe the system-level upgrade procedure to packet BSS.
Identify 1X transitional restrictions
Identify changes anticipated in R16.1 that must be considered when upgrading to 1X.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 325


CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, virtual Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
classroom, or other premises by arrangement. 1 Knowledge of basic network administration
(including IP fundamentals)
Audience 2 Working experience with/knowledge of Code
All personnel who will work with the implementation Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology
3 Working knowledge and experience with R16
and operation of the R16.1 cdma2000 Radio Access
(Preferred)
Network (RAN).
4 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
5 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
Features or
Instructor led course or Virtual Classroom 6 CDMA-GNL131: e1X Overview (Web-based)

Course Content
This course has been designed to help technical personnel obtain an overview of the cdma2000 Radio Access
Network and features including the implementation of packet backhaul and Selection Distribution Unit, OMC-R
and CBSC capacity increases, introduction of the 800 MHz SC 300-1X, and call paths associated with R16.1.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe cdma2000 1X network advances and equipment modifications associated with R16.1.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the R16.1 cdma2000 network architecture.
Describe cdma2000 network elements introduced in R16.1.
Describe the packet backhaul support and its purpose in the cdma200 1X network.
Describe cdma2000 1X network elements associated with packet backhaul.
Describe the function of 2000 1X network elements support packet backhaul
Describe the Selection Distribution Unit.
Describe the function of the Selection Distribution Unit.
Describe modifications to increase Sun OMC-R capacity.
Describe CBSC capacity expansion.
Describe implementation of the SC 300 BTS MicroCell into the cdma2000 1X network.
Describe electronic download of software for the LMF.
Describe the purpose and benefits of Common Network Elements Operations & Maintenance Interface
(CNEOMI).
Describe R16.1 benefits.
Identify the R16.1 voice and data call paths for both circuit and packet BTSs.
Identify the platform changes between R16.0 and R16.1 that impact deployment.
Describe the system-level upgrade activities to support packet backhaul and introduction of the SDU.

326 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-GNL134: R16.3 Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, virtual Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
classroom, or other premises by arrangement. 1 Knowledge of basic network administration
(including IP fundamentals)
Audience 2 Working experience with/knowledge of Code
All personnel who will work with the R16.3 System Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology
Release and who could benefit from an overview of 3 Working knowledge and experience with R16
the R16.3 architecture, features and call flow. (Preferred)
4 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
5 CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
Features or
Instructor led course or Virtual Classroom 6 CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview

Course Content
This instructor led course will be an introduction to the 16.3 architecture and features. The course covers the
changes to the 16.3 architecture. Part of those include the VPU benefits, hardware, and interface to other
network elements. Also, covered are the other 16.3 components such as DCS, BITS, PSI-TER and new
features.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe 16.3 System Release
Describe the VPU, and other 16.3 components and features.
Review the Call Flow for 16.3
Review Deployment Considerations for 16.3
In this course, you will learn to:
Review the Deployment Considerations for 16.3
Describe 16.3 System Release
Describe the changes to the 16.3 Architecture Changes
List the reasons for the VPU
Identify the VPU Hardware
Describe the DCS--Cisco 15454
Describe the BITS
Describe PSI-TER
Discuss Access Control Based on Call Type
Discuss RAND Interval
Discuss the RPM Capacity Increase
Discuss Channel Assignment into soft handoff
Discuss A1 Reset
Discuss IOS v4.1 Compliance
Discuss SMAP PC Client
Review the Call Flow for 16.3
Review the Voice call for 16.3
Review Circuit data with IWU at CBSC
Review Circuit data with IWU at MSC
Review Deployment Considerations for 16.3

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 327


CDMA-GNL135: 1X Non-Technical Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on None
the Technical Training Direct link.

Audience
All personnel who require a non-technical view of the
1X system.

Features
Instructor led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides a non-technical high-level overview of 1X. This includes 16.), 16.1 and 16.3 rollouts. This
includes Motorolas CDMA Network Evolution Strategy, as well as an architectural view and comparison of 16.0,
16.1 and 16.3. Part of the high level view will include a description of the network elements being introduced and
how each fit in the CDMA legacy.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe Motorolas CDMA Network Evolution Strategy
Describe the 16.0 Network Elements being introduced and upgrades to the legacy CDMA network.
Compare 16.0 architecture and 16.1 network architecture
Describe new elements and upgrades being introduced in 16.1
Compare 16.1 and 16.3 releases
Describe the key architectural changes being introduced in 16.3

In this course, you will learn to:


Describe Motorolas evolution to thee new IP architecture
Describe the beginning: CDMA Circuit based networks
Describe the evolution from IS95A to IS95B, cdma2000 1X, and to 1xEV-DV (1X Evolution Data Voice)
Describe the benefits of CDMA release 16.0
Describe the changes to Network Architecture: Packet BTS, AN Network (MLS, AGNODE) PDSN, AAA,
DACS, and OMC-IP
Describe the roles of each new NE being introduced
Identify differences between 16.0 and 16.1
Describe new elements and upgrades being introduced in 16.1
Review the network changes between 16.1 and 16.3
Describe the new Network Elements, Vocoder Platform Role

328 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-GNL136: R16.4/R16.4.1 Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 Hours None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
(http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on Knowledge of basic network administration
the Technical Training Direct link. (including IP fundamentals)
Working experience with/Knowledge of Code
Audience Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology
Working knowledge and experience with R16/
All personnel who will work with the R16.4/R16.4.1
(Preferred)
System Release and who could benefit from an over- CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
view of R16.4/R16.4.1 architecture and features. CDMA-GNL130: 1X Overview
CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview
Features CDMA-GNL134: R16.3 Overview
Instructor led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This instructor led course will introduce the 16.4/16.4.1 architecture and features. The course covers the
changes to the 16.4 architecture. Also, covered are the other 16.4 components and new features.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the 16.4/16.4.1 System Release.
Describe the 16.4 System Components.
Describe the 16.4 features.
Describe the Motorola EVDO solution.
Review the Call Flow for 16.4.
Review the Deployment Considerations for 16.4.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 329


CDMA-GNL800: IS-95 CDMA Technology

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days. None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered in the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
training facilities only, or other premises by 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA (Recommended)
arrangement. 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
(Recommended)
Audience 3 Working experience with CDMA systems
System Engineers, Field Engineers, Technicians and
Managers who need an in-depth knowledge of the IS-
95 standard.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom.

Course Content
This course provides an in-depth approach to the IS-95 standard. The course addresses the direct and reverse
links as well as the coding process using PN and Walsh codes. Call processing from a subscribers unit
perspective is presented in details.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the direct and reverse link channels.
Describe Power control.
Describe call processing.
Describe hand-off procedures.

330 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-GNL810: CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days. None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered in the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
training facilities only, or other premises by 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA (Recommended)
arrangement. 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
(Recommended)
Audience 3 Working experience with CDMA systems
System Engineers, Field Engineers, Technicians and 4 CDMA-GNL800: IS-95 CDMA Technology
Managers who need an in-depth knowledge of the
CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT standard. This course is
recommended for students that have already taken
the IS95 training (CDMA-GNL800: IS-95 CDMA Technology).
students that require IS95 training as well as
CDMA2000 1X/RTT should take CDMA-GNL820: IS-95 &
CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom.

Course Content
This course provides an in-depth approach to the CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT standard. The course addresses the
direct and reverse links, power control and call processing.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe CDMA2000 direct and reverse link channels.
Describe power control.
Describe call processing.
Describe hand-off procedures.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 331


CDMA-GNL820: IS-95 & CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered in the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
training facilities only, or other premises by 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA (Recommended)
arrangement. 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
(Recommended)
Audience 3 Working experience with CDMA systems
System Engineers, Field Engineers, Technicians and
Managers who need an in-depth knowledge of the IS-
95 and CDMA2000 / 1XRTT standard.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom.

Course Content
This course provides an in-depth approach to the IS-95 standard and CDMA2000 1X/RTT. The course
addresses the direct and reverse links, power control, call processing and hand-off procedures. This course
offers the students with IS95 and CDMA2000 / 1XRTT training in a 5-day option. This content is also available in
modules (CDMA-GNL800: IS-95 CDMA Technology and CDMA-GNL810: CDMA 2000 / 1XRTT).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the direct and reverse link channels.
Describe Power control.
Describe call processing.
Describe hand-off procedures.

332 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt March 2005


CDMA-OMCR101: SUN OMC-R (CDMA)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Working experience with the Helix OMC-R

Audience
This course was created for the following individuals:
Technical and support personnel responsible for
performing basic system administration and
operation duties at the OMC-R.
Cellular Field Engineers, CDMA System
Operators, Cellular Network Administrators, and
System Administrators

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide students with a hardware and software overview of the SUN
OMC-R platform.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the SUN OMC-R Frame components
perform SUN OMC-R operations procedures

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 333


CDMA-PER200: K-Series Fundamentals

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
Audience CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
People involved with the operation and maintenance and
of the Tandem product platform hardware and its CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)
system components. and
CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
The K-Series Fundamentals course has been designed to teach technical personnel to:
Use the Guardian Operating System (GOS).
Understand the Tandem Hardware Platform.
Use the Craft Workstation (CWS). Course Objectives Upon completion of the course, the student will be able
to operate and maintain the adjunct equipment on the K-Series platform and hardware.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Use the TACL commands.
Define file system architecture.
Manage the hard disk.
Use the printer.
Interpret the hardware configuration file.
Interpret the device listing.
Use the system control panel.
List logic board function.
Make the cable connections.
Become familiar with workstation software and configuration.

334 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


CDMA-PER210: IS-41 Operation

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
other premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
Audience CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
People involved with the operation and maintenance and
of IS-41 converter equipment CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)
and
CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
Features 2 CDMA-PER200: K-Series Fundamentals
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides information about the operation of the IS-41 converter. The student will review the
hardware and will be introduced to the software and operation of the Motorola IS-41 application.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
operate and maintain the IS-41 converter equipment.
In this course, you will learn to:
Monitor High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) and network link status.
Analyze the IS-41 product message set.
Perform a trace on the links and interpret the output.
Create, maintain, and update the database.
Interpret an Exception Reporting and Alarms Distribution (ERAD) message.
Locate a repair procedure.
Populate the SS7 database.
Run a change project.
Verify that SS7 links are operational.
Decode the three types of signaling units.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 335


CDMA-PER270: Compaq HLR41/AC

Duration Practical/Lab Content


10 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
Audience CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
People involved with the operation and maintenance and
of the Home Location Register application. CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)
and
CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)
Features 2 CDMA-PER200: K-Series Fundamentals
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom or
CDMA-PER640: S-Series Fundamentals

Course Content
This course is designed to provide the student with information and skills for the operation of the Compaq/
Tandem HLR/AC system and the skills required to maintain the various database files necessary for the
successful operation of the Compaq/Tandem HLR/AC system.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Maintain the various database files necessary for the successful operation of the Compaq/Tandem HLR/AC
system application software.
In this course, you will learn to:
Generate reports using the Enform AD-HOC Reporting facility.
Display the Authentication Center Event log and how to use various utilities.
Populate, update and maintain the following Compaq HLR/AC application software databases:
Generic Intelligent Network Interface database.
HLR System Parameters File database.
Authentication Center (AC) Configuration database.
HLR Subscriber Management.
Voice and Data Encryption.
Asynchronous Data and G3 FAX Service (ADFS).
Personal Dialing Services (PDS) Configuration Files.
HLR Number Translation database options.
Forward to Number Translation.
Enform AD-HOC Reporting.

336 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


CDMA-PER290: CALEA Wiretap Network Operations and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
other premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
2 GEN-NET200: Sun Solaris Part 1
Audience
Personnel responsible for the troubleshooting, data
collection, backup and recovery procedures, and daily
operation and maintenance of the SRP and related
architecture.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course will provide students with the knowledge and skills to operate, maintain, and troubleshoot the
CALEA Wiretap network.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Verify SRP/EMX connectivity and operation
Perform Case Provisioning
Provision Wiretap Routing Numbers (WRNs)
Operate the Log Manager and Log Viewer applications
Review the SRP statistical, Call Detail, and Billing Records
Describe the process of diagnosing and resolving SRP system problems

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 337


CDMA-PER350: NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1

Audience
This course is created for individuals involved with the
planning, design, analysis, and operation of CDMA
cellular systems.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides hands-on training on the use of the NetPlan tool with the CDMA Static Simulator function.
NetPlan is a cellular modeling application designed to automate and optimize many cellular system planning,
design, and analysis actions.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Use the NetPlan tool in cellular system planning, design, and optimization.
Perform basic operations of the CDMA simulator by entering given input parameters and retrieving output
data files and images.
In this course, you will learn to:
Explain the purpose, features, and benefits of the NetPlan planning tool.
Build and display sites in your system with assigned antennas, propagation boundaries, parameter sets and
other network elements in a system.
Specify report thresholds, image parameters, intervals and colors used to define ranges in your images.
Input traffic data.
Create a traffic map, traffic carrier map set, and speed map.
Create and display traffic and growth reports.
Use Operational Analysis to display performance data for your system such as blocking and dropped calls.
Enter basic CDMA simulator inputs and view reports of those inputs.
Create and display CDMA IS-95A/B simulator probe images.
Create and display CDMA IS-2000 Achieved Data Rate image.
Create and display CDMA IS-2000 time-sliced data.
Use the CEll/Mobile Analysis mode to display portions of the output data.
Use the PN Offset/Handoff mode to create and view a PN Offset Plan and a Handoff list.
Create and display a composite image, and a statistical image.
Create and view Cell/Mobile statistics files.

338 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


CDMA-PER360: NetPlan CDMA RF System Design

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
2 GSM-PER300: NetPlan
Audience 3 CDMA-PER350: NetPlan Fundamentals Plus CDMA
System and RF engineers who are involved in the RF
design of CDMA cellular systems using the NetPlan
CDMA Static System Simulator.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides classroom and hands-on training on the engineering inputs and outputs necessary in the
design of a CDMA RF System using the NetPlan CDMA Static System Simulator.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Identify and describe the elements of CDMA system design.
Describe how to use the NetPlan tool to assist in the design process.
Analyze outputs from the NetPlan tool to validate design criteria has been met.
Compare actual system data to results of the NetPlan tool, and identify data that should be used to improve
the NetPlan tools predictions.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the Motorola CDMA RF design procedure.
Create Link Budgets for the reverse link.
Discuss how to optimize the accuracy of the Clutter database.
Verify RF coverage.
Create Traffic and Speed maps.
Identify NetPlan tool CDMA system parameters and use in NetPlan tool.
Identify CDMA site parameters and use in NetPlan tool.
List factors that affect CDMA path loss generation.
State how to identify Inter-System Interference on a simulator image.
Generate statistics files and images.
Create, analyze and interpret statistics and images.
Identify and correct pilot pollution problems.
List steps to create a NetPlan CDMA composite image.
Describe NetPlan handoff candidate list and statistics preparation.
Describe the Design Review process.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 339


CDMA-PER390: Multimedia Message Service Center

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-PER640: S-Series Fundamentals
2 CDMA-PER220: Message Register (MR)
Audience
Technical and operational personnel responsible for
the operation and maintenance of the Multimedia
Messaging Service Center.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course was designed to familiarize personnel involved in the day-to-day operation of the Multimedia
Messaging Service Center application and associated hardware.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Operate and maintain the Multimedia Message Center.
In this course, you will learn to:
Recognize the basic hardware associated with Multimedia Messaging Service and the Multimedia
Messaging Service Center.
Review the features associated with Multimedia Messaging Service and the Multimedia Messaging Service
Center.
Identify the Multimedia Messaging Service Center Graphic User Interface (GUI) screen browser applications
used to configure, control and monitor the MMSC.
Describe Multimedia Messaging Service Center Graphic User Interface operation and functionality.
Identify the processes accomplished by the MMSC.
Perform MMSC status queries.
Identify MMSC tools and their usage.
Identify utilities associated with the MMSC and their usage.
Locate commands associated with MMSC operation.
Display ERADs.
Search for any alarms/ERADs.
Interpret alarms and ERADs.
Perform repair procedures for detected alarms.
Stop and start the MMS Application & NODE.
Add a subscriber to the Configuration Tab.
Perform the apply change procedures.

340 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


CDMA-PER470: UNO Software Installation

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 CDMA-PER450: UNO Element Manager
System administrators and those responsible for 4 CDMA-PER460: UNO Market Manager
installing, configuring, and administering UNO 2.16
and third party software in a Motorola Cellular
Network.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course is provides hands-on training for the installation of the UNO management system, auxiliary software
and devices. This course also describes the basic software architecture and third party software integration with
UNO. Basic sanity checks and troubleshooting utilities are covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Install the UNO Manager, configure Network Elements Managers on the UNO Manager, add UNO users,
and perform basic sanity checks and troubleshooting.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the UNO software architecture
Describe the R16 system architecture
Use the recommended forms for software installation
Perform the install procedure for Solaris 2.6 5/98
Perform the install procedure for UNO 2.16.0.0.03 (base software)
Perform the install procedure for UNO 2.16.07.0
Describe the software upgrade from UNO 2.15
Perform basic sanity checks on the UNO Manager.
Describe basic troubleshooting techniques for the UNO Manager

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 341


CDMA-PER640: S-Series Fundamentals

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days. Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Cellular System Network operations experience
2 Cellular Switch operations experience
Audience 3 Intelligent Network operations experience
Intelligent Network Operations maintenance and
engineering and Cellular Network Operations
maintenance and engineering personnel.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This Course is designed to provide the student with a basic understanding of the S-Series Intelligent Network
Server platform and the basic skills required to use the various utilities necessary for the successful operation of
the S-Series Intelligent Network Server platform and an overview of the Central Office system S-Series
hardware.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform basic skills in the following phases of S-Series Intelligent Network Server platform operations:
Startup and shutdown procedures for the INS platform.
Tandem Service Management (TSM) workstation.
Command Control Monitoring Interface (CCMI) workstation.
Exception Reporting and Alarm Display (ERAD) subsystem monitoring.
On line transaction processing.
Basic TACL commands.
Basic Subsystem Control Facility (SCF) Commands.
In this course, you will learn to:
Identify fundamental features of the S-Series INS.
Start and stop ERADS.
Display context sensitive help for the TSM workstation.
Configure and navigate the TSM workstation.
Display context sensitive help for the CCMI workstation.
Configure and navigate the CCMI workstation.
Perform basic fault management tasks from the CCMI workstation.
Describe the hardware and function of the major components of the SWAN/IO Controller and the Common
communication ServerNet Adapter (CCSA) l logon on and logoff of the system using TACL commands.
Use basic SCF commands to obtain information about system processes and hardware components.
Describe concepts of OLTP.

342 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


CDMA-REL163: 16.3 Delta Workshop

Duration Practical/Lab Content


6 hours. Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL132: R16.1 Overview

Audience
Technical personnel who would like to have
knowledge of the new features in R16.3.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This Course is designed to help technical personnel determine the R16.3 features, their specific requirements,
their compatibility/dependencies for software, hardware or mobiles related to that feature. This course also
covers the benefits of a particular feature. There will be multiple hands-on Labs to get students familiar with the
features.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State R16.3 features, their requirements and compatibility/dependencies for software, hardware or mobiles
related to that feature.
List benefits of a particular feature.
Tandem Service Management (TSM) workstation.
In this course you will learn about the specific requirements, compatibility/dependencies for software, hardware
or mobiles related to the following features:
New Vocoder Platform
A1 reset circuit as BS subsystem
T1A/E1A-95-B/C Channel Assignment into Soft Handoff
SMAP PC Client
Access Control Based on Call Type (ACCT)
Expansion of RAND Update Interval in the Authentication Function
Global Reset and IOS Backward Compatibility
IOS v4.1 Compliance
RPM Capacity

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 343


CDMA-SAO110: IOS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
2 CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM
Audience 3 CDMA-XC100OM: Operations and Maintenance: XC
This course is intended for IOS Compliant System 4 CDMA-SWT060: Nortel MTX Overview (Web-based)
Operators (Switch and CBSC), personnel responsible 5 CDMA-SWT080: MTX Interconnect Fundamentals Advanced
for monitoring the A interface, and personnel involved 6 Minimum of 6 months experience in Motorola
with the integration of a non-compliant CBSC to an CBSC and MTX operations
IOS compliant system. 7 Familiarity with the INET SS7 analyzer

Features
An instructor-led course.

344 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


CDMA-SAO110: IOS

Course Content
This module is designed to assist the migration of the A Interface between a MTX and Motorola CBSC. This
course reviews the CBSC database parameters and MTX tables values needed to implement the ISO complaint
A Interface. Monitoring the A interface using different tools is introduced.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the hardware elements in the CBSC and MTX that utilize the A Interface.
Verify the CBSC database parameters associated with an IOS Compliant system.
Verify the tables in the MTX associated with a Motorola CBSC.
Utilize various tools to monitor the A Interface.
Describe the Messages on the A Interface for various scenarios.
In this course, the student will learn to:
Describe the advantages of IOS, the equipment within the IOS compliant network, and the CBSC functions
within the IOS
Describe the A interfaces according to CDG 2.2 and 4.0 IOS.
Describe the Hardware devices in the CBSC that interface with IOS A interfaces.
Describe any ancillary equipment needed to support the IOS A interfaces.
Describe the software on the CBSC to support the A interfaces.
Describe the actions to set up the DSU for operation.
List the Hardware on the MTX that interfaces with the A interfaces to the CBSC.
Describe the relevant tables in the MTX to implement the IOS A1 and A2 interface the MTX with a Motorola
CBSC.
List the commands to manage the devices that interfaces with the A1 and A2 interfaces to the CBSC.
List the Hardware on the MTX that interfaces with the A interfaces to the IWF.
List the commands to manage the devices that interfaces with the A interface to the IWF.
Describe the process to configure the SS7 cards on the Helix MM and the PUMA MM
List the parameters on OMCR MIB to integrate to the MTX, and the tables on the MTX to integrate the
Motorola CBSC.
Describe the events during an origination and termination of a CDMA mobile phone call on the A interface
between the MTX and CBSC.
List the system messages and alarms that are associated with the A inter faces between the CBSC and
MTX.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 345


CDMA-SAO190: Performance Management

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience 3 CDMA-SYS100OM: Operations and Maintenance: 1X OM
This course is primarily designed for personnel Overview
involved with performance monitoring of the Motorola 4 CDMA-OMCR100OM: Operations and Maintenance: OMCR
CDMA digital cellular system. 5 CDMA-MM100OM: Operations and Maintenance: MM
6 CDMA-XC100OM: Operations and Maintenance: XC
Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom.

Course Content
his course has been designed to provide an introduction to the basic skills necessary for performance
monitoring of the CBSC subsystem. The course examines the importance of determining the capacity of each
key network processor within the data to assess and predict network capacity. Also, the importance of data
analysis in calculating existing capacity of the system and predicting future requirements is explored.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
determine capacity of a CBSC
determine resources limiting the capacity of the network for a given configuration
identify options available to increase capacity
determine resources that may be impacted by system growth and reconfiguration
In this course, you will learn to:
identify by name, acronym and function the key performance indicators for a digital (CDMA) system
identify elements that make up the Motorola CDMA System
explain the requirement for the Standard Transcoder Shelf layout
explain the major differences between the Helix Tandem/Compaq Series cabinets and PUMA DNP S4000 or
S5000
explain terms for various PM measurement reports that can be generated by the system
identify manuals and scripts used for record generation and interpretation
examine process utilization for the MM and explain its output
describe the six steps to capacity engineering for the CDMA cellular system
describe the impacts of Soft Handoff and the effect it has on the generation of PM data
identify the PM data paths that exist on the CDMA subsystem and locate raw PM data on the Mobility
Manager and OMC-R
identify the location of the PM server and describe its role in the display of formatted PM records
verify the location of appropriate scripts on the network
decode a raw PM record using the Performance Analysis Manual
describe factors involved in managing the CDMA cellular network and how system performance impacts
quality of service
identify all elements of a pmC_10_hr Access Channel Usage Record
identify reasons for a measurement to be pegged for any record
locate and produce the last CBSC Integrity Report and produce a file copy for that report

346 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


CDMA-SON101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Sonus
Gateway

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 Day Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Log onto to Motorolas My Network Support Web Site Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
( http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com), and click on 1 Basic knowledge of IP technology and experience
the Technical Training Direct link. in supporting a carrier network.
2 Familiar with Unix (basic commands) and how to
Audience establish a telnet session.
Operations personnel involved in the day-to-day 3 Previous VoIP class work helpful.
operations an maintenance of a Motorola packet- 4 CDMA-MSSC101OM: Operations and Maintenance: Motorola
based switch network, specifically the Sonus Gateway Soft Switch for CDMA
(GSX9000).

Features
Instructor Led

Course Content
This module provides operators with an in depth understanding of the major components and subsystems of the
GSX9000 platform, as well as the interaction of the Motorola SoftSwitch for CDMA (MSS-C). Included are tasks
related to the daily operation and maintenance of the Sonus Gateway.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Describe the various elements of the GSX9000 Sonus Gateway.
Explain the data flows needed for the Sonus Gateway.
Detail the Network File System.
Set the NVS Parameters.
Configure the system to work with the MSS Control Switch.
Discover the steps to perform a software upgrade on the GSX9000.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola.comt 347


CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Working knowledge of microprocessors and digital
logic-based systems, telephony, and
Audience communications electronics is highly
This course is designed for personnel who require a recommended.
basic understanding of the major functions,
components, and subsystems of the EMX. The
target audience includes Switch Technicians and
System Managers.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course is the first in a 3-part series presenting the EMX switching system. Architecture, subsystems,
block diagrams, call processing, Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands, and file transfer are included in
order to provide basic information on the EMX switch.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the major functions, components, and subsystems of the EMX switching system.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the EMX switch architecture, including the hardware frames, shelves, and Printed Circuit
Boards (PCBs).
Components of the switch subsystems:
Functions l power structure and tolerance values.
Operation of power converters.
Remove and install:
Power converters.
PCBs.
Analyze call processing within the EMX switch by:
Studying call processing, both from a mobile-originated and from a land-originated call.
Loading/unloading the Tape Transport Unit.
Communicate with the switch through setup and operation of a Configuration, Administration, and
Maintenance Position (CAMP) terminal:
By identifying the command protocols and classes.
By executing MMI commands.
By transferring and manipulating files.
Generating traffic metering and measurement reports.

348 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
2 Working knowledge of RF theory and
Audience communications electronics.
This course is designed for personnel involved with
the daily operation and maintenance of the EMX
switch.
The target audience includes:
Switch Technicians
System Managers

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course is the second in a 3-part series and is a continuation of the material presented in the Week 1 course
(CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)). It begins with a short review of Week 1 material; it then
continues with additional Man-Machine Interface, fault analysis and resolution processes, and information on
data retrieval for operational use.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the major functions, components, and subsystems of the EMX switching system and will be able
to perform some fault analysis and problem resolution.
In this course, you will learn to:
Troubleshoot and maintain the switch by:
Defining the categories of alarms and decoding specified alarms.
Listing and defining the Information and Problem Reporting (IPR) log types.
Performing fault analysis using Information and Problem Reporting (IPR).
Analyze call processing within the EMX switch by:
Describing, generating, and storing Call Detail Records (CDRs).
Defining the purpose of call treatment and Call Final Classes.
Executing the Search Batch MMI command.
Identifying the basic translations process, including:
The purpose of dialed digit translation.
The mobile validation process.
Changing/modifying office codes, mobile IDs, local subscribers, and roamer database tables.
Explaining the purpose of the Digital ANnouncer (DAN).

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 349


CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 3)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
2 CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)
Audience 3 Working knowledge of RF theory and
This course is designed for people involved with the communications electronics.
operation and maintenance of the EMX switch. The
target audience is individuals with little or no
experience on the EMX switch, including Switch
Technicians and System Managers.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course is the third in a 3-part series and continues the learning process of the Week 2 training course
(CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 2)). A short review of Week 2 material is presented; then this
course continues with additional maintenance and operational procedures, modification of the cell site
database, command file use, and off-line Initial Program Load (IPL) processes.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Operate and maintain an EMX switching system and will be able to modify various databases for day-to-
day operations.
In this course, you will learn to:
Communicate with the switch through:
Operation of a Configuration, Administration, and Maintenance Position (CAMP) terminal by:
Executing created command files.
Identifying the types, purpose, and use of log files.
Adding/deleting a cell site to/from the EMX switch database.
Creating a new, and expanding an existing trunk group.
Removing and restoring trunk circuits and trunk groups.
Troubleshoot and maintain the switch by:
Performing an Admin Initial Program Load (AIPL)/System Initial Program Load (SIPL) from a Debug
terminal.
Performing Radio Channel Tests.

350 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-SWT150: EMX Advanced

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
Audience CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
Customer technicians, support personnel, Motorola and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
CFEs, and engineers who require advanced fault (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
analysis and problem-resolution techniques. Maintenance (Week 3)
2 6 Months Field Experience (Recommended)
Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides a more comprehensive look at the EMX switching systems, functionality of the systems,
and the additional problem resolution tools available to the craftsperson. Some of the topics that will be
discussed in this class include functionality of the fault isolation subsystem, use of processor debug, decoding of
matrix pathway IPRs and other advanced procedures.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
operate and maintain the EMX switch system with a higher or greater level of proficiency, as well as identify
and resolve some of the more unusual system anomalies.
In this course, you will learn to:
interpret matrix failure IPRs
connect the Debug cable and terminal to a processor, then execute basic Debug commands
perform an Initial Program Load
perform specified Debug operations
use Debug to examine and modify database elements

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 351


CDMA-SWT160: DMX

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
other premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
Audience CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
Cellular Field Engineers and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
Operations Managers (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
On-site Switch Operators Maintenance (Week 3)

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course has been designed to give the student practice in establishing, testing and troubleshooting a DMX
network consisting of at least two EMX switches.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
create, test, and troubleshoot a DMX network between two EMX switches.
In this course, you will learn to:
define the function of each hardware element required to establish a DMX connection between two EMXs
Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) a data link
design a DMX configuration using all hardware elements required to connect two EMXs
determine if a data link is clean
use an established testing procedure in order to determine if the DMX network can successfully complete
EMX to EMX handoffs
given a basic configuration consisting of two EMXs, list the commands needed to implement DMX
execute the commands to install DMXing on our training switches
execute the commands from Section 4 on both of the EMXs that are being DMXed together
list commands needed to implement DMX
execute the commands to install DMXing

352 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-SWT180: Managing Switch Performance and Growth

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
Audience CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
People involved with performance monitoring of the and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
EMX switch. (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3)
Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course has been designed to identify and provide the applicable activities and skills necessary for switch
performance monitoring and growth planning. In order to express the performance of the system and assess the
switch's capacity, its call model must be defined through the collecting of available pegged statistics. Besides
presentation of fundamental traffic engineering terms and management techniques, the course provided
detailed mathematical steps on Linear Regression Analysis (LRA) and associated statistical concepts to
achieve highly reliable prediction of processor and link capacities, as well as circuit group provisioning. An
underlying course objective is to provide the engineer the necessary details to design, develop and compose a
performance and capacity analysis computer program, or spreadsheets. To that end, a simple computer
program called Load Line Analysis (LLA) is presented that can be used to calculate the processor's utilization
and a few other switch subsystems. Call model and LRA spreadsheets are used and provided with this course.
In addition to LRA, Multivariable Linear Regression Analysis (MLRA) is also explored. Made available with this
course is a computer program that enables determination of switch circuit group sizing, using the standard traffic
models of Erlang B, Erlang C, Poisson, Engset and the Equivalent Random Theory.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
develop a comprehensive plan for continually monitoring and planning the growth of the EMX switch for
any RF technology mix of analog and CDMA.
In this course, you will learn:
the four steps of system performance management:
* Monitoring the System
* Determining Current Status
* Growth and Capacity Planning
* Performance Engineering Techniques
the EMX, Analog and some CDMA statistics to monitor
to define the call model for the EMX, Analog and CDMA RF technology, and CDMA CBSC from the
switch's vantage point
about multi processor load balancing, traffic engineering practices and the EMX System Resource Guide
(ESRG) for system performance optimization

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 353


CDMA-SWT240: EMX Translations (International)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
other premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)

Audience
This course is designed for people who are, or will be,
responsible for updating and modifying the translator
of an EMX switch.The target audience includes
switch technicians and systems engineers.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course provides an explanation of the function and operation of the translator in the EMX cellular switch.
Personal dialing plans and extended tables are NOT included. Translator tables are used for originating and
terminating mobile validation, both local and remote, translation of dialed digits in mobile- and land-originated
calls and modification of an existing translator.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
explain the mobile validation process and the results of both inward and outward translations.
read the translations tables and determine the output of each, translate calls that use roamer access dialing,
exception routing, voice mail, external devices, and sector-of-origin routing and modify the appropriate tables
to add a new area code or office code.
In this course, you will learn to:
identify the:
components that make up a world number
process involved in local and remote validation of an originating/terminating mobile
inward and outward translation processes
process for translating roamer access dialing, exception routing, voice mail, sector-of-origin routing, and
routing to external devices
determine which tables need to be accessed when routing a set of dialed digits to determine the trunk group
and outpulsed digits
make the proper changes in the tables to route the new area code without call failure

354 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-SWT260: CCS/SS7 Implementation

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days. Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Four to six months experience on the switch.
2 CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
Audience 3 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
Personnel responsible for operations, data fills, or
systems operations, troubleshooting on the EMX CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
switch. and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3)
Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This Course deals with implementing Common Channel Signaling/Signaling System Seven (CCS/SS7)
software version 7.8 and higher on the EMX switch and with database administration for connections to the
Centralized Base Site Controller (CBSC) and Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). This course covers
the installation, testing, and monitoring of the EMX switch hardware and database for SS7 (PSTN), SS7 A+,
CBSC links with software load 7.8 version and higher.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Plan SS7 into the EMX switch
Optimize the SS7 subsystem and database management
Maintain the EMX hardware and database for SS7
Perform diagnostics tests on the databases for the SS7 network

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 355


CDMA-SWT270: CCS/C7 Implementation

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered by the Latin America and Caribbean Motorola Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
training facilities only, or other premises by 1 Four to six months experience on the switch.
arrangement. 2 CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
3 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
Audience or
Personnel responsible for operations, data fills, CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
systems operations, troubleshooting on the EMX and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
switch. (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3)
Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This Course deals with implementing Common Channel Signaling/Signaling System Seven (CCS/C7) software
version 2.9 connections to the Centralized Base Site Controller (CBSC) and Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN). This course covers the installation, testing, and monitoring of the EMX switch hardware and
database for C7 (PSTN), SS7 A+, with software load 2.9 version and higher.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Plan C7 into the EMX switch
Optimize the C7 subsystem and database management
Maintain the EMX hardware and database for C7
Perform diagnostics tests on the databases for the C7 network
Perform the creation of many types of links that use Signaling System Seven

356 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-SWT280: Split Mode Operation and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. Digital System
1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
Audience 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Personnel involved in the preparation, installation and 3 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
maintenance of the EMX switch(es) using Split Mode or
operation. CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
Features
Maintenance (Week 3)
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom
Analog System
1 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3)

Course Content
This course provides information about the preparation, installation, and maintenance of the EMX switch using
Split Mode procedures.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:
Perform Split Mode Operation procedures including preparation, installation, and maintenance of the EMX
switch.
In this course, you will learn to:
perform Split Mode preventive maintenance and database verification
accomplish Split Mode system preparation and configuration
perform Split system and Split SIPL
perform disk restoral
perform Split Mode Operation backout

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 357


CDMA-SWT340: EMX Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


Offered in the Illinois Motorola training facility only, or Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
other premises by arrangement. None

Audience
People who require an overall description of the
EMX, as well as the subsystem component
functions, capabilities and capacities.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide an overview of the components and capabilities of the EMX.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
describe the basic components and capabilities of the EMX.
In this course, you will learn to:
describe the primary functions of any EMX subsystem and the physical attributes of each frame
identify the capacities of a minimum and expansion configuration and the major blocks of the alarm
subsystem
interpret visual alarm displays and decode and interpret Information and Problem Reports (IPRs)
describe billing and statistical information generated by the EMX, including:
the devices necessary for Call Detail Record (CDR) generation and storage
the relationship between Automatic Message Accounting (AMA) batch files and the billing file
Traffic Metering and Measurement (TMM) data storage, the major TMM reporting systems, the Man-Machine
Interface (MMI) commands to display or distribute AMA/TMM data
trace the call processing sequence for a mobile-to-land call

358 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-SWT281: SLIC II Operations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA (Recommended)
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Audience (Recommended)
People who require training in the application of SLIC 3 CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
II for software loading and maintenance on the EMX (Recommended)
switch. 4 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
Features and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
An instructor-led course. (Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3)
5 CDMA-SWT280: Split Mode Operation and Maintenance
6 Basic understanding of CDMA principles

Course Content
This course has been designed to help technical personnel proficient in operation of the EMX perform software
installation and maintenance of the switch using SLIC II.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to perform SLIC II Procedures including:
Accomplish SLIC II computer initialization using SLICBak.
Perform software installation on an EMX using the SLIC II computer and scripts.
SLIC II fault recovery.
In this course you will learn to:
Describe the purpose of SLIC II.
Describe SLIC II components.
Describe SLIC II tools.
Describe the SLIC II Help function.
Describe the procedure to run SLICBak.
Describe the procedures to start SLIC II.
Describe the SLIC II automatic restart function.
Describe SLIC II tools.
Describe the process to power down SLIC II.
Perform SLICBak on the SLIC II laptop computer.
Perform Split Mode hardware verification.
Perform Split Mode database verification.
Resolve errors associated with:
Standby Hardware Integrity and Disk Verification
Split Mode Database Verification Errors
Perform SLIC II pre-installation procedures.
Accomplish SLIC II installation.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 359


CDMA-SWT370: EMX-V Provisioning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


4 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. Digital System
1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
Audience 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Personnel responsible for the Installation, Operation 3 CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
and Maintenance of the Electronic Mobile Exchange 4 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
(EMX) switch with a Visitor Location Register or
(EMX-V). CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
Features
Maintenance (Week 3)
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom
Analog System
1 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3)

Course Content
This course provides information about the operation of the EMX-V switch. The student will review the
hardware and will be introduced to the software, the database, and operation of the EMX-V switch.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Install and expand the EMX-V switch hardware and software, perform VLR processor board database
operations, interpret and troubleshoot diagnostic reports on the EMX-V switch, manage Traffic Metering
and Measurements (TMM) data, analyze ANSI-41 standard messages.
In this course, you will learn to:
Install and expand the EMX-V switch hardware and software.
Perform VLR processor board database operation.
Interpret and troubleshoot diagnostic reports on the EMX-V switch.
Manage Traffic Metering and Measurements (TMM) data.
Analyze ANSI-41 standard messages.

360 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-SWT440: EMX-V Translations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. Digital System
1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
Audience 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
Personnel responsible for updating and modifying the 3 CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
translator of an EMX cellular switch equipped with 4 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
the VLR processor. or
CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
Features
(Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom Maintenance (Week 3)
Analog System
1 CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance
or
CDMA-SWT110: EMX Operation & Maintenance (Week 1)
and CDMA-SWT120: EMX Operation & Maintenance
(Week 2) and CDMA-SWT130: EMX Operation &
Maintenance (Week 3)

Course Content
This Course has been designed to assist switch technicians and system engineers in understanding the
function and operation of an EMX-V switch. The course covers:
identification of the sequence of database tables found on the VLR processor
translation of the dialed digits in a mobile originated call using translator tables to determine the trunk group
routing list and character string to outpulse to the Public Switched Telephone Network
translation of the dialed digits in a land originated call is explained using translator tables to determine the
character string to use in the page message

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform translation of dialed digits and modify an existing translator.
In this course, you will learn to:
Perform translation of dialed digits, from an ANSI-41 and non-ANSI-4.
Subscriber, in a mobile-to-land call to determine the trunk group routing list and character string to outpulse
to the Public Switched Telephone Network.
Perform translation of the dialed digits in a land-to-mobile call to determine the actual characters to use in the
page message.
Modify an existing translator.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 361


CDMA-SWT450: EMX Operation and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


15 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. Digital System
1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
Audience 2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)
People requiring a basic understanding of the major 3 CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
components and subsystems of the EMX switch, as Analog System
well as the interaction of the subsystems. Included are 1 CDMA-GNL100: SS7/C7 Common Channel Signaling
those involved in the daily operation and maintenance
of the EMX switch.

Features
An instructor-led course or Virtual Classroom

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide information concerning the EMX system architecture and
subsystems. Block diagrams of system interconnection and bus architecture as well as call processing, Man-
Machine Interface (MMI), basic system operation, Information and Problem Reporting, troubleshooting and
corrective maintenance procedures, file loading to and from the equipment, routine backup procedures, and
command file operation are covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Operate and maintain the hardware components of the EMX Switch.
In this course, you will learn to:
Describe the various elements of the EMX hardware and software.
Operate and maintain the hardware of the EMX system.
Describe the process of loading software onto the EMX system.
Assign a new user on the switch.
Troubleshoot the EMX system.
Maintain the EMX database for adding various communication links for the CBSC and cell sites (analog
and digital).
Describe the Translation process on the EMX system.

362 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


CDMA-SYS102: NOCC Monitoring

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
The course is designed for technicians involved in the
monitoring of Motorola network markets.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course provides:
a high level introduction to CDMA equipment, an in-depth treatment of the CLI, Event (particularly alarms)
management, Device State Management and Fault management.
a high level introduction of the EMX Switch, Man-Machine Interface commands, Alarms and Information/
Problem reports.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
execute the appropriate CLI or MMI command to determine system status and equipage for Motorola
network markets.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 363


CDMA-SYS200: CBSC/RFDS Operations

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 CDMA-GNL060: Understanding CDMA
2 CDMA-GNL070: SC Product Family Overview (CDMA)r
Audience 3 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1
This course is designed for technical and support 4 Any BTS course.
personnel responsible for performing basic system
operation duties at the CBSC/OMC-R, BTS field sites
and associated OMC-R/SC-UNO and/or UNO
processor applications for remote BTS fault
identification and recovery. Personnel include: Cellular
Field Engineers, CDMA System Operators, Cellular
Network Administrators and System Administrators.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
This course has been designed to provide a description of the RF Diagnostic Subsystem for PCS/Cellular base
stations.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
perform RFDS testing, analyze test results and perform troubleshooting procedures
perform remote BTS fault BTS identification/recovery procedures using the OMC-R/SC-UNO and/or UNO
enable operators/technicians to utilize command syntax to execute RFDS test commands from the OMC-R and LMF
utilize RFDS tests and analyze the results
furnish BTS technicians engaged in BTS fault identification/recovery procedures using the SC-UNO and/or UNO
In this course, you will learn to:
describe the purpose of the RF Diagnostic Subsystem in troubleshooting the CDMA base station
describe the modules and the functionality of the modules in the RFDS, the function of the LMF forward and reverse
tests, and the signal path to/from the RFDS when testing
perform RFDS-LMF testing procedures
describe the supporting software needed to implement RFDS in a CDMA network and identify files which must be
created
describe parameters associated with RFDS reason codes
perform OMC-R testing procedures related to the RFDS
describe RFDS fault analysis and troubleshooting procedures
perform RFDS software configuration and troubleshooting procedures
describe numerical error messages associated with the RFDS
perform command file scheduling procedures
describe the major components of the OMC-R/SC-UNO and/or UNO
use fault identification tools of the SC-UNO and/or UNO including the Alarm Display Monitor, CLI window and browse
cdllog
determine the status of cards via the front panel LEDs and status FEPs using CLI commands execute fault recover
procedures to replace/reseat cards/devices and bring the SCXXXX (as required) back into service

364 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-BSS05: BTS Theory and Equipment Operation

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular

Audience
Technical staff requiring a technical introduction to
current and legacy BTS products

Features
An instructor-led course providing both a theoretical
overview and practical appreciation of In-Cell, M-Cell
and Horizon BTS equipment. The emphasis of this
course is hands-on and provides a valuable training
vehicle for BTS maintenance engineers.

Course Content
BSS05 provides an overall appreciation of BTS equipment. The course covers In-Cell, M-Cell and Horizon
equipment. The course has an emphasis on practical sessions including MMI commands and transceiver
optimization.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
State the function and purpose of the Base Station Controller (BSC) components, identifying the
communication paths within the BSC and state the difference between extension and expansion.
State the function of the Base Transceiver Site (BTS) and describe the common configurations of the In-Cell
BTS.
State the different configurations used for M-Cell cabinets and describe the power requirements and routing
within the cabinets.
Describe the digital and RF components used in M-Cell and state the common RF configurations.
State the cabinet, digital and RF component configurations used in Horizon equipment.
Describe the common configurations of digital and RF components used in M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 365


GSM-BSS11A: BSS Overview (Non-Technical)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
This course is intended for non-technical staff
requiring an appreciation of the components and
functionality of a BSS.

Features
An instructor-led course providing non-technical
overview information of a Motorola Base Station.

Course Content
This course covers the principles of the BSS and describes the features and network components of the BSS.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Name the major components of a BSS and describe their functionality.
Explain how a BSS connects to a GSM network.
Identify different BSS types and state when and why each would be used.

366 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-BSS14: BSS Technical Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular

Audience
Technical staff requiring an appreciation of the
Motorola BSS system.

Features
An instructor-led course providing an overview of
Motorola BSS equipment.

Course Content
This course is designed as a technical introduction to the BSC cabinet, Horizonmacro, Horizonmicro2,
Horizoncompact2. An overview of the MMI interface is also covered.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
State the function of each of the major components in the BSS.
State the major functions and describe the basic operation of field replaceable units within the current BSS
products.
State the recommended implementation of each of the BTS cabinets within the current product range.
State the reasoning for each of the levels of MMI security.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 367


GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
The course is intended for technical staff requiring a
detailed appreciation of the components and
functionality of GSM cellular systems.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
introduction to GSM cellular.
This course is also available as a Computer Based
Training product.

Course Content
This course covers the principles of cellular telecommunications and describes the features and network
components of GSM. It describes the terrestrial and air interfaces associated with GSM, including channels and
channel coding, radio interface optimization, GSM call set-up with handover sequences and an introduction to
microcellular are also included.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the main components of a cellular network and state the different cell types.
Illustrate the major components of a GSM network, identifying interconnections and protocols used.
Describe the air interface structure and the mechanisms used to protect the air interface from errors.
Outline the basic GSM call set-up, handover procedures and the necessary message exchanges used.

368 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-CP02A: GSM Cellular Overview (Non-Technical)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
This course is intended for non-technical staff
requiring an appreciation of the components and
functionality of GSM cellular system.

Features
An instructor-led course providing non-technical
overview information of GSM cellular networks.

Course Content
This course covers the principles of cellular telecommunications and describes the features and network
components of GSM.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Name the main components of a cellular network and describe their functionality.
Explain the advantages of using GSM digital cellular systems.
Identify different cell types and state when and why each would be used.
Name the major components of GSM networks and explain system interconnection.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 369


GSM-CP15: Principles of RF Planning

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other None
premises by arrangement.

Audience
RF Planning and Optimisation Engineers

Features
Instructor-led course giving information on RF
Planning principles and propagation principles/
methods.

Course Content
This course explains the planning and optimisation processes, and includes propagation environments,
methods and basic antenna principles including diversity and polarization.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the planning and optimisation processes
Explain the fundamentals of Radio Link Design
State C/I and Adjacent channel interference requirements
Explain basic frequency planning and directional re-use
Explain customer requirements including in-building coverage
Create Link budgets for both uplink and downlink
Explain coverage and capacity estimation
State propagation models used for different environments
Explain antenna fundamentals including diversity mechanisms, polarization and downtilt
Explain cell range extension

370 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-GSR6: Delta Course

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 day Theory 2 day Theory - No requirement
3 day Theory/Practical - Negotiation on practical
Location content and equipment required.
A recognized Motorola training facility, or other
premises by arrangement. Prerequisite Motorola Courses
Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
Audience Completion of the GSR5/5.1 training curriculum
This course is intended for engineers who have path.
previously followed and completed the GSR5/5.1 Engineers new to Motorola products, refer to the
training curriculum path. curriculum paths for their training requirements.

Features
An instructor-led course designed to enable students
to understand the new parameters, features and
messages involved in GSR6.

Course Content
This course provides a detailed introduction to GSR6. Explanations of database, statistics planning formulae
and OMC features of GSR6. The course covers the changes in OMC-R, BSS, GPRS, and Planning.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the new and modified OMC-R features.
Describe the new and modified GPRS features.
State the new and modified GPRS MMI commands and statistics.
Describe the new and modified BSS features.
State the new and modified BSS MMI commands and statistics.
Describe the planning impacts for the GSR6 features in the BSS.
Demonstrate new and modified parameters in the OMC-R, PCU and BSS as part of the GSR6 features
(Practical course only.).

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 371


GSM-HLR01: Hardware System Structure

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days A lab/site visit is recommended

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM CP02 Introduction to GSM

Audience
This training is aimed at NSS (MTS-G/HLR) Engineers
responsible for maintaining the GSM Motorola HLR. It
is also recommended for OMC-S/T engineers.

Features
An instructor lead course enabling NSS (MTS-G/HLR)
engineers to acquaint the hardware structure of
Motorola HLR.

Course Content
This course provides a comprehensive description of Motorola GSM HLR, including hardware structure of SPU,
HDB and SMU and their functions.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the functions of hardware elements of the Motorola GSM HLR
Describe the functions of HLR
State the functions of the SPU, HDB and SMU
Describe the hardware structure of single module HLR and multi module SPU
Describe the brief description of hardware structure of HDB and SMU

372 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


GSM-HLR02: SPU Operation and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-HLR01: Motorola HLR-SPU Hardware System Structure
Audience 3 GSM-OMCS/T 02 Motorola OMC-S/T Introduction to
This training is aimed at HLR Engineers responsible Operation System and Database
for maintaining the GSM Motorola HLR. 4 Knowledge about basic TCP/IP

Features
An instructor lead course enabling HLR engineers to
configure SPU database and acquaint the operation
and maintenance procedures of SPU and HDB.

Course Content
This course provides a comprehensive description of operation and maintenance procedures of SPU & HDB,
including SPU hardware configuration database, interoffice and prefix configurations.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the hardware configuration of SPU like creating digital boards and their dependencies.
Create the inter office signalling configurations
Describe and create number analysis data configurations
Describe and create the inter office and prefix configuration tables
Describe the hardware structure of HDB.
Describe the operation and maintenance procedures of SPU and HDB
Describe the alarm management, performance management, signalling trace, interface trace and subscriber
trace etc.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 373


GSM-HLR03: SMU Operation and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-HLR01: Motorola HLR-SPU Hardware System Structure
Audience 3 GSM-HLR02: Motorola HLR-SPU Operation and Maintenance
This training is aimed at HLR Engineers responsible 4 GSM OMCS/T 02: Motorola OMC-S/T Introduction to
for maintaining the GSM Motorola HLR. Operation System and Database

Features
An instructor lead course enabling NSS/HLR
engineers to define, query modify subscribers using
SMU client and acquaint the operation and
maintenance procedures of SMU.

Course Content
This course provides a comprehensive description of operation and maintenance procedures of SMU, including
subscriber definition, modification deletion etc.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the hardware configuration of SMU
Describe the installation of SMU
Describe the routine maintenance and operation of SMU
Describe the subscriber data management using SMU including defining a new subscriber, deleting a
subscriber, change the subscribers service and query the subscriber's services etc.

374 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-MTSG01: Hardware System Structure

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days None.

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
Audience
This training is aimed at Circuit Switched Core
Network Engineers responsible for maintaining the
MTSG.

Features
An instructor lead course enabling understanding of
Circuit Switched Core Network Hardware structure
of MTSG

Course Content
This course provides a comprehensive Hardware description of Motorola's Circuit switched core network,
MTSG platform.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the system features of MTSG
Describe the hardware elements of MTSG
Identify the functions performed by every module in MTSG
Describe the frame structure and identify all the cards comprised of in MTSG
Describe the cabling structure, their functions and their interconnection details
with every other module within the switching complex

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 375


GSM-MTSG02: Operation and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


13 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 signalling
Audience 3 MTSG01: Motorola MTSG Hardware System Structure
This training is aimed at Circuit Switched Core
Network Engineers responsible for maintaining the
MTSG.

Features
An instructor lead course enabling understanding of
Operation and Maintenance details of MTSG.

Course Content
This course provides a comprehensive discourse on Configuration, Operation, Maintenance and Testing
philosophies of MTSG Platform.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the functions, software structure, operations philosophy of BAM
Configure data pertaining to the Hardware existing in the switching platform
Define in data configuration the basic functionality supported by the switch
Configure all the signalling interfaces connected to the switch
Define and configure all the trunks of offices connected to the switch and link them with the signalling data
configuration
Configure the basic data pertaining to Number Analysis
Define and configure IN service data
Define and manage all the features supported by MTSG
Describe the Operation and Maintenance procedures performed on MTSG
Define and evaluate the performance statistics of MTSG by launching various performance measurement
objectives
Monitor and interpret various Event and Fault Alarms generated by MTSG through Alarm console
Describe the Gateway Billing Server architecture, configuration, operation and maintenance procedures

376 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-MTSG03: Motorola MTSG Troubleshooting

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 signalling
Audience 3 MTSG01: Motorola MTSG Hardware System Structure
This training is aimed at Circuit Switched Core 4 MTSG02: Motorola MTSG Operation and Maintenance
Network Engineers responsible for maintaining the
MTSG.

Features
An instructor lead course enabling understanding of
Circuit Switched Core Network Troubleshooting
procedures of MTSG

Course Content
This course provides a preview of Troubleshooting procedures of Motorola's Circuit switched core network,
MTSG platform.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the troubleshooting routine and emergency maintenance.
Describe MTSG troubleshooting methodology and handle typical case analysis

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 377


GSM-OMC01: OMC-R Overview

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. Completion of the following courses would be useful
but not essential:
Audience 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
The course is designed for management and technical 2 GSM-BSS14: BSS Technical Overview
supervisors who require a technical appreciation of
the purpose and functionality of the GMS OMC-R. It
may also serve as a useful insight for any engineer
who needs a basic introduction to the GSM OMC-R.
Note that the OMC01course is not a prerequisite for
the NET01, indeed they are mutually exclusive.

Features
An overview course that provides an introduction to
the basic concepts of the GSM OMC-R system.

Course Content
The course is designed to introduce personnel to the basic concepts of the GSM OMC-R, as used in a GSM
Network. It covers the basic configuration of an OMC-R, the communication links between the OMC-R and other
network elements, the information flow within the network and the software used in the network and at the OMC-
R. It also deals with the functions performed using the OMC-R Graphical User Interface (GUI) such as
configuration management, event management, performance management, load management, fault
management, device state management and administration.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the concepts and philosophy of the GSM Operations and Maintenance Centre Radio (OMC-R).
Describe the management functions of the OMC-R and network management model.
Describe the OMC-R hardware and software architectures including interfaces.
State the terminology and the use of the OMC-R window environment.
State the concepts of software load management.

378 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GSM-OMC01A: OMC-R Overview (Non-Technical)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None

Audience
This course is intended for non-technical staff
requiring an appreciation of the components and
functionality of the OMC-R.

Features
An instructor-led course providing non-technical
overview information of the Operations and
Maintenance Centre for GSM.

Course Content
This course covers the principles of the OMC-R and describes the features and network components of the
OMC-R.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Name the main hardware components of an OMC-R and describe their functionality.
Name the major software functions of an OMC-R and describe their functionality.
Explain how the OMC-R is connected to a GSM network.
Explain the advantages of using an OMC-R.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 379


GSM-OMCS/T 01: Motorola OMC-S/T System Structure

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GSM-HLR01: Motorola HLR-SPU Hardware System Structure
Audience 3 MTSG 101: Motorola MTSG Hardware System Structure
This training is aimed at OMC-S/T Engineers and 4 OMC-S/T 02: Introduction to Operation System and Database
MTS-G/HLR Engineers responsible for maintaining 5 Knowledge about data communications
the GSM OMC-S/T, MTS-G and HLR. 6 SUN Solaris Administration Part 1&2.
These courses are available from SUN Educational Services,
or alternatively may be booked through Motorola Training as a
Features buyout option
An instructor lead course enabling OMC-ST/MTS-G/ 7 Knowledge about TCP/IP Principles
HLR engineers to acquaint the system structure of
OMC-S/T

Course Content
This course provides a comprehensive description of system structure of OMC-S/T

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the OMC-S/T system overview
Describe the hardware structure of OMC-S/T
Describe the configuration principles of OMC-S/T
Describe the network structure of OMC-S/T
Describe the interface features etc.

380 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


GSM-OMCS/T 02: Motorola OMC-S/T Introduction to Operation System
and Database

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 Knowledge about data communications
2 Knowledge about TCP/IP principles
Audience
This training is aimed at OMC-S/T Engineers and HLR
Engineers responsible for maintaining the GSM OMC-
S/T and Motorola HLR.

Features
An instructor lead course enabling OMC-ST/HLR
engineers to acquaint UNIX and Sybase skills

Course Content
This course provides UNIX and Sybase skills for maintaining OMC-S/T and Motorola HLR

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand and run UNIX commands required for OMC-S/T and Motorola HLR
Understand and run Sybase commands required for OMC-S/T and Motorola HLR

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport 381


GSM-OMCS/T 03: Motorola OMC-S/T Operation and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 3 OMC-S/T 01: Motorola OMC-S/T System Structure
4 OMC-S/T 02: Introduction to Operation System and Database
Audience
This training is aimed at OMC-S/T Engineers
responsible for maintaining the GSM OMC-S/T.

Features
An instructor lead course enabling OMC-ST/HLR
engineers to acquaint Operation and Maintenance
procedures of OMC-S/T

Course Content
This course provides software installation, software upgrade, routine operation and maintenance for OMC-S/T
client/server

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe and perform software installation/software upgrade of OMC-S/T server
Describe and execute operation and maintenance procedures for client/server of OMC-S/T

382 Visit our web site at http://www.motorola.com/networksupport March 2005


GSM-PER300: NetPlan

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GEN-NET100: UNIX Part 1

Audience
People involved with the planning, design, analysis,
and operation of analog and GSM cellular systems.

Features
An instructor-led course.

Course Content
The NetPlan RF planning tool is a cellular modeling application, designed to automate and optimize many
cellular system planning, design, and analysis functions. This course provides hands-on training on the use of
basic functions associated with the NetPlan RF planning tool with an emphasis on Analog and GSM systems. It
is not intended to provide the in-depth background required for system design. Also, the course will prepare
those students planning to attend the NetPlan CDMA Static Simulator training.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Use the NetPlan RF planning tool in cellular system planning, design, and optimization.
In this course, you will learn to:
Explain the purpose, features, and benefits of the NetPlan RF tool
Perform the tasks necessary to prepare the NetPlan RF tool for use
Manipulate graphic objects in the NetPlan RF tool
Build and display sites, with assigned antennas, propagation boundaries, parameter sets, and other network
elements in a system
Specify report thresholds, image parameters, intervals and colors used to define ranges in your images
Display and plot existing drive test data
Create a Delta image comparing drive test data with your system's signal strength image
Input traffic data
Create a traffic map and speed map
Create and display traffic and growth reports
Automatically create and manually edit the C/I Matrix, Frequency Plan and Handover List
Create and display images and reports
Use Operational Analysis to display performance data for your system, such as blocking or dropped calls

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 383


GPRS-BSS102: PCU Installation and Maintenance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
Audience 2 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
This course is intended for BSS/GPRS Installation, 3 GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory
Maintenance, and Commissioning Engineers. 4 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory

Features
An instructor-led course including practical exercises
detailing the installation of a PCU cage.

Course Content
This course details the procedures necessary for successfully installing the PCU, and ensuring it comes into
service correctly. Included are diagnostics during initialization, and interrogation of the PCU using the Man-
Machine-Interface command set.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:
Install a PCU cage, complete with associated cables
Interrogate a PCU, using the Man-Machine-Interface, to ascertain various types of information, with regard to
device operation
State any probable cause of the PCU failing to initialize correctly

384 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GPRS-GSN101: Cisco ICND

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 1 GEN-CP05: LAN/WAN Principles
1 2 GEN-CP09: TCP/IP
Audience 1 3 GEN-CP06: Asynchronous Transfer Mode
All GPRS GSN engineers. CCNA candidates, CCNP 1 4 GEN-CP08: Frame Relay
candidates

Features
Cisco ICND. A course that introduces the student to
the Cisco IOS and installation, configuration and
maintenance of Cisco switches and routers.

Course Content
Interconnecting Cisco Network Devices (ICND) includes both routing and switching concepts, covering both
Layer 2 and Layer 3 technologies. This course focuses on using Cisco Catalyst switches and Cisco routers
connected in local-area networks (LANs) and wide-area networks (WANs).

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Use the available configuration tools to establish connectivity to the appropriate network device in order to
complete the initial device configuration
Execute an Add, Move, or Change so that the network functions in accordance with the new requirement,
given a new network requirement
Use the command-line interface to accurately determine network operational status and network
performance
Build a functional access switch configuration to support the specified network operational parameters, given
a network design
Use Cisco IOS commands to configure VLANs, VTP, IEEE 802.1Q trunking, and ISL trunking, given a
functioning access layer switch
Use show and debug commands to identify anomalies in VLAN, VTP, ISL trunking, and Spanning-Tree
operation, given an operational access layer switch
Describe the features and operation of static and dynamic routing, including RIP, IGRP, EIGRP, and OSPF
Use show and debug commands to identify anomalies in routing operation, given an operational router
Use Cisco IOS commands to configure standard and extended access lists, given a functioning router
Use Cisco IOS commands to configure serial interfaces using HDLC and PPP encapsulation for leased line
connections, given a functioning router.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 385


GPRS-NET103: BSS (GPRS) Network Performance

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
Audience 3 GSM-BSS11: BSS Operational Theory
BSS (GSM) Network Operators, BSS (GSM) Network 4 GPRS-BSS101: PCU Operational Theory
Administrators BSS (GSM) Engineers, BSS (GSM) 5 GSM-NET01: OMC-R Network Operations
Configuration/Optimization Engineers, and BSS 6 GSM-SYS02: Introduction to BSS Database
(GSM) Network Planner. 7 GPRS-SYS102: BSS (GPRS) Database
8 GPRS-SYS105: Introduction to EGPRS
9 GSM-NET03: Network Performance
Features
An instructor-led course designed to enable the
student to understand the origin of statistics generated
by the Motorola BSS for GPRS/EGPRS.

Course Content
Equipment overview, including function, hardware and links between network elements. Description of the
software entities and their interaction with the other BSS software entities. Description of the interaction of the
PCU statistic collection process with the BSC for statistic reporting detailing: PSSP, CSP, Local DPROC
statistics collection, GGL, accessibility, and throughput statistics.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the interaction of the PCU in relation to the BSC for statistics.
Revise the six statistical data types how each type collects and reports data.
Describe the GBL statistics how the statistics measure data throughput.
State the Accessibility Statistics and where they are incriminated given related ladder diagrams.
Describe PCU key statistics.
Describe other related throughput statistics.

386 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


GPRS-SYS116: SF Database and SGSN Signaling Interfaces

Duration Practical/Lab Content


3 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-CP02: Introduction to GSM Cellular
2 GPRS-CP07: Introduction to GPRS
Audience 3 GEN-CP03: Introduction to SS7 Signaling
The course is intended for technical staff requiring an
in-depth understanding of the GPRS SF database
configuration.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a detailed
description of the signaling function database for
GPRS.

Course Content
This course is designed to provide a detailed description of the individual functions and protocol layers in the
signaling function database of the GPRS network. It includes the parameters associated with signaling links.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Explain the function of SS7 in the GPRS network
Understand the use of the OMC-G for configuration
Explain the function and role of the MIB and SNMP and the use of OIDs within the database to provide a
structured database
Understand the role and functionality of the SS7 protocol layers to transport information around the network.

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 387


UMTS-CP13A: UMTS Overview (Non-Technical)

Duration Practical/Lab Content


1 day None

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. None, although a basic knowledge of mobile telecoms
is essential.
Audience
This course is intended for management, sales and
marketing staff requiring a basic appreciation of UMTS
principles.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a non-technical
basic introduction to UMTS technology including
Network Architecture.

Course Content
This course gives an overview of basic UMTS principles, including an overview of the UMTS network
architecture and the services/applications it hopes to deliver.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Describe the evolution of UMTS from GSM systems
Describe the services UMTS plans to deliver
Describe the architecture of a UMTS network
State the purpose of the major network components

388 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005


UMTS-PER560: NetPlan UMTS Static Simulator

Duration Practical/Lab Content


2 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 GSM-PER300: NetPlan
2 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS
Audience
This course is intended for system engineers who are
involved in UMTS system design and who are already
familiar with the basic NetPlan RF planning tool
operations.

Features
An instructor-led course providing a non-technical
basic introduction to UMTS technology including
Network Architecture.

Course Content
This course is designed to provide hands on training on the NetPlan UMTS Simulator.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Perform basic functions of the UMTS simulator by entering UMTS parameters and out putting UMTS data
files and images.
In the course, the student will learn to:
Enter the required parameters for the UMTS simulator
Run the UMTS simulator
Analyze the outputs

March 2005 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com 389


UMTS-PER570: NetPlan Fundamentals Plus UMTS

Duration Practical/Lab Content


5 days Yes

Location Prerequisite Motorola Courses


A recognized Motorola training facility, or other Refer to the course prerequisite policy.
premises by arrangement. 1 UMTS-CP13: Introduction to UMTS

Audience
This course is intended individuals involved with the
planning, design, analysis, and operation of UMTS
cellular systems.

Features
An instructor-le4rd course providing a non-technical
basic introduction to UMTS technology including
Network Architecture.

Course Content
This course provides hands-on training on the use of the NetPlan tool, along with the UMTS Simulator function.
NetPlan is a cellular modeling application designed to automate and optimize many cellular system planning,
design and analysis actions. This course is designed for the planning engineer who has no prior experience
using the NetPlan tool.

Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Use the NetPlan tool in cellular system planning, design, and optimization.
Perform basic operations of the UMTS simulator by entering given input parameters and retrieving output
data files and images.
In the course, the student will learn to:
Explain the purpose, features, and benefits of the NetPlan planning tool
Build and display sites in your system with assigned antennas, propagation boundaries, parameter sets and
other network elements in a system
Specify report thresholds, image parameters, intervals and colors used to define ranges in your images
Input traffic data
Create a traffic map, traffic carrier map set, and speed map
Create and display traffic and growth reports
Use Operational Analysis to display performance data for your system such as blocking and dropped calls
Enter basic UMTS simulator inputs and view reports of those inputs
Create and display UMTS simulator probe images
Create and display UMTS Achieved Data Rate image
Create Cell/Mobile statistics files
Display Cell/Mobile statistics using Data Graph.
Use the Cell/Mobile Analysis mode to display UMTS statistics
Use the UMTS Handover/Scrambling Code mode to create and view a Scrambling Code Plan and a
Handover list
Create and display a composite image, and a statistical image

390 Visit our web site at http://mynetworksupport.motorola .com March 2005